The Very

Thought of
Education
Psychoanalysis and the
Impossible Professions
Deborah P. Britzman
This page intentionally left blank.
The Very Thought of Education
This page intentionally left blank.
 THE VERY THOUGHT
OF EDUCATION

PSYCHOANALYSIS AND THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS

Deborah P. Britzman

s tat e u n i v e r s i t y o f n e w yo r k p r e s s
 Published by
State University of New York Press
Albany

© 2009 State University of New York

All rights reserved

Printed in the United States of America

No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever

without written permission. No part of this book may be stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means including
electronic, electrostatic, magnetic tape, mechanical, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise without the prior permission in writing of the publisher.

For information, address

State University of New York Press,
90 State Stree, Suite 700, Albany, NY 12207

Production, Laurie Searl

Marketing, Fran Keneston

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Britzman, Deborah P., 1952–

The very thought of education : psychoanalysis and the impossible
professions / Deborah P. Britzman.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 978-1-4384-2645-7 (hardcover : alk. paper)
1. Learning, Psychology of. 2. Psychoanalysis and education.
I. Title.
BF318.B787 2009
370.15—dc22 2008042785

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
 Contents

Preface vii

1 The Very Thought 1

2 Uneven Development 27

3 Reading 45

4 Psychology 61

5 Countertransference 81

6 Transference People 103

7 The Impossible Professions 127

Notes 149

References 153

Index 163

v
This page intentionally left blank.
 Preface

Everything “started” when I had nothing more to say, when I no

longer knew where to end or how to end. At that moment, what
I had recounted before came back, but in a way that was entirely
other, in a discontinuous way, in different forms (memories,
dreams, slips, repetitions), or it never came back. I understood
that I had tried, by telling the story of “my life,” not to recount
it—it is too much for words—but to master it. I had been at once
foolish and unfaithful.
—Sarah Kofman, “ ‘My Life’ and Psychoanalysis”

Freud’s (1900) book of dreams handed psychoanalysts more than a few clues
as to the utter difficulty of undergoing its strange education. He suggested
that even in our sleep there is work to be done and in waking life dream work
may well be the transfer point for our bungled actions, slips, jokes, misread-
ing, wild thoughts, and memories. Through insisting that the dream is both
other to conscious life and a commentary on it, by lifting the curtain of his
own dream theater to present what is unfaithful, foolish, and inadmissible in
rational life, by reading between these lines and even fi nding that which is not
there at all, by remembering the forgotten as signifying remnants of missed
meaning, and so, by starting with what is most unintentional, Freud asked
those learning psychoanalysis to become students of their ignorance. We are
asked to take the side of the wish for this other world by associating with it
and greeting this curiosity with warm regard. Kofman’s (2007b) fragment
of her analysis struggles with another sense of what psychoanalysis feels like:
without reason, bereft words return the speaker’s agony.
One hundred years later, many analysts think of Freud’s (1900) chapter six,
“The Dream Work,” as the text’s navel, the bodily excess that stands for what
can never happen again. Having to be born will signify our unrepresentable

vii
viii PREFACE

beginning, and our relation to the other. It will be felt as what Kofman
describes as “too much for words.” Yet if the psychoanalyst may only ask for
what is uncertain in words—putting unthinkable things into them and call-
ing into speech that which is not speech—the request creates more than words
can say. The paradox of dreams, and thus of psychoanalysis, is that words
return a foreign self; however eloquent, wild, or harsh these words feel, they
turn the speaker over to what is most enigmatic, most unresolved, and perhaps
irresolvable in her or his life.
From the perspective of what cannot be consciously noticed but contin-
ues to impress, the dream work compresses, distorts, displaces, reverses, frag-
ments, and envisages the day’s residues with our unfi lled wishes. It plays havoc
with beginning language, as if each night we learn words for the fi rst time.
Dreams are utterly literal, in the sense that they say what they mean without
meaning what they say. They arrange what Freud (1900) noticed as “a thing
that is capable of being represented” (340) and, in this way, propose our best sug-
gestions. Yet dreams are ambiguous and with this claim Freud will tell us that
the method of their interpretation will suffer from the radical indeterminacy
of its subject and object, that the wishes dreams somehow create cannot be
met with the analyst’s suggestion of how to think of them. Any interpretation
will be speculative and uncertain (Kohon 1986b). In the case of dreams and
in the case of education, considerations of representability will only mean
that something unknown is being presented. And dreams, Freud writes,
“are not made with the intention of being understood” (341). This radical condition
impresses the form, style, and force of both the method of dreams and their
interpretation. In this transference, both analyst and analysand are affected.
Freud was telling us that, just as with the dream work, the psychoanalyst,
along with the analysand, would be caught between not knowing and the
desire to know, and by creating a transfer of love into knowledge this con-
fl ict begins their strange education. The nature of this education, however, is
not easy to convey because it exists and does not exist at the same time. This
unusual tendency places psychoanalysis in the defenseless position of inviting
uncertainty and gambling with nonsense without losing its patience. At the
very least, and like the dream, psychoanalysis provides a frame to consider our
uncertainty by working through the order of anxiety that destroys our capacity
to think. The central theme of The Very Thought of Education begins with the
idea that, like the dream, education requires association, interpretation, and
a narrative capable of bringing to awareness, for further construction, things
that are farthest from the mind. And whatever education is dedicated to, all
education suffers a radical fate of indeterminacy. The approach that can best
 PREFACE ix

turn education inside out, in order to understand something of its emotional

situation and its inhibitions, symptoms, and anxieties, is psychoanalysis.
In any learning one feels pressure, without knowing from where it comes,
to make knowledge certain and so to stabilize the object lest it escape one’s
efforts. This fight with knowledge meets its limits in anguish over the loss
of certainty, a loss needed in order to symbolize what is new. In the dream
work of education, we act without knowing in advance what becomes of our
efforts and meet again ignorance and hubris, but also our passion and desire.
We hope that education can help us out of this mess and worry that education
is this mess. We can, with confidence, admit that because learning is always
an emotional situation, the very thought of education animates our phantasies
of knowledge, authority, and love. Uncertainty—itself the core of life—plays
with the meaning of education. Where psychoanalysis departs from other
styles of understanding may be in its willingness to create within its practices
a love affair with what is at most difficult to love: our uncertain beginnings
and times when understanding must fail. Without condition, psychoanalysis
may welcome these difficulties.
My understanding of education’s becoming—and what becomes of edu-
cation as one undergoes it—has been affected by going back to school: this
time, to learn to become a psychoanalyst. Psychoanalytic training involves
me with didactic seminars, with seeing patients, with being supervised, and
with my own analysis. Each dimension of this education seems to demand my
love and hate, that is, the transference with the difficulties, discontinuities,
and confl icts that this education must present. Readers will fi nd these affected
glimmers in the chapters that follow. But there are sidelines.
In the middle of writing this book I had a dream that seemed to bring
into relief what psychoanalytic education can feel like:

I was in a classroom, seated at a table, facing a female psychologist who was

examining me. I may have been in the fourth year class of the Psychoanalytic
Institute where I am a candidate. My classmates looked on indifferently. The
psychologist asks me what instrument I use to clinically assess my patients. I
can’t think of anything except the Rorschach test, but feel that must be the
wrong answer. I go dumb and cannot say anything to the examiner.

I suppose some of this dream comments on my feelings of insecurity and

wishes to measure up. I do not have a background in either the field of medi-
cine or psychology and there has always been, in the history of psychoanalytic
training, a question of what qualifies the lay analyst to do this work. The
other tension is whether psychoanalysis is on the side of art or science (Kohon
x PREFACE

1986a). Yet, as a beginner, this dream may also signify my worries of how my
patients assess me. Or maybe the dream frames my feelings about my psycho-
analytic education when I feel caught between a desire for mastery and a wish
not to know and where the transfer point is my ignorance. Perhaps the wish
is to be corrected or to be given a magical instrument that will settle it all.
The Rorschach test is not one of errors and corrections, but an invitation to
free association. It is composed of abstract images with the invitation to read
between its lines and narrate what cannot be there: our remainders. In free
association, there is no such thing as a wrong answer; yet in the dream I can-
not associate for fear of being wrong. The examiner is asking me something I
know nothing about, taunting me with her certainty and my ignorance. In a
fight with my own psychology, words fail.
In the analyst’s consulting room, speech takes hold of what is extraor-
dinary to its function: one word leads to another by way of what was never
intended. Meaning seems to lose its grip; one gets lost in words, or loses
words, or messes them up. If there is no such thing as an accident, it is only
because what is most accidental about us creates the psychoanalytic land-
scape. Things communicated are well beyond what one thinks one is saying
because of the enigmatic unconscious, because of the properties of language
itself, because of the transference, and because of the other who listens with
a free-floating attention and ideally, with an understanding of the fragility of
making emotional contact. The other touches my words, without knowing
in advance what becomes of meaning. An early goal of psychoanalysis was to
make the unconscious conscious. Then, it became a working through of resis-
tance to psychoanalysis. More modestly, there was the goal of moving from
neurosis to ordinary misery. Still later, some supposed the goal was to make
psychoanalytic contact and open both the analyst and the analysand to their
respective differences as they meet the unknown. Others will pose the work
as learning to play and to dream. Learning the truth of one’s desire would be
another elusive goal, as would the capacity to fi nd something novel and new
or even to write one’s own story. It is noteworthy to remark that there is no
agreement as to its goal. But there is also no goal that can settle what mean-
ings a self who dreams can create.
The analytic setting invites our transference, the troubles in learning,
and contains them in the playground of words. But the force of old con-
fl icts startles the work. They are painful to remember, turn on negation, and
express what is felt before it can be known. There are worries of falling, fears
of being misunderstood, and phantasies that the analyst will throw one out.
One is bored and worries the other knows this. One falls asleep. The most
 PREFACE xi

disorganized parts of a self are presented and disclaimed, berated and forgiven.
Considerations of representation come to feel as inconsiderate representations.
How strange these worries feel to conscious life, for no evidence can secure
their cause, there is nothing that causes the cause, the evidence at stake seems
mere, or what feels like a reason collapses into an excuse. What, after all,
is the proof of feelings? Without justification, I report my dreams and feel
my own strangeness. Their literalness is astounding and, on better days, they
make me laugh. I dream I am being introduced before my important lecture
as “Professor of Sausage.” I dream I am losing my grip and cannot do chin-
ups. I cannot pull myself up. “Losing your grip,” the analyst replies, “this is
our work.” I think, “Oh great. I am swimming in a sea of vulnerability and
words are barely strong enough to lend me a life raft. I am sinking between
words.” My psychoanalyst invites me to let go with free association. It is all
so difficult. I am embarrassed that while a great deal of my work and writing
concerns the pedagogy of uncertainty, I cannot stand my own feelings of not
knowing what to do. I want my analyst to tell me what to do, to help me. I
have confused needing help with wanting her to take away my bad feelings.
We both know telling me what to do will only lead to more resistance. All at
once I feel old and young.
All of this confusion between good and bad, between help and authority,
between the past and the present, and between words and things, I believe,
belongs to the educator’s dilemma, with the exception that the educational
setting, more often than not, becomes flummoxed by how free association
unravels its memories of certainty. And yet, as with analysis, much of what
goes on in education is the transference, the uncertain exchange of confu-
sion, love, and words. Many of us who teach, whether in compulsory school
settings, in the university, or in psychoanalytic institutes, consciously accept
the fact that the work of education is as difficult for us as it is for our students,
that a great deal of what occurs in seminars and classrooms seems beyond
conscious reach, that in the midst of unfolding pedagogy, more often than
not, we become undone. Many accept the fact that we do not know what
is going on or even how we feel about it, that students puzzle us or make us
mad, and that however much we plan in advance, however clear our lesson
plans feel to us, whatever beauty our syllabus design mirrors, however nar-
cissistic we may feel in conveying knowledge or however much we attempt
to convey our understanding to others or strain to receive the other’s incho-
ate views, the pedagogical encounter and what becomes of it are radically
unstable, subject to the unconscious and the dream work. From the other
side, students are involved in their own transference with the teacher, the
xii PREFACE

material, some archaic, demanding other and, to the education they did not
have. They may wish the teacher to leave them alone, or come closer, or tell
them what she wants. They may not want to know anything about it, or
demand to be given the proper instrument that will come with some sort of
guarantee. They may be anxious about measuring up or feel too big and too
smart. There is so much going on that we do not know about or do not want
to know anything about. Experience cannot protect us from our confl icts and
uncertainties since experience itself is confl ictive and uncertain and requires
our speculative interpretations.
In some sense, what education feels like is as difficult to convey as what
psychoanalysis feels like. They have that in common. Their respective emo-
tional situations as well share in the fact that, because they are so needed, both
are deeply misunderstood and perhaps feared. If both fields of practice require
our representation, there remains something unrepresentable about learning
them. This aporia is what we learn over and over through trying to represent
what is missing but nonetheless refi nes our desire. While there are particular
skills and techniques that may help us out of a mess, they cannot help us with
how the mess feels or even judge whether the mess is needed. And besides,
the unrepeatable encounters made in both fields mean that our experience
is always new experience fighting with the old. On this view, it is difficult
indeed to say how we are affected by learning to live and how it happens that
when it comes to the very thought of education, we often feel the need to be
certain without ever wondering why.

While working on this book, I was fortunate to receive a number of impor-

tant invitations to present aspects of this work, learn how well psychoanaly-
sis travels, and think more about the problems education gives. While the
errors in this book belong to me, I’d like to acknowledge the 2006 Canadian
Association of Teacher Education meeting and Professor M. Meyer of the
University of Hamburg, Germany, for their respective invitations to share my
work in the psychoanalysis of learning. Thanks to the American Education
Studies Association for inviting me to give the 2006 Kneller Lecture and to
the invitation to present in 2007 to the International Federation for Psycho-
analytic Education, held in Toronto. Special thanks to Dr. A. Sahin of the
MEF School in Istanbul, Turkey, who invited me to participate in the fi rst
conference in psychoanalysis and education held at the school. The topic of the
2007 conference was rethinking education, and its clinical orientation contin-
ues to inspire my work. My gratitude goes to those who taught me the clinical
 PREFACE xiii

intricacies of psychoanalytic listening: specifically I thank Dr. M. Flax and

Dr. J. Levy. I am lucky to have colleagues who care deeply for the psycho-
analytic life and the confl icts invited. I thank Professor C. Zemel who heard
most of this book and gave good advice. I have benefited from conversations
with Dr. O. Gozlan, and Professors Sliwinski and Lather. Thanks also must
go to Jane Banker, editor in chief at the State University of New York Press.
My gratitude again goes to Professor Pitt whose generosity, love, and keen
sense of life in education makes my life better. A short version of chapter two
originally appeared in the International Journal of Leadership in Education and
part of chapter three appeared in Changing English. I thank Taylor and Francis
Publishers for their permission to draw upon this earlier work.
This page intentionally left blank.
 CHAPTER ONE

The Very Thought

It is almost impossible to imagine the work of thinking, speaking, listening,

reading, and writing without stumbling into the history of one’s education.
The very thought directs a timeless affected world. We may be reminded of
how uncertain its certainties felt and then turn to the incalculability of its
accidents, mistakes, and unmarked events. Then, too, this transference may
multiply disreputable education since, more often than not, education and
what becomes of learning tend to be symbolically equated with correction,
completion, and with the bringing up of culture, knowledge, and life. Even
as we fight against the ways progress is its watchword, goal, vulnerability, and
contention, we may fi nd ourselves falling behind. And when memories such
as those we felt we had long ago discarded suddenly return what is incomplete
in this education, we may fi nd ourselves trying to shrug them off, for, after
all, they carry clouds of regret, shame, and even sadness. To wonder how the
very thought of this education impresses our desire for meaning, our phan-
tasies of knowledge and the other, our questions of origin and existence, our
sense of a profession and its learning, and, from all of this, our relation to the
world, imagining this education may fi nd its limit in the capture of com-
pulsory schooling and memories of a child waiting there. It is as if the very
thought of education will never let us go beyond what has already happened
and so refuses to grow up.
Our childhood of education is one reason the very thought of education
cannot seem to leave school and why education feels so concrete. No doubt,
compulsory school life—having to grow up there, passing through its grades,

1
2 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

and encountering an avalanche of certainty through its measures of success and

failure—configures how we consider literal education. But however adhesive
memory life in school turns out to be, the origin of the thought of education
cannot be found there. Long before we enter the classroom we have already
been written upon by what Hannah Arendt (1993a) simply called “the fact
of natality”(61): that we are born and enlivened by our fi rst other’s readings,
which leave in its wake our capacity for the transference, nascent interpreta-
tions telegraphing our needs, demands, and desires. This impressive education
registers our drama of dependency, helplessness, and love, all lost and found
in the transference: in hopes for what language, knowledge, and the other
can bring. Affected education will take Arendt (1993b) to the problem of
beginnings with her claim that “the essence of education is natality, the fact
that human beings are born into the world” (174). And this will bring us into
the paradox that while the needed experience of education somehow forms
thought, the very thought of education is difficult to think. The psychoana-
lyst Wilfred Bion (1997) will make stranger education’s natality when he pro-
posed a constitutive alienation in the name of “wild thoughts,” or “thoughts
without a thinker (27).”1 What could cause the thought of education to take
place within us yet leave us feeling as if its events happened without our
knowing why?
To bind education to its own unthought, to make a case for the idea that
something within education resists thinking, that there is something about
education that one knows nothing about, may seem counterintuitive to the
project of education since ostensibly, education is a deliberation, a judgment,
and, oddly, a result of itself. Yet as both experience and as institution, as
training ground and as learning life, and as natality and its repression, peo-
ple who are both undergoing education as they are directing others in their
learning rarely think the thought of education. Instead, they may fall back
into their knowledge and its transmission. This is one form of resistance, not
to education or what happens to people as they influence one another, but
to the incompleteness that education animates and disavows. And nowhere
is this tension of incompleteness felt with more force than when we think
the thought of education dynamically: as uneven development, as confl ict,
as promise, and as reparation. To bring into relief the contours of this edu-
cation leads me to inquire into the particular education of adults: how it is
that teachers, university professors, psychoanalysts, philosophers, artists, adult
analysands, and even characters from novels confront unconscious life to learn
from their inner world and feel that they need to know this world more deeply
to overcome inhibitions, interpret reality, and create anew. Our guide to this
 THE VERY THOUGHT 3

world will be “the impossible professions,” a formulation Freud (1925c) fi rst

rehearsed when he commented on the creative work of one of his colleagues
in education.
Freud saw in the work of psychoanalysis, governance, and education
the interminability of trying to influence others who have their own minds
and tied these relations to practitioners’ unconscious resistance, to the fact of
their natality, and to their psychical life. Education itself will be interminable
because it is always incomplete and because it animates our own incomplete-
ness. And one can fi nd “the education of education” within the stammers,
confl icts, and dreams of adults who meet their otherness as they encounter
the understanding of others. While education then will reference both pro-
cedures and unaccountable affects, the registration of education, more often
than not, is dissociated from the very thought of education. And nowhere
is this problem more poignant than when brought to consideration of the
teacher’s world that educates, as she or he is educated. We will see that there
is a field called education that typically refers to the training of teachers. Then
there is the experience of education that we associate with life’s lessons, the
accumulation of knowledge, and maybe the university. How these worlds
separate and cut short the ways in which we imagine any education leads me
to psychoanalysis, putting the very thought of education—including the one
belonging to psychoanalysts—on the couch to invite free association and then
read into its congealed matters. I ask readers to entertain the question of what
it can mean to think the thought of education as experience, as pedagogy,
as affect, as uneven development, as intersubjectivity, and as the basis of the
transference and the countertransference. And we will relate these desires for
love, recognition, and knowledge to that which resists it: thoughts that we are
making too much of education.
The transference and countertransference are concepts worked with
throughout this book. The psychoanalytic assumption is that there can be
no learning without transference, but since the transference is also a needed
obstacle to learning, it is subject to analysis, the work of deconstruction.
These terms orient, construct, and obscure an understanding of how com-
munication always conveys the otherness of conscious intent, and so touches
a history without origin. The transference and countertransference reach into
the problem of how language itself comes to gamble with its objects and our
perceptions of them by way of wishes, phantasies, and anxieties and defenses.
Imagine these words as characters in a psychoanalytic theater, as a play with
the dispersal, force, and transformation of our affected unconscious history
punctuated by our conscious attitude toward it. Their form will revive and
4 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

revise confl icts of love and hate, transferred when we are with important
others, when we fall in love, when we try to make the unfamiliar familiar,
when we attempt to understand, and when we try to refi nd in the world
images of our own likeness and difference. And the countertransference will
be the educator’s reply. The transference and the countertransference are also
technical terms to understand psychoanalytic events from the perspective of
the logic of affect with the question of what else libidinal ties, ambivalence,
and scenes of hate made from being with others unconsciously convey. We
can think of the transference and the countertransference as composing and
decomposing a history of affected education, condensing and displacing time
with what is unconscious.
When a sixty-year-old Freud (1914b) was asked how he came to choose
his life work and so began by reflecting on his own schoolboy psychology,
he presented a story of his transference to the authority of school and teach-
ers, forever linking the transference to the very thought of education. This
led him to notice his love affair with knowledge yet to be learned and his
incredulity at having learned again that school still tugged on his mind. His
opening remarks can be read as what the transference feels like:

It gives you a queer feeling if, late in life, you are ordered once again to
write a school essay. But you obey automatically like the old soldier who, at
the word “Attention,” cannot help dropping whatever he may have in his
hands and who fi nds his little fi ngers pressed along the seams of his trousers.
It is strange how readily you obey the orders, as though nothing particular
had happened in the last half-century. But in fact you have grown old in
the interval. (241)

In the next paragraph, Freud comments on the authority of these memories to

turn the clock back and so “the present time seemed to sink into obscurity”
(241) even as it still manages to affect what is remembered and repeated. Yet
the repetition of feelings—in the form of needing to obey—is not the same
as the old events now long gone: something more is yet to be understood
when one tries to account for one’s desire and its remainders, when one tries
to think the immaterial material that shapes styles of love and hate, and thus
of learning. If our capacity for the transference and the countertransference
leaves us with the timeless presence of education, it is also the means for sym-
bolizing how it is that education’s return turns us into a child.
So difficult is it to imagine this florid scenery of education, so difficult
is it to interpret this transference, that we would rather forget its erotic force.
We do not typically begin with how identification with instituted education
 THE VERY THOUGHT 5

threads through our object world to affect what we come to call ethics,
responsibility, care, and critique, and to how we feel these experiences inter-
nally. We may not often think that what resides within the heart of knowl-
edge we either hold dear or attempt to expel into others is a dormant theory
of its truth and, too, unconscious instructions as to how it can be or should
be learned or avoided. We may not often associate the thought of education
with an unconscious history of our infantile relations to theory, knowledge,
and to others and as animated again in any educational relation. We may not
often notice what else is communicated by the thought that we do not wish
to know anything about it. And yet, for there to be any learning at all, our
composition of learning begins with what is not a composition but a poten-
tial: existence.
Such an expansive sense of education is usually foreclosed by the very
thought of education. More often than not, the very thought of educa-
tion collapses our capacity to think with the thing-in-itself. How does the
thought of this education become so small that it is mainly considered as a
matter for instructing the inexperienced and as affecting only the young?
Why does the thought of education stall in measures of success and fail-
ure? How then did this idea transfer to characterize the ways adults learn
a profession or attempt self-understanding? Is there something about being
educated, about undergoing education, that incurs our regression to infantile
dependency and invites defenses against helplessness? If the experience of
education overrides thinking the very thought of education, what problems
are then inherited by learning the impossible professions? More simply, when
it comes to the very thought of education, what is it like to feel one’s begin-
nings over and over and to receive oneself and be received by others as if one
has never had to start life?
We have noticed the difficulty Sigmund Freud had with his school assign-
ment, his love and hate with authority, and his race with what remains time-
less about his own time. It seems as though education is the transference and
we may spend our lives trying to destroy its authority. Fifty years later, his
daughter Anna Freud spoke of her education from the vantage of her teach-
ers’ countertransference, how she imagined her teachers saw her. Late in life,
Anna Freud (1969) received an honorary degree of Doctor of Science from
the Jefferson Medical College Medical School. At the time, she was sixty-nine
years old. She was surprised at this unexpected turn of events and continually
wondered, “Why me?” In her address upon receiving the honor, Anna Freud
returned to her own psychoanalytic education that occurred before there were
any established psychoanalytic institutes. Her psychoanalytic education relied
6 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

on personal analysis, the seeing of patients, participation in study groups,

and in a new psychoanalytic society her father, Sigmund Freud, organized in
Vienna. By the time she received this award, Anna Freud would have founded
her own curriculum on ego psychology in the British Psychoanalytical Soci-
ety in London, oversaw and helped translate the collected works of Sigmund
Freud, served as senior training analyst, and would continue to be in great
demand as a consultant in the applied fields of law, education, and psychology,
what Freud saw as “the impossible professions.”
Anna Freud was a teacher by background and a “lay analyst” by profession.
She did not have medical training and so represented a side of psychoanalysis
unhinged from its authority. Both situations—her background in education
and her work in psychoanalysis—may have influenced her humane defi nition
of clinical experience as consisting of “practical contact with human beings”
(512), a measure without time, credential, or institution. The Vienna Society,
however, could not escape putting back into place the authoritative education
of its senior members:

For many years the analytic beginner in the Society was looked down on
as “inexperienced.” I remember that even the discussion group which we
initiated among ourselves for the exchange of opinions was officially called
the “Children’s Seminar,” not because child cases were discussed there,
but because the discussants themselves were considered to be in analytic
infancy. (513)

We can imagine this space of education made small by the teacher’s counter-
transference, where students are looked down upon and oddly are introjected
into the teacher’s old self only to be projected back into the world in the form
of needy infants. Is it the case that, even without a formal school setting, those
who come before us have a need to send beginners, and thus their education,
back to kindergarten?
Somehow, the idea of lived education becomes “a wild thought,” a frus-
tration that goes on without a thinker. When thoughts of education are not
permitted to leave the classroom, a place that cannot think itself into being
without our being there, the concept of education loses its allegorical force, its
likeness to the transference and the countertransference, and its nonsemblance
with the problem of learning to live with others. When education is reduced
to its most literal time, it collapses into phantasy and idealization to foreclose
our capacity to think the thought of education. Lost as well is the question of
why any education is an encounter with what is not yet, an experience with
what is most incomplete in us. To think the force of education in this way
 THE VERY THOUGHT 7

permits one to leave behind our relentless repetition of “inexperience” and

attend to the problem of what it is to learn from having experience at all. To
think the thought of education as a working through of phantasies of educa-
tion asks a great deal of us since the character of education itself can neither
live without reinstituting its own childhood nor leave that which follows
from it: the avalanche of complaints, disappointments, narcissistic injuries,
and “queer feelings” that all too often collapse the meaning of education with
the classroom and its measures of success and failure and experience and inex-
perience. Without questions, education sinks into melancholia.
We can, however, interpret this case and be curious why it is so, why
the idea of education has been so scaled down that it can only refer to what
has already happened to us and then what needs to happen to inexperienced
others. By putting something one does not want into the past and project-
ing these anxieties into others, one maintains the false hope that what has
already happened no longer has any force to hurt one today. Anna Freud
(1995) considered denial as the ego’s defense against its own vulnerable cer-
tainty and as a fight with the nature of truth. Indeed, throughout her discus-
sion of ego defenses, she raises the question of whether education must fi rst
invite neurosis to even wonder what lessons it could actually teach. We will
see how the ego’s defenses, animated by the fact of having to be educated,
churn when educating others. We will see how education begins with the
anxiety of dependency, helplessness, and fears of separation. This can mean
that our defenses against thinking the thought of education, itself a temporary
solution, somehow anticipate our educational dangers: dependency and the
anxieties of having to relive the profound helplessness of one’s infancy. Here,
the fact of natality is a current of emotional life, electrifying the transference
and the countertransference to education.
Whereas Anna Freud noted the infantilizing qualities of her analytic
education, we can fi nd this repetition of anxiety and defense in the university
as well. It usually comes in the form of teaching, for example, when books
that might make a difference to how one lives are treated as a still life (Natura
Morta). Slavitt’s (2007) translation of the Oedipus cycle carries a little warn-
ing to his readers. In his preface to Sophocles’s Theban Plays, he writes: “I am
mindful of the fact that some of the readers of this book may be students to
whom it has been assigned. I apologize to them and hope they can somehow
overlook that unfortunate compulsion and fi nd ways to respond to Sophocles’
poetry innocently—as if they had come to these pages voluntarily and even
eagerly” (x). That education might ruin the Oedipus story is not without
irony since Oedipus refused to be educated by the prophecy that he then
8 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

accidentally, or unconsciously, carried out. After all, Oedipus was told that he
would be king, but only after he murdered his father and married his mother.
It was not until he completed the unspeakable that his tragedy could begin
and that he could then think about his own hand in life.
Slavitt, however, is suggesting another fate for Oedipus when sent to
school. There is a worry that readers who greet Oedipus may turn away from
the problem of knowledge. If the tragedy plays through conventional rules of
the pedagogical exchange, if the teacher treats the book as a thought without
students, the unconscious dilemma of Oedipus will be strangely cut short:
Oedipus will be killed off before he can have his terrible education. Our
translator may be anxious about this particular transference, not with Oedi-
pus, but with the authority of the classroom. Poor Oedipus may be lost again,
and we may repeat a part of his fate, what will come to be called “the pas-
sion for ignorance.” Whether there is any innocence to be recovered in our
encounter with Oedipus may be a question of a different order; Slavitt’s apol-
ogy, however, bears witness to our educational misfortunes and the difficulty
of becoming a volunteer in the free association of one’s own learning.
Perhaps the largest misfortune that will concern us has to do with what
the philosopher Alain Badiou (2005) in his discussion of art and philosophy
saw as “the collapse of the pedagogic theme” (7). We have already noted its
collapse in trying to symbolize the childhood of education without having to
repeat it. The pedagogic theme is one that can hardly accompany the thought
of education because, more often than not, pedagogy is presented as the great
controlling emissary opposed to its own struggle for symbolization. With
the collapse of the pedagogic theme, Badiou was pointing to a loss of faith in
the idea of transmission, whether this transmission takes shape through the
science of didacticism, the feelings of catharsis, or the philosophical romance
with openings, all of which refer to the decline of Western philosophy to
think the limits of its own thematic. The pedagogic theme is a condensation
made from the idea that education refers to both the teaching of youth and
thus is concerned with the problem of the transmission, and to that which
ties knowledge to truth, a more intimate transference registering the Eros of
encounter and ordering our desire for knowledge. By its nature, the peda-
gogic theme places knowledge and truth at odds and so contains a constitutive
confl ict. If the presence of pedagogy is as much a procedure of knowledge
as it is a relation to the other, and as such is always entangled in the problem
of truth, the transference to education means that knowledge will have to
pass through affect, the residue of our questions of love and hate. And when
truth attempts to assert itself through disavowing the love that put it into
 THE VERY THOUGHT 9

place, Badiou argues, it is truth that experiences a powerlessness: there is no

truth that can be the whole truth and nothing but the truth. Procedures of
knowledge will also contain the excess of affect: we meet exceptions, limits,
anxieties, and desire.
Badiou imagines education as the link between art and philosophy, since
both modes of expression suffer a pedagogical theme. Yet he also sees in art a
possibility for education:

Art is pedagogical for the simple reason that it produces truths and because
“education” (save in its oppressive or perverted expressions) has never meant
anything but this: to arrange forms of knowledge in such a way that some
truth may come to pierce a hole in them.
What art educates us for is therefore nothing apart from its own exis-
tence. The only question is that of encountering this existence, that is, of
thinking through a form of thought [penser une pensée]. (9)

What educates us is our existence, which is perhaps why Badiou places in

scare quotes the concept of education. Another question is hinted at by both
Anna Freud and the translator Slavitt. Can education be saved from its per-
verted and oppressive tendencies, or must the pedagogic theme collapse in
order for us to think it?
To encounter existence is another way of speaking about thinking. Badi-
ou’s education appears not as a thought of itself but as thinking thought itself,
as existence. And one quality of thinking is that it arranges thought in such a
way that doubt bothers knowledge procedures, tears truth with another truth.
Here is where the pedagogic theme may collapse into what Slavitt (2007) saw
as “that unfortunate compulsion” (x) of education, itself a feature of thought.
The paradox comes after the collapse: when we analyze our history of edu-
cation, we experience uneven development, regression, and repetition and
education cannot direct itself to this existence, to what it is like to need edu-
cation and to think what happens to thought within its own unfolding. What
collapses this theme is education’s forgetting of its own natality.

PSYCHOANALYTIC THEMATICS

Our theme involves the concept of education with the intimate problem of
trying to encounter affected and affecting existence as our transference to
learning to live. For psychoanalysis, education is both a human condition and
the means to symbolize our conditions. It is both a force of depression and
its antidepressant. Yet education poses a dilemma for psychoanalysis because
10 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

however different these fields of practice are, however much psychoanalysis is

concerned with freeing the mind from our educational illness, psychoanalysis
is not immune from its own education. Conceptions of education will also be
the psychoanalyst’s illness, even as its therapeutic mode attempts to propose
an education without authority or suggestion. With the help of Badiou’s view
of art, we will try to grasp the concept of education wherever it can be lost
and found, and, indeed, claim that the refi nding of education is predicated on
its loss and negation. There will be confl icts in judgment’s polarities, a fight
between objectivity and subjectivity and between affi rmation and destruc-
tion, and an odd thought called negation that comments on not thinking
(Freud 1925b). Thus, a deep dilemma for any education will concern how to
symbolize its work of refi nding its lost objects.
To think the thought of education, I draw upon philosophy, literature,
and psychoanalysis. Literature serves as my third term, used to open questions
of loss, desire, and freedom. Since literature cannot be in charge of itself but
charges us to think, a theory of reading will be needed to contain the problem
of resistance to these subjective adventures. From psychoanalytic speculations,
beginning with Freud and moving on to the formulations of the mind created
by the object relations’ theories of Melanie Klein, Donald Winnicott, and
Wilfred Bion, we will explore the unworldly world of love and hate in think-
ing. On occasion, one of the psychoanalysts who had a great deal of criti-
cism toward the epistemology of psychoanalytic education, Jacques Lacan,
will be given his due. The field of psychoanalysis will also be pressured, with
understandings of subjectivity drawn from philosophers, novelists, poets, and
musicians, from the vantage of their creative dilemmas and inhibitions. This
approach not only places psychoanalysis in the world of others but also opens
psychoanalytic views to its own potential literary education. Education, then,
will serve as the fragile bond and the transitional space. There, in its various
guises and in confrontation with art, education will lead us to the problem of
learning to live from confl icts among love, hate, and ambivalence, affects of
great force and persuasion needed to think. Affects without their symboliza-
tion are also where thought collapses, since they entangle need, demand, and
desire with a terrible absence. Our greatest pedagogical theme will then col-
lapse with the question of affect and from this ruin we will consider the urge
toward reparation.
I have mentioned a few times, the conception of education, the thought
of education, and thinking education. These conditions and points of vulner-
ability all turn on the question of emotional pain. Bion (1993a) understands
thinking to be secondary to the advent of thoughts and, as noted earlier, he
 THE VERY THOUGHT 11

considered thoughts without a thinker from the vantage of “wild thoughts.”

He also believes this problem is insolvable and thus can only be met with care,
humility, and curiosity. In Bion’s view, thinking contains the emotional pain
of thoughts, but also is the means for tolerating affect. Bion classified thoughts
into three areas: preconceptions, or innate ideas, conceptions, or the link-
ing of preconceptions to a realization or satisfaction, and concepts, having to
do with a greater freedom of symbol formation. Concepts open elaboration,
metaphor, reverie, and creativity. They come after. On this view thoughts
impose themselves on the mind and thinking is the apparatus for digesting
thoughts. “I repeat,” Bion writes, “thinking has to be called into existence
to cope with thoughts” (111). Bion sees thoughts as akin to the frustration of
trying to know something unknown at the precise point where one must also
encounter absence. The choice is stark: one either thinks thoughts or evacu-
ates them.
Along with Arendt’s (1993a) understanding of natality, thinking, and
responsibility, the philosopher of modern critical theory, Theodor Adorno,
who wrote on art, philosophy, and music, will be used as counterpoints to
psychoanalytic views. Both wrote passionately about education and its respon-
sibility. Like Arendt, Adorno (1998) writes with force about the destruction
left in the wake of the evacuation of frustration: when the human destroys her
or his own capacity to think humanely and exchanges this vulnerability for
instrumental reason. Adorno, however, never spoke of infant development.
He never noted, for instance, what the infant or child needed from others to
become a proper human. Except for his letters to friends and family and his
recently published dreams, Adorno rarely spoke of parents—the mother and
father’s love, or the son’s disappointments and fears. Yet Adorno was con-
cerned, even obsessed, with the problem of uneven development and our
tendency toward regression to an archaic state: not of infancy, for the infant
cannot know its own duration and, as Arendt saw it, infancy represents both
our beginnings and reception into an already made world of others. In her
sense, the infant is the original stranger and the question is whether adults
could tolerate the vulnerable nature of this being.
Adorno’s notion of what we could call backward development leaned
on the psychoanalytic idea of thoughtlessness, a terrible identification with
and projection of the destruction of the death drive. The regression he spoke
of was cultural and found its home in education: that whole societies could
enact a horror of the other, regressing to what he saw as an archaic state of
superstition, then murderous rampage in the name of totalitarianism and fas-
cism. The human, he insisted, was subject to inhumanity. Adorno’s (1998)
12 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

picture of development then begins with the devastating occurrence of adult

regression—not to an earlier state—but to a terrible aggression where nothing
would matter. And while he made this argument in many of his essays, his
most devastating critique came under the title, “Education after Auschwitz.”
And this will lead him to pressure education: “The premier demand upon all
education is that Auschwitz not happen again” (191). The essay drew from
Freud’s (1930/1929) Civilization and Its Discontents with the view that the
speakable and the unspeakable go hand in hand and that it is the responsibility
of education to symbolize these confl icts rather than repeat them.
While these philosophers saw the world in education, the psychoanalysts
saw in the internal world something unworldly. Bion gave his attention to
the paradox of internal frustration—whether it is tolerated or evaded and
as that which ushers in the need to think and the force that destroys think-
ing. He owes a great deal to the theories of Melanie Klein who saw frustra-
tion, or what she called “phantasies,” as conveying an original anxiety and
defenses against this as the reason for why thinking is associated with mental
pain. While Klein’s views are discussed more fully in chapters three, four, and
seven, her understanding of the relation between the infant and mother as
the basis of psychical life, and so of object relations carried on and elaborated
throughout one’s life, are introduced here to raise startling questions of what
it feels like to think at all.
Klein’s (1937) turn to the infant, she maintained, was one way for her to
“study the interaction of all the various forces which go to build up this most
complex of all human emotions which we call love” (57). The mother is the
fi rst object of the infant’s love and hate and Klein believed that the infant’s
urge for love is fi rst felt through the bodily experience of satisfaction from the
breast and that this experience begins the infant’s capacity for phantasies of
goodness. Phantasies of badness are made when the infant feels the mother’s
absence: no breast. This anxiety is the infant’s reality and these phantasies feel
as if they make the world, even as this anxiety fragments the world into bits
and pieces. Klein (1937) simply termed this ongoing struggle as “the emo-
tional situation of the baby” (58).
Klein’s (1952) later description of what is emotional about this emotional
world is vivid and shocking, specifically when she imagines the raging infant
caught in its own riotous phantasies of frustration and hatred:

In his destructive phantasies he bites and tears up the breast, devours it,
annihilates it; and he feels that the breast will attack him in the same way. As
urethral- and anal-sadistic impulses gain in strength, the infant in his mind
attacks the breast with poisonous urine and explosive faeces, and therefore
 THE VERY THOUGHT 13

expects it to be poisonous and explosive toward him. The details of his

sadistic phantasies determine the content of his fear of internal and external
persecutors, primarily of the retaliating (bad) breast. (63)

Klein believed these fi rst horrific impressions of the infant were permanent,
in the sense that our human situation is always emotional, that it mirrors our
bodily helpless, which feels persecutory, and that it is absolutely beholden to
the other’s love. So original is the force of confl icts between goodness and
love, and badness and hate, that they compose the internal world and set it
to work with phantasies of destruction, anxieties over loss of love, archaic
defenses against pain, and feelings of guilt and gratitude. Almost inexplica-
bly—from such remorse and anguish, from a constitutive negativity—a desire
for reparation will emerge. Klein will see this movement as the depressive
position and the form it will take is symbolization, the gradual capacity to
differentiate phantasy from the whole object. But because symbolization leans
on absence, every perception, every blink of the eye, will pose the question
of mourning or melancholia. Tolerating the emotional pain of existence will
usher in the depressive position: feelings of pining, sadness, and loss joined
with desires for love, reparation, and gratitude.
Yet before symbolization there is the power of bodily affect and what
absence feels like. Joan Riviere (1964) put such feelings into memorable
words:
The baby cannot distinguish between ‘me’ and ‘not-me’; his own sensations
are his world, the world to him; so when he is cold, hungry or lonely there
is no milk, no well-being or pleasure in the world—the valuable things
in life have vanished. And when he is tortured with desire or anger, with
uncontrollable, suffocating screaming, and painful, burning evacuations,
the whole of his world is one of suffering; it is scalded, torn and racked
too. . . . It is our fi rst experience of something like death, a recognition of
the non-existence of something, of an overwhelming loss, both in ourselves
and in others, as it seems. And this experience brings an awareness of love (in
the form of desire), and a recognition of dependence (in the form of need), at the
same moment as, and inextricably bound up with, feelings and uncontrol-
lable sensations of pain and threatened destruction within and without. (9)

From these bodily affects, both Klein and Riviere brought to our consider-
ation a genealogy of love and an understanding that to love is to come into
existence.
While Klein (1930) will speak a great deal about tolerating the actual
world, in her discussion of the work of symbol formation, she considered these
early phantasies of destruction and reparation as the means for developing a
14 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

sense of reality: “As the ego develops, a true relation to reality is gradually
established out of this unreal reality. . . . A sufficient quantity of anxiety is
the necessary basis for an abundance of symbol-formation and of phantasy;
an adequate capacity on the part of the ego to tolerate anxiety is essential if
anxiety is to be satisfactorily worked over” (221).
The paradox Klein presents the baby with is that to encounter reality
there must fi rst be something that is not reality. Reality goes on without us, is
painful to encounter, and, in this sense, may be linked to an original absence.
To approximate any meaning will be to know one’s emotional relation to real-
ity and to retroactively symbolize that encounter. Yet this work depends on
phantasies that also set meanings loose from the confines of the thing. These
procedures are a part of reality itself since reality never stays the same and, if it
does, then there is no reality at all. And so a great deal of the ego’s work will
be a working through or tolerating both the loss of the world as it wished it to
be and feeling the anxiety that signals absence and the ego defenses. In Klein’s
view, and in much of what follows from it, thinking will be conceptualized as
the creative transformation of affect into symbolization. And symbolization,
or putting things into words, will be our greatest substitute for the original
object and thus our most enigmatic resource.
The work of Klein and Bion on the emotional meaning and poetics of
thinking thoughts and the understanding that thinking involves emotional
pain revised Freud’s view of how we come to think at all. Freud (1911)
thought of this confl ict through the divisions made between pleasure and
reality. In his “Formulations on Two Principles of Mental Functioning”
Freud described our earliest attempts to think our thoughts through primary
and secondary processes made from the movements of pleasure and unplea-
sure and an encounter with what he called the reality principle. The large
question for Freud concerned the action of “turning away from reality” (218),
but also how we come to know the world and judge the difference between
experience and event if thinking begins within the primary processes, or the
“[Lust–Unlust] principle . . . the pleasure principle” (219). At the origin of
thought, Freud placed a wish for pleasure into a hallucination of satisfaction.
This wish is inevitably disappointed, and so another method will be used to
form what Freud called a conception of the world beyond the wish. The baby
will cry out for the other. In the name of pleasure, bodily action will then
be the next attempt to affect one’s world. The confl ict between phantasy or
hallucination and the need for satisfaction will set in motion a new principle:
“what was presented in the mind was no longer what was agreeable but what
was real, even if it happened to be disagreeable. This setting-up of the reality
 THE VERY THOUGHT 15

principle proved to be a momentous step” (219). What is momentous is that

consciousness of the world comes into being from the wish for this world,
a wish that is in some way a defense against what Freud called “motor dis-
charge” (221) or the bodily force of affect: cries, screams, kicking, pushing
away, and clinging, but also holding, grabbing, listening, and looking. These
bodily actions that insist on presence are eventually, through symbol forma-
tion, transformed into what is most abstract about us: thinking thoughts and
accepting psychical reality as an enigmatic wish to communicate without
knowing what this communication brings. Thinking is how the body toler-
ates its needs, wants, and desires; it is the means for symbolizing absence and
refi nding the lost object.
When Freud placed the confl ict between pleasure and reality principles
as the basis of mental functioning, he made a relation to a nonrelation, and so
kept thinking close to the as if world of imagination. His description of think-
ing says as much: thinking as “an experimental kind of acting” (221). What
comes before this experiment, however, is its combustible material: the loss of
the object, anxiety, hallucination, bodily affect, and doubts over ever refi nd-
ing that fi rst experience of satisfaction and bliss. As a part of the same mental
process, thinking and phantasizing become “our weak spot” (223) because
both emerge from anxiety over loss of the object, touching unpleasure and
cueing the ego defenses. The eventual confl ict that thinking will catch itself
in is this: “Just as the pleasure-ego can do nothing but wish, work for a yield
of pleasure, and avoid unpleasure, so the reality-ego need do nothing but
strive for what is useful and guard itself against damage” (223). The perpetual
trouble, however, is that what is useful and what incurs damage cannot be
known in advance, that reason itself will be on the side of ego defenses and the
negation of them, and that the reality ego will always experience uncertainty
over meaning as it tries to refi nd its lost objects. Thinking, then, will never be
so far way from the absence that calls it forth.
One curious turn concludes Freud’s essay on these two mental principles
and, in my view, interferes with the essay’s circuitous meanings and Freud’s
thinking about thinking. He leaves his study of the internal world to com-
ment on the confl ict between art and education, as if to say the same dynam-
ics of interiority repeat in the objects of perception, in our creative work, in
our knowledge procedures, and in the institutions we place into the external
world. Yet the repetition is never the same since our own self-difference can-
not be completed by what we put into the world. With this idea of repetition,
Freud’s narrative style breaks into a list that introduces otherness into the
heart of the reality principle: sexuality, neurosis, and the unconscious. The
16 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

unconscious will be the scene of all havoc, affecting even the work of writing
it into a sentence:
(8) The strangest characteristic of unconscious (repressed) processes, to
which no investigator can become accustomed without the exercise of great
self discipline, is due to their entire disregard of reality-testing; they equate
reality of thought with external actuality, and wishes with their fulfi ll-
ment—with the event—just as happens automatically under the dominance
of the ancient pleasure principle. (225)

So measures of reality suffer from symbolic equation, leading Freud to remark

on the nature of the inquiry: “One is bound to employ the currency that is in
use in the country one is exploring—in our case, neurotic currency” (225).
Just as the very thought of education is about to enter Freud’s essay, he seems
to imply that to explore the nature of our reality we must use its neurotic
currency to exchange it with something better, an education that no longer
needs its neurotica.
Freud will place art on the side of the pleasure principle; it need not
obey any rules of reality and so frees itself to create possibility. Yet he will
also insist that art does something with the reality principle that makes it
pleasurable since the artist’s phantasies “are molded into truths of a new
kind . . . as precious reflections of reality” (224). Education does not have
this flexibility and Freud places it on the side of attempting to instill the real-
ity principle. Yet, in so doing, education creates for itself a new contradic-
tion because of how the reality principle comes to be a principle at all. While
education tries to side with reality, what brings the reality principle to our
side is the promise of refi nding love, which then disturbs our perception of
reality. Freud left us a clue as to a constitutive impossibility of education, a
kernel of which will disorient education and become caught in the throat of
an impossible profession:
Education can be described without more ado as an incitement to the con-
quest of the pleasure principle, and to its replacement by the reality prin-
ciple; it seeks, that is, to lend its help to the developmental process which
affects the ego. To this end it makes use of an offer of love as a reward from
the educators; and it therefore fails if a spoilt child thinks that it possesses
that love in any case and cannot lose it whatever happens. (224)

The problem is that education is not a conquest of reality but only a fragile tie
to the uncertainties reality entails. It cannot proceed without the transference
love, yet its procedures are vulnerable to the educator’s pleasure principle, the
countertransference.
 THE VERY THOUGHT 17

Freud, Klein, and Bion leave us with the great problem of what it can
mean to think at all and whether education is a solution or a problem. Each
will bind thinking to a frustration, a wish, a lost object, and an object rela-
tion. Adorno will remind us of the traumatic collapse and art will serve as
our radical hope. Each will suggest that thinking is a working through of that
which resists yet is in need of symbolization in order to think. Love and hate
will never be so far away, nor will our wishes to do away with the mental pain
incurred from trying to know what can bring satisfaction. But without the
wish to know, there will be no thinking at all. These are also the dilemmas
made from education’s offer of love. It cannot be unconditional because love is
vulnerable to education and to the transference that makes it absurd. All that
education has to give is the offer of the transference (Kohon 2005). The wish
to know will also be where the pedagogical theme will collapse. As for the
educator’s paradox, it begins in a confusion of time. The educator was once
a child with frustrated thoughts and fears over loss of love and is now in the
position to frustrate others with an offer of love that cannot really be given
without incurring loss, anxiety, defenses, and phantasies. Could it be that
education, like psychoanalysis, is an attempt to cure by love?

LINES OF INQUIRY

In the chapters that follow, education will have a psychic life through trans-
ference and countertransference and a social life with its impossible insistence
on adapting to reality. Sometimes education will appear as instituted educa-
tion: schools, training institutes, and pedagogical exchange. At other times,
education will take shape between the play of mothers and infants, where
both will be subject to a future they cannot know but nonetheless, in their
different ways, anticipate and act upon. The strangest education will take
place in the psychoanalytic session: as catharsis, as mystery, as transference
and countertransference, and as a love of language. The education we cannot
know but that nonetheless insists will be associated with the unconscious.
This will be our most accidental education and will contain resistance to
learning. We will see education struggle with its unnameable qualities; times
when what is unspeakable within its procedures destroys its promise for a
future and leaves in its wake a terrible betrayal. This “bad education” will
certainly be the problem in chapter three, a meditation on reading a novel,
where education itself contains a phantasy of murdering its students, and
where teachers resign themselves to their passion for ignorance, to not want-
ing to know anything about it.
18 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

We will also see that education is affected by the desire of the educator,
yet this presents a problem for how we come to know our educational acts
as distinct from and in confl ict with the wishes they presuppose. Chapter
five will consider this dilemma through the psychoanalytic concept of the
counter transference and the problem will be reformulated in chapter seven
with a focus on the status of confl ict in learning the impossible professions.
In both chapters, responsibility becomes caught in cycles of blame, guilt, and
anxiety over fault and accountability. We will also see that the educator is a
figure of learning as much as she or he symbolizes the procedures of knowl-
edge. Here is where psychoanalysis enters with its question of where responsi-
bility begins and how it comes about, taking as its focus the capacity, interest,
and resistance created within the relationship between psychical life and the
actual world. We will ask: what does our capacity for symbolization mean for
recognition and self-understanding? The ways in which understanding the
self and the world come about in this scene compose our fi rst difficulty: we
feel before we learn and affect carries a desire for its own truth, following the
logic of the pleasure/unpleasure binary. Uneven development is the concern
of chapter two, where the focus is on the education of teachers.
Thinking within psychoanalysis, just as thinking the thought of edu-
cation, begins with the problem of resistance, or turning away. We have
glimpsed why the thought of education is difficult to think, but now need to
ask how psychoanalysis, as well, may appear as “a thought without a thinker.”
Four obstacles to thinking psychoanalytically in any education will illustrate
the problem. The most obvious one is that psychoanalysis is actively avoided,
even in psychoanalytic institutes. We will see how these avoidances constitute
a commentary on the limits of our preconceptions of education as opposed to
characterizing the problem of whether there can be a psychoanalytic concep-
tion of education that can analyze its own unfolding.
A second obstacle is intimate and has to do with what it can mean to
represent the emotional force of education: what it feels like, the avalanche
of worries involved, the sudden responsibilities entailed, and the convoluted
relations that teachers and students and analysts and analysands fi nd them-
selves entangled in and at times defeated by. Any attempt made to stabilize the
object and the subject can be considered as a defense against the registration
of difference that education brings and that psychoanalysis must posit (Bass
2000). The irony psychoanalysis proposes is that its words at once acknowl-
edge our erotic ties—through the psychoanalytic terms of the transference,
identification, and empathy, for example—and sensitize our need to resist
them. Yet our terms for understanding cannot be known once and for all
 THE VERY THOUGHT 19

and this means that psychoanalysis as well is subject to its own unknown.
Our third obstacle to psychoanalysis is internal. It involves the double idea
that language itself may act therapeutically and that it may also collapse into
a concreteness that forecloses the difference needed for the capacity to think.
Some of these dilemmas are discussed in chapter six, through Freud’s work
with artists during times of war when the body censors words and so turns
into inhibition in creativity: writer’s block, arm paralysis, and stage fright.
Our fourth obstacle: psychoanalysis itself poses the greatest difficulty to
thinking psychoanalytically. It founders on its own collapse of the pedagogi-
cal theme. We glimpsed the internal resistance of psychoanalysts to their own
knowledge through Anna Freud’s psychoanalytic education, when her teach-
ers felt they needed to look down on her beginnings and where no matter
how she expressed her interests, her teachers could only hear a child speak.
This internal resistance to psychoanalysis forms the backdrop of chapter seven
in which the drama of learning an impossible profession is staged and the
question raised is whether any education can analyze is own unfolding.
Neither psychoanalysis nor education can come into being without their
respective obstacles and confl icts and thus without our divided self. And
nowhere is the problem of learning, thinking, and teaching more compel-
lingly addressed than in psychoanalytic thought, specifically from the vantage
of its clinical work and the questions that follow from it. How does a the-
ory of learning become an experiment in therapeutics? Two lines of inquiry
emerge from this question. In terms of the clinic, how does psychoanalytic
theory affect its own practices and the analyst’s conceptualization of the work?
The interminable problem is whether the uniqueness of the psychoanalytic
encounter can be maintained to affect its theories of the mind, the theorist’s
mind, and the transference of theory. The tension resides in the anxieties of
theory and practice, how this confl ict is symbolized, and whether the defense
of splitting them into opposing forces continues to require us to take one side
only to destroy our need for both. Just as our theories of life posit the dif-
ference among our actions in the world, our wishes for meaning, and what
becomes of them, theory is that which pokes a hole in experience. Practice is
not immune. It pokes a hole in itself through its own knowledge procedures,
through what is unknowable in the truth it attempts to put into place. What
is left is the hope that words matter. They promise a gap between the sym-
bol and the thing and may betray that promise of containing the unknown.
Words serve as a substitute for what cannot be present, yet nonetheless their
own force must remind us of absence. But how do words matter to their own
theory? Chapter three is a story of words that act like copycats. Chapter four
20 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

describes this problem from the vantage of learning psychology in the midst
of a collapse of the pedagogic theme.
Whereas our fi rst line of inquiry concerns what could be called the psy-
chic life of education from the vantage of its logic of affect and the phantasies
that represent it, a second line will follow the psychoanalytic clinic into the
clinic of education. We will see how the language of clinical psychoanalysis
lends a hand to clarifying what our minds make of learning from the vantage
of the impossible professions. Psychoanalytic narratives link education to the
beginning of life, when communication promises satisfaction before under-
standing. This attuned mistiming, what may later be thought of as needed
accidents, is continued throughout life; such uncertainty may have lead Freud
to his paradoxical formulation of education as one of the impossible profes-
sions. These professions have a common interminability—their education.
They will always be needed and this need for them will constitute and be
constitutive of the radical incompleteness in their practices and theories.
The idea that a profession is impossible proposes to link the limits of
practice to the complexity and uncertainty of its subjects. After all, the human
professions have as their object others who are subjects. It is an intersubjective
world we cannot know in advance of its event since its qualities are unstable,
unrepeatable, and capable of movement, transformation, fi xation, and regres-
sion. These professions are subject to both their own mind and to the minds
of others that they cannot read. They are subject to their own secret think-
ing and to thoughts without a thinker. The reason these different histories
of learning render these professions so impossible is that their theories and
practices repeat the very difficulties of the subject/object divide made from
the principles of mental functioning. If we stay close to Freud’s admission of
the impossible professions, we can also bring into this formulation problems
within the education of the professions. What may be most impossible is the
education of the impossible professions, particularly as the transference to
education, because those who carry out the education of others convey both
the experience of their own education and their experience of what is impos-
sible in the profession itself.
What happens when we approach an education we have already had and
the one not yet experienced as composing a quality of the impossible profes-
sions? Lacan’s (1998a) formulation of the impossible posits a gap between
demand and desire. Whereas when one makes a demand it appears to have its
own object (namely, the other’s attention), the field of desire is atmospheric,
without an object. Desire, then, is only the desire to desire, yet without this
desire the subject turns itself into an object. Consequently, impossibility is
 THE VERY THOUGHT 21

both an event and its limit. As an event, impossibility signifies the meet-
ing of two dimensions of knowledge—the thing and its signification—that
neither overlap nor attain identity with itself. Impossibility signifies a lack in
the subject. We will consider this lack in chapter seven from the vantage of
learning the impossible professions and how the subjective encounter with
the event and the limit may open degrees of doubt and the space of creativ-
ity. In Lacan’s view, only through doubting our existence can we begin to
grapple with what it can mean to be a subject who is subjected to forces one
cannot know in advance yet who attempts to anticipate what has not yet hap-
pened. The subject is that gathering point for all these unknowns that affect
its constitution and lead to its strange pathways of desire. And Lacan will then
place impossibility in the realm of love and knowledge. When Lacan (2006a)
defi ned love as giving what one does not have to someone who does not want
it, he placed lack and misrecognition at the heart of human desire. One of the
most difficult dilemmas for education will concern how to think the collapse
of this pedagogical theme of love as a feature of the work.
That love and education sound uncannily alike should give the reader
some pause, as this returns the transference. From the beginning of its own
“analytic infancy,” psychoanalysis, too, entangles love with therapy. Freud
(1974) admitted as much in a letter to Jung when he accepted the trouble
that psychoanalysis was “the cure by love” (13). This was Freud’s beginning
attempt to index the ineffable qualities of need, demand, and desire that con-
stitute and are constitutive of the transference, the key means for the psy-
choanalytic object relation to unfold, to stall, and to frustrate. Within this
paradoxical hope, which we give to ourselves in both our symptoms and its
cure, we can begin to think differently about the education of the impos-
sible professions and how it is that the vicissitudes of love and hate are also
their fate. While this transference is perhaps the most difficult reason for our
troubles made in thinking the thought of education, without the transference,
there can be no learning. The problem is whether education can become the
means to create transference to words.
It may be useful to overview the chapters that follow in the order the
reader will fi nd them. Throughout the chapters, education will be separated
from its own demand for order and compliance and will be brought closer to
the things that were never meant to be education, but nonetheless become its
responsibility. Because we cannot give reasons for our reasons and because
reasons are not what cause our dilemma, our best approach will be to read
between the lines and even read what is not there at all. Our cast of characters
will be drawn from art, literature, philosophy, psychoanalysis, education, and
22 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

life; we will follow the lines of their own pedagogic themes into collapse and
then follow the urge for reparation.
Chapter two has, as its home, a field called education and the confl ict
known as teacher education. Teacher education usually refers to newcomers
to the profession of teaching in compulsory settings, although its defi nition
will be stretched to anyone encountering the pedagogical field. I introduce a
notion of uneven development as other to the chronology of immaturity to
maturity and inexperience to experience. This will open fundamental phan-
tasies of development brought to the education of teachers and cultivated by
this education. Such an approach will take us into problems of love and hate in
learning and something unspeakable: that teachers may hate their education.
I propose development as uneven and subject to regression, hatred, and not
learning from experience. Development can then be understood as a problem
of trying to know the mind that resists being known, to responsibility for the
other, and as capable of containing frustration, or experience, provided that
others can help us overcome what Bion (1994a) simply called, in his discussion
of group experience, “a hatred of learning from experience” (86). We will see
this formulation as agonizing the mantra of teacher education, namely, that
we learn by experience. To posit a hatred of development as one of its consti-
tutive features means that teacher education will have to fi nd a way to work
through its idealization of development, love, and experience. It will have to
tell a new story of love and hate if its participants are to work through the old
myths of the ultruistic, sacrificing teacher who cannot wait to teach and learn.
To make this argument, I juxtapose three views of development that center
the question of uncertainty and unevenness: William James, the psychologist
who focused on the wandering mind, Arendt, the philosopher who focused
on responsibility for a world one has not made, and Bion, the psychoanalyst
who focused on what is unknown and maybe hated in affective relationships.
Their views leave us with a way to think an ethics of teacher education in the
postmodern university.
Chapter three tells the Kleinian story of reading Ishiguro’s (2005) novel
of education, Never Let Me Go. It is also a story of reading itself from the
vantage of what we can learn about our own anxieties made from reading
into illegible experience. One of the paradoxes of the reader is that she can
read the words without knowing what they signify. Ishiguro’s title itself is
also used to refer to what education feels like. One problem in this chapter is
that for the novel’s characters there seems to be no fact of natality and so the
impossible quest for their origin becomes unspeakable. The other problem
proposes excess to reading between the lines. Chapter three introduces Klein’s
 THE VERY THOUGHT 23

understanding of the act of reading under the supposition that a novel can
teach us about our act of reading. Ishiguro’s novel is analyzed as an occasion
for thinking about reading as an allegory of psychic development. Drawing
on the work of Klein and Arendt, my psychoanalytic reading explores the
discord between the signifier and the signified, seeing this confl ict as belong-
ing to language, development, and social thought. I analyze the slow events of
reading to illustrate two irresolvable confl icts animated and transferred onto
the scene of reading: encountering what is illegible yet impressive in psychical
reality and putting these impressions into language to speak and write about
what is ambiguous and unknown in external reality. I suggest this novel of
education may be read as a commentary on the internal world of object rela-
tions and its practices of reading, where Ishiguro’s characters stand for, as they
affect, our affective representations.
Readers meet Kleinian views again in chapter four, through an analysis
of learning psychology from the side of its debates on the nature of existence.
The experience of learning psychology will take two directions, themselves
pressuring our pedagogical theme. From the knowledge procedures of a field
called psychology there will be the problem of trying to convey this knowl-
edge pedagogically through the lecture. What is it about trying to represent
the mind that makes us nervous? From the phantasy procedures of our own
psychology there will be a confl ict in getting to know our phantasies of psy-
chology. These two directions are rooted in an earlier history of reading that
begins with being written upon by the other—our fi rst psychology—and this
chapter revolves around the idea that psychology makes us nervous because it
takes a psychology to make a psychology, a human condition that gives to us
our anxiety and our hope for goodness. Yet the history of the field of psychol-
ogy forgets this dilemma by reducing our minds to behavior, consciousness,
biology, and to the gray matter of neurons and their short circuits. In so doing,
the field of psychology cannot think the question of what it can mean for a
theory of learning to ponder the gray matter of our own insides, or what it
can mean to exist in our psychological existence.
Chapter four brings psychology into the matter of gray existence. The col-
lapse of this pedagogical theme will be approached with lectures on psychol-
ogy given by Freud, Winnicott, and Adorno. Of different emphasis and style,
each lecturer grappled with conveying the relation between the emotional
world and the material world. All of them were more than aware of meeting
an audience they would also attempt to create. To grasp what our poetics of
existence can feel like, I then turn these other gray matters over to litera-
ture, by way of the literary genre of the Zeitroman, novels of disillusionment,
24 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

critical of their own age. These are novels in which our protagonists cannot
be in charge of themselves, yet are charged with the problem of the desire to
know. Two novels of illness then take the stage as we meet our protagonists
learning to think their thoughts through the crisis of love and hate. Klein
(1946) thought of tolerating this crisis as the depressive position, a different
quality of education that can accept its limits without splitting hated parts
of the self into a disposed other. Returning again to this crisis of education,
which is now posed as a crisis of subjectivity, I suggest two ways to concep-
tualize a theory of learning the impossible professions. One is through Klein’s
view of the depressive position, where she ties the question of thinking to the
capacity to mourn the losses development and learning leave in their wake.
The second draws upon Lear’s (2006) study of radical hope, where a radical
reconceptualization of existence depends on the hope for something good,
even as one cannot know in advance where such thinking may lead.
Both Klein and Lear begin with scenes of devastation: for Klein, the
devastation is constitutive of internal processes made from anxiety and for
Lear, the devastation is the loss of cultural life and every meaning that gives
this life value and beauty. While their contexts are utterly different and
without comparison, both suggest that the human cannot prepare for its
destructions and traumas. Learning, as radical reformulation of what it can
mean to live emerges in the afterward of devastation. I believe this orienta-
tion to learning made from the urge for reparation and radical hope would
well serve our thinking the frustrated thought of education—indeed, could
be put into the service of tolerating the mental pain incurred by the very
thought of education. Along with the work of Klein, I propose that the work
of thinking the thought of education permits education an encounter with
its own depressive position.
Problems of learning the impossible profession structure chapter five,
where the teacher and the analyst confront what education can mean if we
understand the paradoxes of education, not from the procedures of its knowl-
edge and claims of truth but through the ineffable love and hate conveyed
by the countertransference. I ask whether education can be a psychoana-
lytic education and thus whether it is possible for an analysis of education’s
own unfolding. We will see how the act of understanding the emotional
world of the teacher and the analyst through the psychoanalytic concept of
the countertransference leads us into debates on the status of both education
and the countertransference. While Anna Freud (1995) tried to divide the
work of education and psychoanalysis with the idea that “something more
besides analysis is required to undo [ego defenses]. The child must learn to
 THE VERY THOUGHT 25

tolerate larger and larger quantities of unpleasure without immediately having

recourse to his defense mechanisms . . . [and] theoretically it is the business
of education rather than of analysis to teach him this lesson” (64–65), we
will see that the business of education puts into place anxiety and defense
that are conveyed through the teacher’s countertransference. I suggest that
countertransference to education is composed from the analyst’s and teacher’s
affective history of education and when the teacher or analyst considers her
or his emotional world, she or he confronts something that cannot be expe-
rienced, that is, what education disavows and so what was never imagined as
important to interpreting our learning—namely, our helplessness, frustration,
and anxiety.
The transference returns in chapter six, through the strangers I call “trans-
ference people,” my misreading of a discussion on transference that leads me
to a focus on the problem of interpreting a history that is unforgivable with
the antidepressant of narrative. A number of contexts are brought together:
Freud’s analysis of the poet H.D., her self-analysis made after she left Freud,
and understanding my transference to this history during a trip I made to Ger-
many. The chapter is an attempt at repairing a collapse of pedagogical themes
with an effort to hold the present in mind even as the past has its own anni-
hilating pull. This tension is also found within Freud’s analysis with artists.
H.D. was suffering from an inhibition of creativity with feelings of a wrecked
life choked with strangulated words. Here we will see psychoanalysis as an
invitation to write one’s own novel with the gamble of what creativity must
risk: the translation of affect into symbols. In 1933, H.D. traveled to Vienna
to undergo an analysis with Freud. She was not the fi rst artist Freud analyzed,
but was his last one and his most eloquent advocate. Other artists who con-
tacted Freud because of their inhibitions of life’s creativity are also discussed
to raise a significant dilemma for contemporary education. This psychoanaly-
sis will lead us to consider that if part of the work of education is trying to
know one’s own pedagogical themes, including where they may collapse into
despair, another part of this responsibility turns on an interest in the work
of enlivening what may feel like the dead objects within the internal world.
The chapter also becomes an occasion for thinking through what it meant
for H.D. and Freud to have worked together through the rise of National
Socialism and how one analysis thus came to address the actual world of terror
by regarding the subject, by seeing words as important at a time when words
and people were being destroyed. From this difficult knowledge, I raise some
questions this devastating history has left us to think. What was never meant
to be education is precisely the responsibility education inherits.
26 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

Chapter seven returns the question of thinking the very thought of

education through Freud’s idea of “the impossible professions,” with the
speculation that the Achilles’ heel of the impossible professions is their own
education. So many impossibilities are lost and found in this work: the trans-
ference, the subject presumed to know, anxiety and inhibitions, and the work
of the impossible in itself. We will stretch Freud’s formulation of the impos-
sible professions to the theater of subjectivity and then, again, to a matter that
Lear (2006) raised as “radical hope,” a hope that changes the very nature of
hope. We will see again that education, as much as it is a form of thought and
a structure of knowledge procedures, competes with that which is not educa-
tion at all, namely, narcissism and emotional storms. Indeed, the figure that
will bear this burden of transference is the phantasy Lacan (1998b) called “the
subject who is supposed to know” (230). This last chapter turns on the dif-
ficulty of understanding why, all too often, the thought of education dissolves
into anxieties of really bad pedagogy and therefore gives away our capacity
to think the collapse of our pedagogical themes. If Freud’s formulation of the
impossible professions proposes a constitutive difficulty within our practices
and theories and therefore teaches us something about the problems entailed
when thinking the very thought of education, Bion’s (2000) note on “mak-
ing the best of a bad job” returns us to our prosaic encounters: a proposal to
think the thought of education as our vulnerability, as a radical hope that
changes the nature of hope itself, as a call to thinking the inevitable frustra-
tions education brings, and as an ethic of trying to get to know our obstacles
to encountering the unknown.
 CHAPTER TWO

Uneven Development

If we speak of development as a progression from immaturity to maturity,

as a unifying property of the individual, and thus as capable of expres-
sion without confl ict, we are apt to miss the fact of development as our
human condition. We are likely to forget that all of us are subject to the
radical uncertainty of being with others in common and uncommon his-
tory and that this being with other beings makes development uneven and
uncertain. If we forget that development takes its own novel time, we are
likely to become impatient with ourselves and with others. Yet develop-
ment, too, carries its own traces of antidevelopment, areas of irresolvable
confl ict—incompleteness—that return as if it did not belong to itself, and to
qualities of retroactive time that not only defer its meaning but provide the
self with its new understandings of old events. The problem with develop-
ment is that it is always on the move, even in moments of fi xation given
the defensive strategies needed to stay in a place that no longer exists. For
Adorno (2006), we cannot speak of development without understanding its
tendency toward regression. While Bion (1994a) will add to development its
emotional collapse, the problem of hatred of development, Hans Loewald’s
(2000b) sense of development will have its revelatory qualities. And Arendt
(1993b) will place development within the fact of natality, our beginnings
as met by the reception from those already here. Still more: the psychologist
of pragmatism, William James (1950), will track development as activity
in perpetual movement and perhaps they will all agree that development is
always uneven development.

27
28 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

As for the field of teacher education, by which I mean that place where
those learning to teach confront knowledge about the development of others
as they, too, develop their teaching selves, when theories of development are
spoken there, we rarely begin with these enigmatic developments. Instituted
education still manages to approach development as if it is a correction for
childhood and its misadventures, as if development could cure its own uncon-
scious wishes. Our inquiries have not thought the problem of our childhood’s
strange duration: how, even compulsively, when faced with new and familiar
events, whatever our age, our time unconsciously repeats timeless confl icts.
We may speak of development as an overcoming confl ict, but not as confl ict
itself. We may agree that others develop, but rarely do we wonder how our
own development affects our educational imagination and how this also affects
its own development. Nor do we tend to think of development as composing
and revising a history of learning to live with others and maybe feeling loneli-
ness in this work. And we seem to miss the fact that our time of development
is set by a strange clock, one that contains its own tendency to repeat, regress,
and fi xate on moments of breakdown or gratification. We assume that devel-
opment in teacher education is unaffected by the social fact of having to be
educated. However much our front-door discourses of teacher education seem
to protect us from these unwieldy matters, remnants of our childhood slip in
through the back door of our theories of teaching and learning. The work of
this chapter is to consider areas of development in our field that remain con-
ceptually underdeveloped and try to understand why this is the case.
Our opening problem is this: we have grown up in schools, have spent
our childhood and adolescence observing teachers and our peers, and when
we enter the field of teacher education, this avalanche of experience we have
undergone, made from schooling, confi rms itself (Britzman, 2003b; 2006).
Growing up in education permeates our meanings of education and learning;
it lends commotion to our anticipations for and judgments toward the self and
our relations with others. It makes us suspicious of what we have not experi-
enced and lends nostalgia to what has been missed. Simply put, our sense of
self and our sense of the world are profoundly affected by having to grow up
in school. And this means that both the experience we have and the having of
experience are problems of education. As much as the field of teacher educa-
tion represses this peculiar childhood of education, as much as those teaching
in the university insist that teaching and learning are two different events, the
repressed returns.
The great repression of teacher education returns as paradox: newcomers
learning to teach enter teacher education looking backward on their years of
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 29

school experience and project these memories and wishes into the present that
they then identify with as somehow an indication of what should happen or
never happen again. Teacher educators greet these newcomers as if they lack
school experience and have no past. Both hold tight to deeply ingrained fan-
tasies of education, repeating without remembering their childhoods through
the idea of the teacher. They already know about good and bad students.
Implicitly, the structure and ethos of teacher education gravitate toward our
childhood view of education: this oddly resistant childhood is cast in cement
with the mantra, “we learn from experience.” So what can development actu-
ally mean when we cannot seem to leave our childhood of education? How
is our field capable of changing itself, of developing responsibility for its rep-
resentations, if everyone involved in teacher education was once a child who
grew up in school and so relies on their infantile archive of education?
To look deeper into these quandaries, let us consider our beginnings
through a radical claim, belonging to a psychoanalyst of development and
environmental provision. Winnicott (1986a) proposed, “There is no such
thing as an infant” (39). He did so to remind his colleagues that the infant
comes with caregivers, and then toys and the transitional objects that make
an infant into its own transitions. Our infancy is made as a relation to others.
In this spirit, let us suppose there is no such thing as development, unless, of
course, we can begin to conceptualize real and fantasized relationships, insti-
tutions, practices, culture, other minds, and education. There is no such thing
as development unless we can begin thinking with what Winnicott (1987)
called, in another context, “the fact of dependence” (83). If the question of
development means there are always others because of the fact of dependence,
then we cannot really think about development without also considering
relations of responsibility and wonder about the conditions that would value
the uncertainty of development as a strange and even alienating resource for
understanding the great confl icts our field absorbs, creates, and lives within.
Our study of development leads us far afield, into ongoing debates on the
status of uncertainty in the impossible professions.
Our anxieties over essentialism have stalled our debates with the ques-
tion of what should count as essential in the education of teachers. And it
should not escape us that these confl icts over the basics mirror larger public
anxieties over the education of children, youth, and university students and
now the qualifications of teachers and university professors. It is an anxiety
that conditions the scene of learning to teach: because schooling is a mass
experience, because we humans have to have education, we are all experts at
knowing what has been missed or what we should have had more of and we
30 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

may be fairly insistent on knowing what works perfectly well and what we
anticipate as going terribly wrong. In this schizoid world we become experts
in lack. But this makes our expertise into a defense against all that is uncertain
about our profession. We seem to experience amnesia here because if, in our
early years, we once entered schools as frightened strangers and felt this new
place as utterly strange, by the time we leave, we have turned ourselves into
anthropological informants, experts with our own experience, eager to share
and even impose this experience onto others. Somehow the having of school
experience dulls our thinking. Somehow, the uncertainty that is our begin-
ning has become predicable and routine. And somehow, we have forgotten
our human condition as strangers, and that we are always, as Kristeva (1991)
put it, “strangers to ourselves.”
I think we come to the heart of the matter when we turn to the problem
of existence. Many years ago, Maxine Greene (1973) named the teacher “as
stranger.” She proposed the teacher as an incomplete project, as unfi nished,
and as a searcher in the process of becoming a teacher with others. If the
teacher chooses to become a critical subject, she supposed, what is critical
only emerges when the teacher understands herself or himself as subject to
uncertainty and as a subject with other subjects. And this uncertainty resides
within the acts of a self, committed to its own becoming. The teacher has a
choice to choose her past, to wake up, and to experiment: “the teacher who
dares to do philosophy must be open to such a multiplicity of realities” (11).
And unanswerable questions must be posed and dare I say enjoyed.
Greene imagined teacher education not through debates on proper
preparation but as philosophy in the making, as dialogue with others, and
as incomplete. There will always be work to do, but also, if we take the idea
of multiple realities seriously, there will be confl ict, new knowledge made,
interpretations to doubt, and struggles with the question of truth. And the
teacher’s uncertainty will be both a disruption and a resource for hope.
Greene’s address to the teacher’s learning, then, links freedom to courage:
“If he can learn to do philosophy, he may liberate himself for understanding
and choosing. He may liberate himself for reflective action as someone who
knows who he is as a historical being, acting on his freedom, trying each day
to be” (7). The teacher’s unfi nished work is to understand her representa-
tions of education as a project of learning to live with others. Existentially,
development is uneven and uncertain because it is always affected by the
question of freedom.
To analyze these existential dilemmas of learning to teach, I turn fi rst
to ideas from two philosophers who addressed, at different times and with
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 31

different stakes, problems in conceptualizing development in teacher educa-

tion: William James, whose psychology of teaching and learning ushered in
the twentieth century and Arendt, whose philosophy of the crisis of educa-
tion occurs in the midst of the twentieth century. Later, their concerns will
be brought into tension with the stagnant situation Bion (1994a) called “the
hatred of learning by experience” (86). His alienating assumption is that to
understand the confl icts of development from the perspective that develop-
ment means transformation, indeed, refers to what can feel catastrophic, one
must explore the idea that there is also a hatred of development because devel-
opment signifies loss and empty space. The chapter concludes with observa-
tions on our current context—the postmodern university—and the problem
this untimely time leaves us to think when we think about our uncertain
conditions in teacher education. For now, let the work of James and Arendt
set the stage for understanding the fragility of our grand metanarratives in
teacher education. Their work brings us to a problem beyond the childhood
of education and that our childhood also presupposes, namely, development as
uncertainty, as subject to the fact of dependency, and as an ongoing question
of ethics and responsibility.
Readers may wonder what the pragmatist James and the critical theorist
Arendt had in common. While both taught in the university and I believe
considered themselves as teachers, for a brief moment in their long careers they
shared an object of inquiry that neither of them prepared for, namely, the edu-
cation of educators. Their collective concern is the teacher’s responsibility for
her and his own learning. Entry into discussions of this responsibility differed:
for James, it was psychology and for Arendt, political thought; for James, it
was the nature of the inner world, and for Arendt, the relation between adult
and child; for James, education confronted the problem of instinctual life and
for Arendt, education is lost and found in the world of others. Arendt pro-
posed education as a problem of commitment and social responsibility and as
animating and deadening relations of self and other. James entered the prob-
lem with his question of the teacher’s passion and the difficulty of having one’s
own mind as one tries to influence others. Together, they outlined existential
situations faced when the teacher chooses an education that is not yet pres-
ent. Their sense of both psychology and social thought is neither solipsistic
nor altruistic. In other words, these thinkers go beyond the great binary that
catches short our educational imagination: whether teacher education should
be focused on knowing oneself or dedicating one’s life to others. Indeed, this
schizoid divide forecloses the existential question the teacher confronts: what
is it, in an impossible profession, to choose uncertainty?
32 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

A NEW RESPONSIBILITY

Around 1906, before there was something called teacher education, Wil-
liam James was invited to address the newly formed Department of Educa-
tion at Harvard University. It was a heady time: the education of children
was now linked to the university’s responsibility for the education of teach-
ers and the profession of education itself became tied, simultaneously, to the
vicissitudes of compulsory schooling and the university. Already James (1950)
was a famous psychologist, known for his two-volume work The Principles of
Psychology, which outlined his orientation to understanding the nature of the
human mind in relation to the interruptions and mysteries of life. So these
principles relied on James’s attempt to understand his own mind and all that
interrupted it, including profound bouts with depression and writing blocks,
with overcommitments, incapacity to fi nish projects, and inability to make a
decision (Richardson 2006).
In James’s view, understanding the human mind was the grand theme of
and challenge to the new field of teacher education. And when he talked to
teachers, he counseled that in trying to understand the human mind, there
would be confusion and resistance to understanding. For example, James
(1983) suggests, we might hold a mistaken view of childhood and render it so
simple that we ourselves would see childhood as something to master, some-
thing one leaves behind. We might feel the child’s mind as empty, as in need,
and as something only to be instructed. We might take away the very mind
we are trying to communicate with. And if that happens, James suggests, we
lose our own minds as well, for, in James’s view, the mind was never single-
minded but in contact with other minds.
Trying to write about the mind was also a problem. In his lumbering
two volumes on psychology, James (1950) felt that his topic—the idea that
“thoughts and feelings exist and are vehicles of knowledge” (vi)—was almost
impossible to write about without drowning in metaphysics and having to
wrestle with the question of the soul. And there would be no end point.
Additionally, the metaphysics of the soul can only gesture toward a radical
uncertainty and the limits of knowledge. This problem concludes the fi rst
chapter of his Principles when James writes: “The boundary line of the mental
is certainly vague” (6). James then advises readers to skip those few chap-
ters that mire themselves in metaphysics. He warns his readers about what
will happen to them as they begin a gigantic chapter in his second volume:
“Chapter 20, on Space-perception, is a terrible thing” (v). And indeed he is
right, at least to this reader, for the avalanche of material presented threatens
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 33

to crash into a thousand tiny unruly thoughts and the reader may lose her way
as James winds his way through the maze of the psychology of perception,
sensation, and cognition. Without warning, James finds himself entangled in
a philosophical debate: does the object world create understanding or does
our mind create the world? Do we receive meaning from experience or does
the meaning we make create what we represent as experience? Does language
merely name reality or is reality a consequence of having language? That we
want to know the nature of reality and our responsibility to it, he seems to
imply, is why each of us has our own speculative psychology.
James’s Principles of Psychology discusses such things as instinct, habits,
attention, memory, association, apperception, and the will. Each quality of
the mind is in confl ict with its others, which led to his interest in specifying
the design and force of mental acts. He wished to clarify what happens to
perception when the human represents the world and what happens to the
mind as we perceive the world. And he wondered how ideas affect the mind
and how the mind affects or metabolizes ideas. Metaphysics are not far behind
and this frustrates the pragmatist James. Perhaps he surprised himself when
he wrote unanswerable questions: what is indelible about experience? What
makes us human? And what is the nature of consciousness and its experience?
He could not differentiate between our capacity to doubt the mind and our
mind’s creation of its own doubts. Can unanswerable questions, he wondered,
matter to how we understand how the human learns?
James (1983) revised these cumbersome volumes when he brought his
psychology to those learning to teach. In my view, he had the good sense
to leave out chapter 20 and condense his meandering psychology into some
short, passionate lectures. The book that resulted has a lovely title, Talks to
Teachers on Psychology and to Students on Some of Life’s Ideals and one really
does get the sense that he is speaking to someone who is trying to learn a
profession. His method was introspection, and he took the phenomenological
approach. He will create the experience of the mind that he will then rep-
resent. He will posit the teacher’s mind before there is a teacher. He will
concern himself with the other and insist on the limits of our knowledge.
He will posit a pedagogical orientation to his notion of mind and create new
approaches to everyday problems. And he will present consciousness as con-
tinuous, as consciousness of something in both its dreamy inattention and its
heightened, aroused states.
There is a background problem, not stated explicitly to his teacher audi-
ence, with the idea of consciousness as continuous. In a chapter titled “Atten-
tion” in Principles of Psychology, he gives us a clue of something discontinuous
34 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

in consciousness and it has to do with a problem many teachers and professors

have felt—the difficulty faced when having to write a lecture. James’s descrip-
tion of his busy avoidance is timeless:

One snatches at any and every passing pretext, no matter how trivial or
external, to escape from the odiousness of the matter at hand. I know a
person, for example, who will poke the fi re, set chairs straight, pick dust-
spects from the floor, arrange his table, snatch up the newspaper, take down
any book which catches his eye, trim his nails, waste the morning anyhow,
in short, and all without premeditation,—simply because the only thing
he ought to attend to is the preparation of a noonday lesson in formal logic
which he detests. Anything but that! (421)

One fi nds in his writing a capacity to enter the contents of his own mind,
including what is most incoherent. At times, it is a dusty mind, a manic mind
racing ahead without reason, obsessing over odd routines. Instead of writ-
ing a lecture, he will clean his house, write a letter, and imagine that setting
the outside straight will inspire an internal housecleaning. But he will also
wonder why time must be wasted, why the lecture is so difficult to write, and
how the mind projects itself into the world to refi nd and perhaps contain its
own confused contents. In this sense, if consciousness is continuous, it is also
easily broken, not so much by the outside world but by that which it resists
internally, namely, the unconscious. And, for James, this meant there really is
a difficulty in knowing one’s own mental acts, including its most disagreeable,
chaotic ones.
James’s big idea is that what is basic to the teacher’s education is her or
his understanding of what other people are like. People are not static enti-
ties waiting to be taught so that they can then learn in an orderly fashion.
They are difficult to know because they have their own minds. Moreover,
the mind works through the stream of consciousness, through association,
and so it is always in motion and in relation to or chasing someone. The
mind will not hold still and the body is not a separate thing waiting to take
its instruction. This radical relationality, an intersubjectivity without per-
mission, he said, will be an obstacle to education. For if attention is always
fleeting attention, if attention occurs because of pleasure, the awareness of
this psychology makes the teacher’s work difficult. Still, the teacher’s work
develops from trying to learn what the student is like while attempting to
interest her or his attention. Confl icts then are the heart of this relation and
James (1983), ever the pragmatist, blasted away at the romance of what he
called “a soft pedagogy”:
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 35

We have of late been hearing much of the philosophy of tenderness in

education;‘interest’ must be assiduously awakened in everything, difficul-
ties must be smoothed away. Soft pædagogics have taken the place of the old
steep and rocky path to learning. But from this lukewarm air the bracing
oxygen of effort is left out. It is nonsense to suppose every step in educa-
tion can be interesting. The fighting impulse must be appealed to. Make
the pupil feel ashamed of being scared at fractions, of being‘downed’ by the
law of falling bodies; rouse his pugnacity and pride, and he will rush at the
difficult places with a sort of inner wrath at himself that is one of his best
moral faculties. (41–42)

At the heart of education James placed the problem of fear and asked the
teacher to know how to use it. He was not afraid to suggest the need for the
teacher’s authority and the mobilization of the student’s aggression in order
to bite into new knowledge. He had the courage to destroy the teacher’s
illusion that somehow education will be a smooth affair if only the right
technique could be applied. Interest, he seems to imply, is not something
one begins with. But he also had the good sense to remind the teachers that
education is not a funfair of instant gratification. And the mind that knows,
he warns, resists being known. Indeed, the mind may not want to know even
if it can know.
Perhaps his cautions allowed second thoughts about this “soft pedagogy”
since he returns to reformulate it by considering the teacher’s responsibility.
He tries for some clarification: “Elicit interest from within, by the warmth
with which you care for the topic yourself ” (72). The problem, it turns out, is
with the teacher’s passion, with what the teacher cares about when the teacher
cares about the student’s interests. The mind, after all, is an intersubjective
mind, not an ideal to achieve or a thing to fi ll with knowledge. Good night,
Descartes: even as we need our own mind to know this, there is no mind
without the other’s mind. There is no passion without the other’s passion.
One more turn will be made. Near the end of these lectures, James will say
that what makes life significant includes the capacity to accept insignificance
or absence. So there are no promises for the future and there is no future with-
out confl ict, questions, and loss. Education, he implies, requires the courage
for making ideas unhabitual. Education, he implies, defamiliarizes and even
disrupts our suppositions. Education, we might say, makes us strangers, for
there is nothing stranger and even estranging than trying to understand the
other’s mind while we make up our own.
Almost sixty years later, Arendt (1993b) would consider the teacher’s edu-
cation, not from the artistic problem of attitude, but from the social vantage
36 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

of the crisis that education presents to both teachers and students. She joined
the problem of education to larger cultural and historic changes still being
worked through today. And she almost apologized for doing so, insisting that
she entered the debate of education only as a philosopher-stranger, not as an
educator. It is one of her strangest claims in that, while her view of education
makes us all educators, actual teachers in compulsory settings are not consid-
ered, as Greene (1973) considered them, philosopher-strangers.
Arendt, too, considered the special characteristics of the child, but rather
than specify psychological processes, as James did, she confronted the existen-
tial problem of having to be educated and the teacher’s responsibility for this
fact of dependency. She saw the child as a newcomer to the world, as a stranger
to those already there. The child, a new human being, is in the process of
becoming human. The child, in other words, begins with an uncertain rela-
tion to the world of others and to life itself. For Arendt, this meant that the
teacher has a difficult responsibility: Teachers, because they greet children into
the world they already live in, must take responsibility for the world that the
child could not have made. Both must choose history. Arendt (1993b) puts the
paradox boldly: “The teacher’s qualification consists in knowing the world and
being able to instruct others about it, but his authority rests on his assumption
of responsibility for that world” (189). Like James, qualifications and authority
are two different matters. Unlike James, there is a political problem. Teachers
are responsible for the world they live in, even if by the fact of their natality
they also entered the world they have not made. But by virtue of living in
this world, by virtue of development, they make the world that greets their
students and they are responsible for knowing about this world. The teacher’s
authority will be linked to knowing the world and taking responsibility for it.
The responsibility is difficult, even painful, and it raises another dimension of
dependency. Teachers are responsible for a world by choosing responsibility
and so are dependent on both the world and on the new relation with the child.
Neither qualification nor authority will tell one how this occurs. And so the
teacher chooses both uncertainty and responsibility.
To understand the depth of this ethical quandary of authority as respon-
sibility for the world they live in and have made by virtue of development,
Arendt (1992b) turns to literature and quotes Shakespeare’s Hamlet. Hamlet
complained about existence as such when he said: “The time is out of joint. O
cursed spite that ever I was born to set it right” (192). While James (1950, vol.
II) as well would call on Hamlet’s despair, in his Principles, his stress would be
on the pleasure of completing a difficult task even if one wished to avoid it.
For Arendt (1993b) there is no conclusion:
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 37

Basically we are always educating for a world that is or is becoming out of

joint, for this is the basic human situation, in which the world is created
by mortal hands to serve mortals for a limited time as home. Because the
world is made by mortals it wears out; and because it continually changes its
inhabitants it runs the risk of becoming as mortal as they. (192)

Here is where the tragic and the potential meet. We are always educating for
a world in crisis, a world that is a human world and so will, like the human,
wear out. Those who renew the world are ones just entering it. Arendt’s idea
is that the essential relation of education is determined by what she calls our
natality: that we are born and that others welcome us in our absolute depen-
dency. Our mortality means that we are also responsible for making room
for the new. Arendt is careful in what she supposes the teacher’s work entails:
teachers are obligated to tell the students what the world is like, not to instruct
them in the art of living. It boils down to our attitude toward the fact of natal-
ity. And everything is at stake: “Education,” Arendt (1993b) concludes, “is
the point at which we decide whether we love the world enough to assume
responsibility for it and by the same token save it from that ruin which, except
for renewal, except for the coming of the new and young, would be inevi-
table” (196).
As you may hear in both James and Arendt, when it comes to education,
what is essential is the crisis of education. The time of education is always out
of joint because of the nature of the mind, because of the nature of the world,
because of the nature of dependency, because of the asymmetry of authority,
and because of the nature of responsibility. Many years later, Derrida (1994)
will also ruminate on this problem of our out-of-joint time by attending to
two of its disjunctions: that of injustice, as Hamlet sensed when he felt he was
being asked to choose his becoming, and the one presented by the other, the
disjunction of difference Derrida also called justice. Derrida, too, will speak
of justice without condition, linking responsibility for the other to “hospital-
ity without reserve” (65). The hospitality without reserve will take responsi-
bility for the stranger.
There is no conclusion for responsibility because, as we try to fi nd out
where it leads, we confront the problem of love and ethics. And Arendt con-
siders education as presenting a difficult choice between loving and hating
the world, between the work of setting it right and the sadness incurred with
the knowledge that the world wears out. I think this choice characterizes the
existential condition of teacher education and raises the problem of a psy-
choanalytic pedagogy of uncertainty. We must now send the teacher back to
school. Which choice did teacher educators face when they were children in
38 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

schools? Did they have teachers who accepted responsibility for a world they
did not make? Did their teachers love the fact of natality and so showed them-
selves unafraid of dependency, helplessness, and thus the unpredictability of
life? Did their teachers wonder about what the child’s mind was like? Or did
their education wear out before its own time?

ON THE HATRED OF DEVELOPMENT

So far, I have been sketching an ethics of teacher development. With James

and Arendt I have proposed the problem of teacher education as trying to
understand and address the mind of the other and doing so in a way that the
teacher is taking responsibility for both a mind she has not made and a world
she is responsible for by virtue of development. With Greene, I have put the
teacher into the position of the stranger, one who even by virtue of develop-
ment is incomplete and searching. With the help of Winnicott, I have also
described the concept of development from the vantage of its uneven and
uncertain qualities because of its relation to our fact of dependency. And I
have posed a paradox from which teacher education operates: that we grow
up in school and that we return there as adults, that we bring to teacher edu-
cation our own history of learning, only to meet the teacher educator’s his-
tory of learning. To question whether all we can do is wear ourselves out, I
now turn to a psychology of uncertainty unafraid of emotional pain. Unlike
James, who saw consciousness as continuous, Bion insisted on the problem of
discontinuity through the psychoanalytic idea of the unconscious. Existence
as being is constituted through confl ictive mental structures that cannot know
its own representations but nonetheless represent its distortions and frustra-
tions. And one form frustration can take is a hatred of development—one’s
own and those of others. Tying development to the problem of discontinu-
ity means that there is something antidevelopmental about development, and
this idea incurs a great deal of resistance since it goes against the idealization
of development as progress and since it gets under the skin of this illusion to
analyze how progress comes to be unconsciously equated with loss. Indeed,
to bring into the discussion Bion’s (1994b) concept of hatred of development
may cause consternation and despair and agitate our most violent defenses.
We are approaching one of the reasons why the very thought of educa-
tion becomes what Bion (1997) called “a thought without a thinker” (27).
Education wears out not only because we are mortal but also because there
is a hatred of learning from experience. And the way this hatred of develop-
ment plays out in our field is through the terrible insistence that teachers
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 39

hate their own teacher education. They convey their disgust to the newly
arrived undergoing their own teacher education. Teachers may have hated
the dependency that also characterizes learning to teach. They may have felt
punished for their own uncertainty and so wish to protect others from what
has already happened to them. They may have forgotten the fact of natality,
or that they are responsible for a world they have made. Teachers may say to
newcomers: “My teacher education was irrelevant, the real experience is here
in my classroom, and theory is not useful.” Teachers and student teachers may
believe that the university idealizes theory and ignores practical constraints.
They may wish for a theory without confl ict, a perfect practice, and even
compliant students. Yet all of these wishes are frustrated and this frustration
is projected back into the field now as a hatred of theory, itself a derivative of
development. Let me put the problem of what inhibits thinking the thought
of education in a shocking idea: teacher education is a hated field and no one
wants to be responsible for this bad education. Those in the university who
may hate their own teaching hate it and those undergoing their teacher educa-
tion meet this hate with their own hate. No teacher really loves her or his own
teacher education. And university professors rarely identify their pedagogy as
subject to their discontentment with having to learn. All may soften this rage
by projecting it back into their own education with the vague complaint that
“they didn’t prepare me for the uncertainty.”
What are we to make of this? Bion has argued that there is a hatred
of development, a hatred of learning because learning, for the adult, means
thinking about one’s painful emotional experience of helplessness, depen-
dency, and frustration. Bion (1994a) will name this frustration “experience,”
and all experience will be emotional experience, or trying to get to know
something unknown and unknowable. In his discussion of experience in
groups he will posit “a hatred of learning from experience” (86). Oddly, this
hatred emerges from the need for security that scaffolds basic assumptions that
protect the group from the insecurity of existence, that is, having to be with
others. Keep in mind that Bion defi nes experience as frustration. Experience
cannot be known in advance. While undergone, there is a kernel of unthink-
ability that incurs mental pain. In Bion’s view, there are only two ways to deal
with the frustration that uncertainty or not knowing creates. One can evacu-
ate these feelings and consider the world of strangers as the source of distress.
These evacuated feelings will destroy reality along with the group’s capacity
to think and to be open to new ideas. Yet new ideas mean the loss of old ones
and so change feels catastrophic. The other way of experiencing frustration
is to try to think about it, even if it means thinking about what one does not
40 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

know. One thinks about frustration to modify, digest, and contain emotional
experience. One learns with others to tolerate the frustration of having to
learn from experience.
Then what is learning? For Bion, learning signifies at least two problems.
Learning disrupts the old ideas and, if all goes well, allows for new ideas
to be enjoyed. Learning is also an emotional acceptance of our ignorance
because we do not really know what will happen with this new knowledge,
nor will we be able to prepare for the destruction of the old knowledge. Here
is where progress is unconsciously equated with loss. Learning means under-
standing that knowledge does not exhaust what is unknowable and that we
act from not understanding. We may then become receptive to what has not
been thought or understood without evacuating the uncertainty. Only then
can responsibility emerge. Reality becomes larger, not smaller. Bion (1994b)
defi nes learning this way:

Learning depends on the capacity for the container [by which he means the
capacity to hold doubt and not knowing without evacuating the bad feelings
this involves] to remain integrated and yet lose rigidity. This is the founda-
tion of the state of mind of the individual who can retain his knowledge and
experience and yet be prepared to reconstrue past experiences in a manner
that enables him to be receptive of a new idea. (93)

Provided that the past can be thought anew, learning may be understood as
learning from emotional experience. If knowledge is to survive, then learn-
ing from experience must also become what Bion (1994b) calls “tolerance of
doubt and tolerance of infi nity” (94) or an acceptance of the unknown and
the unknowable. And this makes strangers of us all. The defenses of splitting
the world into good and bad can then be analyzed as the problem that destroys
the mind’s capacity to think. Thinking becomes more complicated, an exper-
iment in responsibility for the unknown. Our responsibility is to interpret
reality, and, in Arendt’s terms, to try to tell others what our world is like.
Bion’s interest in the hatred of development clashes with our common-
sense understanding of experience as the royal road to learning, as mean-
ing’s punctuation, and as a cure for inexperience. It is noteworthy that Bion’s
understanding of development emerges from the study of group psychology,
itself the foundation of education. The basic assumptions of groups, he sug-
gests, begin with a desire for security as a defense against the unknown, but
this means that insecurity, also a feature of individual and group life, will
frustrate security. In teacher education, our security blanket of learning from
experience actually creates profound insecurity, anxiety, and defense. The
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 41

insecurity is expelled, only to return in the form of bad students, bad grades,
bad theory, bad university, and bad methods. Persecution takes the place of
responsibility. To consider these refusals as indicating a hatred of develop-
ment, however, is not easily accepted since the teacher often supposes her-
self to be a motivator for the development of others. This idealization is a
defense against the teacher’s anxiety over her own development and all that is
unknown in its making. In this sense, idealization may indicate fear of loss of
love. And indeed, the hatred of development is that loss of love.
The large question presented concerns the idea that one does not learn
from experience but rather tolerates having to think about its emotional force.
Bion offers a second way to defi ne experience, now as an emotional experi-
ence difficult to know. He is not so far away from James’s view of the diffi-
culty of knowing the other’s mind. And he is not far away from Arendt’s claim
that we take responsibility for a world we live in. For Bion, knowing is an
approximation, representations are not the thing-in-itself, and at some level
the learning itself is unrepresentable. This is part of what is hated, I think, the
hatred of frustration made from the experience of trying to represent what
cannot be represented but only felt. Here is how Bion (1994b) presents the
quandary: “If the learner is intolerant of the essential frustration of learning
he indulges phantasies of omniscience and a belief in a state where things are
known. Knowing something consists in “having” some “piece of ” knowl-
edge and not . . . ‘knowing’ in the sense of ‘getting to know something’ ”
(65). Our capacity to create value within emotional experience allows for
new ideas and the experience of getting to know something new. No value is
an attack on one’s thinking; thinking is a way to render as valuable one’s emo-
tional experience. Being responsible for one’s emotional experience opens
an existential dimension, what Derrida (1994) called justice, or “hospitality
without reservation” (65).

AN UNCANNY POSTMODERNITY

I have described teacher education as a conditioned field, in that all that it

meets becomes a condition of its development. Because the field attempts to
influence development, it is subject to hatred, its own and that of others. The
childhood of education is a significant condition of our work, which means
the field is subject to rejection, to schizoid processes, and to the hatred of
development. I have suggested that how we conceptualize development will
affect not only the ways in which we think about others and our knowl-
edge but also how we feel about our own teacher education. And along with
42 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

Arendt, James, and Bion, I have suggested that the time of education is always
out of joint. Briefly, I want to turn to the problem of the university itself as
affected by what Arendt (1993b) called “the crisis of education.”
The particular crisis universities face is the decline of enlightenment
as a metaphor for education. In the last chapter, the decline was presented
through Badiou’s (2005) collapse of the pedagogic theme. From Arendt’s
view, our metanarratives have worn out. The general crisis is that the sta-
tus of education and teaching has declined. Here uneven development takes
on an institutional force. As a field of thought and practice, and as a site of
knowledge production, institutions of education are affected by what Lyo-
tard (1987) called “the postmodern condition.” He was describing the state of
knowledge use in postindustrial societies, and argued that the idea of knowl-
edge as capable of training minds and as bringing up of culture (bildung) is
now obsolete: knowledge itself changes so fast that its old use of changing
minds is exhausted. As for the mind, it has been reduced to the function of
processing data, and as the human extension of the information highway. We
travel this highway as both consumers and producers, perhaps feeling knowl-
edge as now something to display, access, and dispose of as quickly and as
easily as possible. Yet the avalanche of information that both overgratifies and
understimulates our postmodern soft pedagogy may leave us emptier than
ever. Our postmodern condition has only quickened the way knowledge
wears out. Knowledge is prepackaged, predigested, and disposable and it
returns recycled as nostalgia. With this instrumentalism comes a new defi ni-
tion of the high-speed student, worried about falling behind. Learners must
rush, become adept, flexible, and able to judge instant knowledge in terms
of its use value, its applicability to real life concerns, and its prestige. It is too
much to ask. But this means that skills supplant ideas, technique is confused
with authority and responsibility, and know-how short-circuits the existen-
tial question of indeterminacy and incompleteness.
The expansion of multinational and now global corporations into every
corner of our lives has terrific force in reshaping the university. Students, too,
are consumers; they judge the competency of their education rather than their
own efforts. They are potential litigators, clients with fl imsy contracts. Teach-
ers deliver a curriculum with no destiny. Excellence awards proliferate and are
used to market the university, which must compete with other universities.
Yet the pervasiveness of excellence awards has not always been the case, as Bill
Readings (1996) remarked in his study of the university when he noted how
excellent adventures have supplanted enlightenment narratives. The post-
modern worker places new demands on the university—she is both consumer
 UNEVEN DEVELOPMENT 43

and unsatisfied customer. Readings’s (1996) critique suggests the university is

best described not as postmodern but as posthistorical. He means the univer-
sity has lived beyond its founding values of “historical development, affi rma-
tion, and inculcation of national culture” (6). That is, the university performs
the collapse of its pedagogic theme. Here is the new sense of where education
wears out. The critical function of university education—to expand minds,
to be critical of knowledge, to create personal and social insight—is obsolete.
There is nothing to take responsibility for. In Readings’s view, the significant
quandary is how will we think of the social bond, community, recognition,
responsibility, and difference if knowledge itself cannot put into place ethical-
ity and if consumerism designs experience as excellent.
Our postmodern university complicates the childhood of teacher edu-
cation and our work of taking responsibility for the world we have made.
Indeed, we may ask, in the posthistorical university, has childhood itself
become obsolete? What will the strange duration of childhood fi xate on if
experience is so fleeting and if knowledge itself becomes obsolete faster than
it can be learned? What happens if our unconscious equation of development
with loss is acted out by our technology? What then becomes of retroactive
time, of uneven development? How will the slippery surface animate the
depth of our soul? Is it now the case as Gertrude Stein once said, “There is no
there, there”? Are we urged to enjoy such emptiness?
I want to propose that despite its shiny surface, the posthistorical uni-
versity animates the depths of our dependency; we are even more dependent
on the human condition than what we have previously understood. If we
now understand that even our metanarratives wear out, their replacement
with a thousand tiny relative narratives is just as fatiguing. And if we are no
longer dependent on metanarratives, we are subject to how quickly they slip
away and to the mental pain of trying to think. Before our eyes, we see the
world wear out. This loss may provoke us to defend nostalgia, causing us to
turn our backs on the crisis of education by fi xating on what we imagine as a
time before, when everything about experience was certain, when experience
itself idealized its own structure of belief, and when emotional life was inad-
missible to theory. This imaginary loss renders our education melancholic,
fi lled with complaint that is then evacuated into the other who fails. Or, we
might risk the emotional pain of thinking and symbolize education without
the idealization of experience, itself a defense against the loss of experience.
We might begin to ponder the problem that the experience we have and the
having of experience has always been our crisis of education. We may come
to think of what it means for education to lose its ideals, including the ideal
44 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

of experience. Then, we may consider uncertainty as another term for what

Arendt (1958) called the human condition, a relation that calls for us to think.
In her own way, Arendt wrote:
Men are conditioned because everything they come in contact with turns
immediately into a condition of their existence. . . . The objectivity of the
world—its object-or thing-character—and the human condition supplement
each other; because human existence is conditioned existence, it would be
impossible without things, and things would be a heap of unrelated articles,
a non-world, if they were not the conditions of human existence. (9)

Our work, after all, like the world where we live, is always out of joint. And
there are new problems experience cannot solve. Now, we have the absurd
postmodern condition of sending our student teachers back to the nineteenth-
century school where they encounter the twenty-fi rst-century child. It is a
condition that can feel like a “heap of unrelated things” even if such things
are handmade.
The other problem for education is that there is no such thing as prepara-
tion for education and that learning to teach for the act of teaching and learn-
ing is an interminable problem of interpreting the frustration of incomplete
experience. If teacher education is to matter to teachers, to the university, and
to those who learn the work of teaching, our responsibility is to its conditions:
learning to live in this time that is out of joint, in discontinuous time, and in
the disjuncture of self/other relations. This means taking responsibility for
the discomforting fact of our dependency on the unknown. Development is
uneven because we are born too soon and become responsible for a world we
have not made. If we have the strange work of trying to understand the minds
of others and still keep our own mind, if we have the work of welcoming
what cannot be understood and the responsibility for a hospitality without
reserve, if we confront a world that is wearing out, and if we must work from
all this ignorance, teacher education may begin. It will be a teacher educa-
tion as an unfi nished project, more fragile than we ever imagined, and now
lost and found at the point where our fact of dependency develops within the
promise of responsibility.
 CHAPTER THREE

Reading

Dear Professor Britzman,

Thank you for assigning Never Let You Go.
—Your student, K.

It is difficult to describe Ishiguro’s (2005) novel, Never Let Me Go, without

the uncanny experience of feeling oneself reading: something in these pages
cannot be read. Does one encounter illegible experience or the anxiety of
meeting it? Steiner (1980) relates unsettling reading events to an ontological
difficulty, a disturbance in subterranean being, where, he argues, a contract is
being broken: “Ontological difficulties confront us with blank questions about
the nature of human speech, about the status of significance, about the con-
struct which we have” (41). We become again slow readers, caught between
our anticipations for what we hope to fi nd and the consequences of the sig-
nifier that take us elsewhere. We lose our place. It can feel as if the book is
reading us, turning our pages. When we read ourselves into this ontological
difficulty, all that we bring to the literary experience cannot repair what
breaks there. But why must our constructs fail? Does language itself betray the
promise of communication?
The simplicity of the novel’s plot lends anguish to reading’s despair. Our
narrator, Kathy H, is thirty-one years old. She is a clone looking back on
a past that has no origin even as she speaks fondly of being sent to school.

45
46 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

Retroactive time collapses from memory’s weight; she is never sure if the
events she recalls match any meaning, then or now. Her story is affected.
Everything feels mismatched and unclear. Early events register, leaving vague
after-impressions. Later, accidental occurrences lift into terrible significance
what is felt before it can be known. Meaning is deferred and her theories can-
not help that. Her memories as fragments of life are addressed to us readers,
and she always asks, “Do you know what I mean?” But we cannot know what
she means, for her meanings will be too terrible to identify with and all we can
do is stumble along with her through what feels like fields of disavowal. Kathy
H has friends who are just like her and readers follow estranging development
from their childhood spent in a boarding school to their terrible predestina-
tion. What will happen is this: after their education, the students’ vital body
parts—organ by organ—will be surgically removed and then transplanted
into a human whose own body is threatened by its wear. In her anonymity
she will replenish these “normals,” as she calls them, service them until, as the
normals will say, she “completes.” Ironically, it is her education that will help
her comply with this unreadable act.
Keep in mind that Kathy H and her cohorts are not machines. Nor do
they fit in the strange category of technical innovation that Turkle (2006)
calls “relational artifacts” (36), mechanical toys and robots created to ser-
vice our affective functions. The difference is that while relational artifacts
demand human care and are programmed to empathize and thus animate our
human desire for recognition and attachment, these “students,” as Ishiguro
names them, are real and invoke horror because they can never be separated
from their function and our cruelty. Unlike relational artifacts, where we care
for these objects as if they are real and as if they can know our desires, Ishiguro
takes away this “as if ” quality and readers will feel a symbolic collapse. Literal
creepiness leaves readers to question both the content of their own insides and
the designs of the external world. What do we make of the humans who need
to educate their spare parts? The novel’s title can be read as ironic, in the way
Lear (2003) describes its entanglements: “the speaker insists on holding onto
what the words really do mean” (68). If irony never lets words go, what do
we make of negation? What can never actually mean?
It is not only that Ishiguro’s novel performs its own resistance to being
read, itself a version of never letting go. And it is not just that Ishiguro pres-
ents readers with a peculiar ontological difficulty in the form of a negation
novel narrated by a replicate-being, whose fate as a copy is to copy and replace
a human part. While both dynamics in and of themselves—the uncanny,
inquisitive creatures and the fate of their illegible design—present ontological
 READING 47

difficulties, the anxiety of reading these part object creatures belongs to read-
ers. My psychoanalytic reading explores this discord between the signifier and
the signified, seeing such confl ict as emblematic of any reading. I analyze the
slow events of reading to illustrate two irresolvable confl icts animated and
transferred onto the scene of reading: one belongs to an encounter with what
is illegible yet impresses psychical reality, while the other concerns putting
these impressions into language to speak and write about what is ambiguous
and unknown in external reality. Ontic difficulties, though experienced from
within, are constitutive of being with others; there is no ontology without the
other. Even when we read external reality we cannot help drawing upon what
is unresolved in our own reading archive—what we wish to see or never want
to see again—yet, in so doing, the labor of reading reality follows the lines
created by the transference. We hope the other receives our difficult com-
munication. But our reading also returns to the reader to decipher. Reading,
after all, animates the internal world of object relations and so provokes what
Meltzer and Williams (1988) describe as “aesthetic confl ict,” an encounter
with the enigmatic, unknown quality of the outside world tied both to our
hope for fi nding beauty and our work of having to symbolize this search for
life. Aesthetic confl icts remind us of our misreading: the ways we read regard-
less of what is presented, the way we read with desire and anxiety.
Where reading complicates and what confuses reading—where ontologi-
cal difficulty becomes itself—is with the uncanny problem Ishiguro presents:
readers are given a phantasy about our phantasy, a mise-en-abīme. The novel
may be read as commentary on this dream within a dream, a story of origin
and the carnival of the internal world of object relations that can overhear and
then tries to read the society that invents them. The external world is known
through these feeling-creatures so readers have the double work of identify-
ing with characters they will also need to destroy and questioning what can
be known at all since the untimely setting is a post-Darwinian society located
in quaint villages in late twentieth-century England. This chronology, too,
is without origin; it is administered through disequilibrium of language and
education, guarded by impersonal science, populated by part objects, and
made quite mad by a wish for no death and no birth.
The novel begins with a broken contract, a terrific collapse of the peda-
gogical theme. The resources we require for relationality, responsibility, and
reparation of our object relations are, so to say, dangerous, secretive, para-
noid, and persecutory. One aesthetic confl ict resides in the problem of our
being with language: how it is that we say one thing and mean something
else, how it is that language deceives and compels our desire, how the other’s
48 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

overhearing cannot be controlled. Language can become euphemistic and

consequently no longer addressed to anyone. Language can act out its own
obscurantism to secure feigned knowledge. The other aesthetic confl ict is
inextricable, being tied to being with others. Repeatedly, the creatures in this
novel wonder what they actually understand about their world when they are
both told and not told about their fate. Left to their own theories, they carry
out strange reality tests that lead them nowhere. It is not so much that knowl-
edge is useless; its use is to destroy thinking.
Against these terrible odds, characters and readers persist in making
meaning from the fog of language and its education: infantile theories pro-
liferate and no one wants to let them go. Why this desire becomes animated
is tied to that intimate confl ict that constitutes psychical reality, what Klein
(1930) simply called “unreal reality” (221). Here, then, are a few novel ques-
tions: suppose each of us could copy ourselves and that our affects are the
copy. More difficult, suppose these copies are emissaries of our object rela-
tions, phantasies sent out into the world to do our own biddings. What can
we make of our psychical constructions—our affects and desires—who then
return to read us? Would we need to destroy them?

SLOW READINGS

Psychoanalytic readings are often accused of reading too much into our read-
ing events, of taking poetic license, of presenting absence, and of treating
the mind as if it is wanting and waiting to be read. Their readings, we may
feel, are intrusive, hard to swallow, difficult to keep down. Anxiety irrupts
where meaning is stretched to its further outpost, when the unconscious itself
is approached as a stranger, as a meaning-making thing that obeys no laws.
We refuse to be read by it, yet it still reads us. Psychoanalysis presents us
with these reading problems, with the request that we become slow readers,
but of another ilk than when we fi rst learned to read in school. Then, the
dilemma of slow readers is that they never let the word go because they will
garble it, mistake it for something else, or worry about the direction the next
word may take them. They stall precisely at the point where predictions are
needed and worry that the predictions they make are wild guesses, off the
mark. Their theory of reading—what they think should happen—may be too
idealized, too loyal to the original text. Reading then becomes instrumental,
a procedure for copying the text. Yet reading is not a matter of being able to
decode conventional signs because meaning cannot fall into place with cor-
rect pronunciation. The problem with this sticky theory is that slow readers
 READING 49

mistake competency for literal compliance. There is no wordplay between the

signifier and the signified. Psychoanalytic accounts wonder about these fi xa-
tions and insist that reading is the means for and function of our signifying
interior world.
Felman (2003), for example, in her study of madness and literature, has
named this force “the literary thing . . . the original, originative drive that
makes us read” (5). We cannot stop reading the literary thing; it can never
let us go. Jacobus’s (1999) study on “the scene of reading” leads her to ques-
tion the work of reading. She likens reading to transference, perhaps recalling
Freud’s (1912) view of the transference as both an inquiry addressed to the
other and the resistance to the meaning one cannot anticipate, that is, the
unexpected reply. Jacobus explores the resistance to reading when she raised
the Kleinian problem of inhibition, the painful experience of holding one-
self back from reading, of, say, not being able to let go of the original object
and allow interpretation to enliven and even change its meaning. Sedgwick
(1997) will see in reading inhibitions the Kleinian paranoid-schizoid position,
but also, in its oscillation, a potential she terms “reparative practices” (8).
Klein understood intellectual inhibition as a defense against an inaugural
anxiety that reading provokes: in wanting both to know and not know one’s
origins, the child becomes agitated and feels barred from possessing the con-
tents of the mother’s body. The preoccupation is with what cannot be seen
and what cannot be known, our fi rst aesthetic confl ict. Klein (1932) posits
the drive to know as flowering from archaic sadism, itself a developmen-
tal requirement. In Klein’s formulation there is a terrible prolepsis: know-
ing is fi rst equated with destroying the object, then worrying if the object
will retaliate, then wondering about one’s own destructive capacities. Doubt,
guilt, and grief, or depressive anxiety, accompany the desire for gratitude and
reparation. The object of knowledge only gradually emerges from this thicket
of projections and identifications. Reading leans on this archaic constellation
of anxiety, for we actually need to project into the text, tear it apart before it
retaliates, and then put it back together again through our “reparative” read-
ing, which is why the interpretation of this transference matters. Klein (1932)
insisted on the importance of others to contain this developmental rage: “the
mother has to prove again and again by her presence that she is not the ‘bad’,
attacking mother. The child requires a real object to combat its fear of its ter-
rifying introjected objects and of its super-ego. Furthermore, the presence of
the mother is used as evidence she is not dead” (179). It is the mother’s love
that enlivens, urging the child to risk, through symbolization, a new rela-
tion with itself and its fi rst object. This power of love will be the significant
50 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

resource for the ego to fi nd and encounter a reality beyond phantasy and to
reencounter phantasy’s reading purpose.
Klein’s (1931) analysis of a boy who could not distinguish a series of
words (poulet, chicken; poisson, fish; glace, ice), or understand why these
particular words came to represent dead, gray, crawly things for him, men-
tions James Strachey’s work on reading:

J. Strachey (1930) has shown that reading has the unconscious significance
of taking knowledge out of the mother’s body, and that fear of robbing her
is an important factor for inhibitions in reading. I should like to add that it
is essential for a favourable development of the desire for knowledge that the
mother’s body should be felt to be well and unharmed. It represents in the
unconscious the treasure-house of everything desirable which can only be
got from there; therefore if it is not destroyed, not so much in danger and
therefore not so dangerous itself, the wish to take food for the mind from it
can be more easily carried out. (241)

Yet there is nothing easy in Klein’s view of embodiment since it begins in dis-
embodiment and this anxiety constitutes both the dilemma and the potential
life, since the ontological difficulty is a radical relation. There is no being
without being with the other.
Reading feels as if it begins with taking in, introjecting the text/body and
projecting meanings back into it. In the logic of emotions, introjection is our
turn to the act of copying the object, only to project it back into the world, now
accompanied by our own difference. These psychological preludes threaten to
destroy the good object by turning it into the bad, vengeful one, which then,
in turn, threatens to destroy both the copy and the original. There is paranoia
and splitting—the paranoid schizoid position—that both animates and creates
introjection and projection and in the logic of phantasy, there is no distinction
between introjection and projection. Both bring dangers. Yet this act founds
the object relation because introjection and projection are the procedures for
identification, itself the basis for creating and destroying libidinal social bonds.
Jacobus’s (1999) use of both Klein and Strachey leads her to consider reading as
mental digestion. She must also suppose something negative: indigestion, diar-
rhea, eating one’s words, and vomiting them out. Reading is likened to either a
good feed or a forced one. One of the satisfactions of a good read is that we may
refind, in the mind, objects that have been lost to the world. Forced readings
render this search futile, but also return us to the oral stage.
We can expand Jacobus’s discussion to include the idea that reading reca-
pitulates development or even that it copies development. And this puts a
 READING 51

strain on reading, turning reading troubles into emotional distress. Klein will
take a further leap into this phantasy: if reading copies development, it is
because in psychical life there is no originary moment, only the body of the
other that feeds and contains the neonate. From this act of taking in, which, in
some sense is taking in what has already been expelled—what Klein calls pro-
jective identification—the object relations needed to evolve these precocious
resources into symbolization, interpretation, and creativity are created. From
object relations, which have no origin, one may fi nd the difference between
the symbol and the thing, or the difference between the signifier and the sig-
nified, and then the difference between the self and the other. Paradoxically,
for this relationship to be recognized there must be a separation. The object
must be let go to permit the self and the other their reading lives. At the heart
of creating internal and external reality, however, separation is equated with
loss and a terrible fear of destroying reality. The ontological difficulty is that if
this fear is also needed, lest we become monstrous, it is also where a contract
is being broken.
Only some of these developmental processes will occur for Ishiguro’s “stu-
dents.” Or, if they occur, they reverse their order. Indeed, just as we feared,
there only are bad attacking others and no evidence of a mother’s life. Our
ontological difficulty with Ishiguro’s novel begins when we wonder if these
students represent emissaries from the internal world even as they have their
own internal world. Yet how can there be an internal world without introject-
ing the first object, the mother’s breast? These replica students were never born,
but, inexplicably, they desire, they love, they want recognition. Here is where
my own reading broke down, where I became, again, a slow reader, searching
for the literal origin of meaning and not being able to let go.
How can this novel be read? Shall we see the novel as an allegory for
interiority? Or is it a parable of childrearing and so a comedy of error made
from forbidden parental Oedipal wishes? What if the novel is the educator’s
phantasy: that teachers, in the ways in which they prepare students, do have a
hand in murdering them? Is it a phantasy that students have: that the teachers
and anyone else really want to eat them because they cannot be original? Is
this our worry about copying and being copied? Is it a story of not seeing what
is in front of one’s eyes? Could this novel be what Jacobus (2005), in her dis-
cussion of the poetics of Kleinian play and the work of Susan Isaacs, identifies
as an “acting out of metaphor” (96)? Does language have agency? What can it
mean for the metaphor to turn against its object, to take on a life of its own,
and to wreak havoc? Is this science fiction or fairy tale? How can a copy have
real feelings if there is no original object, if there is no mother? What makes
52 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

these copies so real that their theory of love allows them to imagine, against
all odds, a refi nding of the lost object? These student creatures present what
Klein (1957) called “memories in feelings” (180). Indeed, in the last pages of
the novel, our narrator, Kathy H, feels that no one can take her memories
away, even if she herself is disposable. Kathy H must die from a phantasy of
social eugenics that has replaced introjection and projection with the surgical
procedures of transplantation. There is only possessing the other and never
letting go. In this phantasy world, ontological difficulties belong to no one.
The phantasy is that one cannot read because the text is set. The phantasy is
that we must overread, read into our own insides.

COPYCATS

Our reading methods, or the theories we use to protect and project our
own intelligibility, may initially foreclose this reading trauma, what Arendt
(1993a), in her discussion of Kantian action and history, called a confronta-
tion with “melancholy haphazardness” (85). One effect of melancholy is also
a defense against it: we wish for a doppelgänger. Dreams permit us to double
ourselves, to have a second-chance self. Each night we may project our mis-
takes and wishes into the body of someone just like us. And every night we
may take our novel time to play all of the roles, becoming again slow read-
ers. The child’s imaginary twin performs this service as well, along with our
stories of neonates being given to the wrong family. Anxiety’s delegates give
reasons, intentions, wishes, and purposes to our bad objects.
Ishiguro narrates the doppelgänger’s enigma: here is a society that engi-
neers its own greedy immortality, a social state that cannot lose the object,
cannot wear out and so will neither die nor recognize love. We are presented
with the paranoid schizoid position: the mother’s body cannot be robbed
because it is already full of stolen goods. And as for the reader’s identification,
we may have to ask what we are analyzing when we analyze the novel, when
we analyze our relation to this particular phantasy that invites something of
our own obsession, anxiety, and paranoia, our misreading. For what we have
is a copy reading our worst phantasies of destruction: mother’s body is dead
because she feeds upon her children. And this body/novel both fascinates and
disgusts. We encounter, then, a terrible love story, in which the Kleinian con-
tract of love as reparation, as atonement for the destruction and as gratitude
toward the other, is being broken.
Kathy H carries the donors’ memories but also their mysteries, for these
replicas have real feelings and so they, too, search for the meaning of life,
 READING 53

anxiously gathering discarded clues, patching together hearsay and hope and
proposing, from this refuge, a preposterous theory: even if the contract is
broken, there may be a hidden loophole of escape. Their questions are the
inverse of the Kleinian child, for essentially Kathy H and her friends will end
up as the inside of the mother’s body: they provide her treasures and so their
curiosity, their drive to know, cannot affect the other. Here is the literary
thing in overdrive. Their attempts at symbolization cannot reach the heights
of tragedy or the Kierkegaardian sense of despair, of not wanting to be who
one is; compliance literally keeps them together until, that is, it is time for
them to be torn apart.
On the last pages of the novel, Kathy H is mourning for her lover, Tommy.
They have let each other go because Tommy is about to expire. She is stand-
ing on a flat field, surveying all the rubbish, and then has “a fantasy thing”
(263) that went no further:

I was thinking about the rubbish, the fl apping plastic in the branches . . .
and I half closed my eyes and imagined this was the spot where everything
I’d ever lost since my childhood had washed up. . . . The fantasy never got
beyond that—I didn’t let it—and though the tears rolled down my face, I
wasn’t sobbing or out of control. I just waited a bit, then turned back to the
car, to drive off to wherever it was I was supposed to be. (263)

But the “fantasy thing” is not really over. After all, there is still the drive.
Kathy H, along with her peers, has spent her childhood in a school called
Hailsham. Its name means what it says: the children, with no parents, are
greeted by a sham that they can’t quite figure but that manages to hail them.
Their teacher-guardians seem to give them an education, but no assignment
has any purpose. The rules of the school are secretive, leaving the students
alone to wildly interpret their guardian’s utterances. In this pretend school
the students are urged to be creative and to make art, which is collected by
Madame. Kathy H has a few unexpected run-ins with Madame: she hopes
Madame can understand her, but their interactions leave both disturbed.
Ruth, one of Kathy’s strange friends, believes Madame is afraid of the stu-
dents. In one scene, six of the eight-year-old girls decide to “swarm” Madame.
They want her reaction. They wanted to scare her, pretending they were in a
dream. But the girls had an incomplete plan:

And it wasn’t even as though Madame did anything other than what we pre-
dicted she’d do: she just froze and waited for us to pass by. She didn’t shriek,
or even let out a gasp. But we were all so keenly tuned in to picking up her
response, and that’s probably why it had such an effect on us. . . . And I can
54 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

still see it now, the shudder she seemed to be suppressing, the real dread that
one of us would accidentally brush against her. . . . Ruth was right: Madame
was afraid of us. But she was afraid of us in the same way someone might be
afraid of spiders. We hadn’t been ready for that. It never occurred to us to
wonder how we would feel, being seen like that, being the spiders. (32)

There is no way to prepare for one’s strangeness and Kathy H takes a moment
to teach us readers about our universal selves: “I’m sure somewhere in your
childhood, you too had an experience like ours that day; similar if not in the
actual details, then inside, in the feelings” (33).

MISUNDERSTANDING

The problem of reading also belongs to the realm of thought and desire, what
Arendt (1958) considered as narrative. The labor of thought questions how
one reconciles reality with truth, separates the meaningful from the mean-
ingless, and judges the consequences of action when acting cannot guarantee
thought and may even destroy it. Desire gives the gift of the question and thus
places us in the world with others. But for Arendt (1993a), a terrible blind spot
or ignorance propels human action:
Human action, like all strictly political phenomena, is bound up with
human plurality, which is one of the fundamental conditions of human life
insofar as it rests on the fact of natality, through which the human world
is constantly invaded by strangers, newcomers whose actions and reactions
cannot be foreseen by those who are already there and are going to leave in
a short while. (61)

The replenishing of life, in Arendt’s view, repeats its own fragility: because
the future cannot be known, welcoming the stranger and feeling invaded go
hand in hand. Natality with its promise, and life with its constraints, all turn
on relations of existence and generations and so, on life and death. Except in
the novel, those already here will not leave: they will not let go, they hate the
stranger, and there is no plurality. Thought is banal and evil. Concerned as
she is with the question of the political, itself a reflection of the limitations of
human action, Arendt (1993a), in her epilogue to her essay on history, links
desire without the second chance of thought to the paranoid-schizoid totali-
tarian society:
In my studies of totalitarianism I tried to show that the totalitarian phe-
nomenon, with its striking anti-utilitarian traits and its strange disregard
for factuality, is based in the last analysis on the conviction that everything
 READING 55

is possible—not just permitted, morally or otherwise . . . that action can

be based on any hypothesis and that, in the course of consistently guided
action, particular hypothesis will become true, will become actual, factual
reality. The assumption which underlies consistent action can be as mad as
it pleases. (87)

The totalitarian society can be as mad as it pleases because everything is pos-

sible, including control of reality and life. But this means something terrible:
nothing can be human, because even possibility wears itself down. That other
totalitarian society, the one the psychoanalysts euphemistically term omnipo-
tence, also refuses to read into its desire to be the law.
Arendt’s (1958) discussion of the human condition describes natality as
fragile, new, and ushering in promise. She is careful to separate the human
condition, or what is public, from human nature, which she considers private.
This distinction is not easily maintained, for, without the private, there would
be no public and a public without the private is no public at all. Her stress,
however, is on the condition: “men are conditioned beings because every-
thing they come in contact with turns immediately into a condition of their
existence” (9). But here we meet another problem because human nature,
whatever that can mean, is also our condition. Even as Arendt insists on places
where one can narrate hope for new beginnings, something within human
nature is blind to its conditions. She writes: “The miracle that saves the world,
the realm of human affairs, from its normal, “natural” ruin is ultimately the
fact of natality, in which the faculty of action is ontologically rooted. It is, in
other words, the birth of new men and the new beginning, the action they
are capable of by virtue of being born” (247). The haphazard melancholia,
for both Ishiguro and Arendt, is that action can be an act of disavowal and a
hatred of life, a severing of a responsibility yet to become. The problem is that
action cannot know its own duration or consequences. We may be capable of
actions, but our actions can render us incapable as well.
What saves us from ourselves, according to Arendt, is that others are
born. This is a curious insistence, for it suggests that our second chance does
not belong to us. Ishiguro’s novel severs this second chance by supposing the
psychoanalytic mythology of the Oedipal confl ict in reverse: rather than the
child wanting to have one parent and kill the other one, it is the parents who
will kill the child and refuse the law of mortality and incest. There is no law.
Language becomes truncated, made euphemistic: there are replicas, the nor-
mals, they and us, models, carers, donors, and no name-of-the-father. With
the veil of deception that is language, the desire for recognition, a relation
that also saves the world, or, at least, offers a lifeline between those yet to
56 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

become and those already here, unravels. And when there is no recognition,
as Ricoeur (2005) has shown, there is no gratitude for being recognized. Rec-
ognition, for Ricoeur, is not the work of identification and categorization,
but the work of gratitude: the one who gives recognition takes responsibility
and gives reparation, the one who receives recognition gives gratitude. Rec-
ognition institutes the social bond, but is itself organized by misrecognition:
“The test of misunderstanding . . . shakes our confidence in the capacity of
things and persons to make themselves recognized. An acceptance of a kind
of companionship with misunderstanding, which goes with the ambiguities
of an incomplete, open-ended life world, has to replace the fear of error”
(256–257).

THEORIES

Our student clones attempt to make into a companion their feelings of being
misunderstood. While they tried to express themselves by making art, no one
knew why they were required to hand their art over. From reading novels
and from her teachers’ lectures, Kathy H patches together the romantic dream
that art is an expression of the artist’s soul. If art holds the secret of the artist’s
soul, if art somehow can telegraph the secret yearnings of the artist—that the
artist loves, lives, desires, possesses depth, and can symbolize all of this—she
reasoned, her wish for recognition must also reflect her humanity. And, in
one way, having their art collected by Madame and placed in The Gallery
could confi rm her desire, except the students do not know if such a place even
exists. Against all odds, they make their theories and want to test them. One
theory carries the students through adolescence and into their adulthood. It is,
so to say, a faint hope clause because the students both know and do not know
their fate; they have been told and not told; they believe and do not believe.
Their theory is tied to the shadowy figure of Madame who quickly enters the
school and leaves with their art. She is stealing their treasures.
The teachers tell the students they are special. It is a designation that dis-
solves every meaning into fog. There are ghastly truths to learn, but, before
that, the students are captured by their theories and myths: lost and mur-
dered children, limbs that suddenly drop off of bodies, and even phantasies
of having a normal life, like those they fi nd in the magazines. Everything is
unfathomable, secrets are being kept, hints cannot be read, and contracts are
being broken. They have learned to become slow readers sorting through the
enigmatic signifier. And they fi nd reasons everywhere, but to no purpose.
If the school itself turned the students into detectives, they reasoned, and if
 READING 57

whispering was the preferred mode of exchange, then all meanings would
have to be arranged and rearranged on the sly, sutured quickly while no one
was looking. Tommy’s theory comes after Miss Lucy, a teacher, tells him
not to imagine his future. Before Miss Lucy was fi red, she tells her charges:
“The problem, as I see it, is you’ve been told and not told . . . and none of
you understand. . . . Your lives are set out for you. You’ll become adults, then
before you’re old, before you’re even middle aged, you’ll start to donate your
vital organs. That’s what each of you was created to do” (73). Yet the adoles-
cents cannot understand what this means and, undoubtedly, no one can. The
students are suddenly embarrassed, as if Miss Lucy had lost her mind. For the
adolescents, what will happen could only be joked about, even if there were
strange worries of the body becoming unzipped, or arms suddenly falling off.
They made impossible remedies to avoid falling apart. And the teachers urged
them to take care of their bodies, but without ever saying why.

DEFERRAL

Years later, Tommy, the boy with inexplicable temper tantrums who refused
to be creative and make art as a child, recalled something Miss Emily once
said: “Things like pictures, poetry, all that kind of stuff, she said, they revealed
what you were inside, she said. They revealed your soul” (160). If the guard-
ians looked to the art as evidence of the students’ soul, the students reasoned,
they would also be able to understand themselves if only they could have a
look at their “models,” or the “possibles,” people the students hoped might
be their parents. An odd reversal occurs, for the students believe their par-
ents would hold the key to what might have been their future. The students
combed through television characters, the magazine models, the pornography
pictures, trying to understand why they felt as they did but also to learn new
feelings. Kathy H manically fl ips through pornography, hoping to see a parent
there. Perhaps seeing a porn star would explain her inexplicable desire to have
meaningless sex. When, after graduating from Hailsham, they are sent to a
waiting camp for “training,” where nothing actually happened, the students
would sneak into town, looking for models they thought would be the key to
their own insides. But how old would the models be? Would they be parents
or babies? Kathy H explains:
Since each of us was copied at some point from a normal person, there must
be, for each of us, someone out there, a model getting on with his or her
life. . . . One big idea behind fi nding your model was that when you did,
you’d glimpse your future. . . . We . . . believed that when you saw the
58 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

person you were copied from, you’d get some insight into who you were
deep down, and maybe too, you’d see something of what your life held in
store. (127)

This was the dream future, where reason merges desire with certainty. It is
also the adolescent belief, a fi xation described by Kristeva (2007): “The ado-
lescent is not a researcher in a laboratory, he’s a believer. We are all adolescents
when we are enthralled by the absolute” (717). And, what could be more
absolute than meeting your copy?
Late in the novel, the students have grown up to live their life as dona-
tions. Hailsham has closed. The school had an impossible mission: to educate
organs under the guise of humane treatment for the students. The founders
wanted to give these creatures a childhood and perhaps a memory of that.
Certainly Kathy H learned this affected lesson, for she is narrating her story
and her own ending. Now in their thirties and fi nally consummating their
long love affair, Kathy H and Tommy recall the art that Madame collected,
their expressions that revealed their insides, their souls. Years before, they
heard vague rumors that Madame grants a year’s deferral for surgery if the
couple can prove they are really in love. They feel they are not asking for
much, only one year’s grace. The aging students fi nd Madame and Miss Emily
to ask for their deferral, only to learn that no such possibility ever existed. The
deferral was only a rumor, a runaway desire. But why take the art away, and
why have Hailsham? asks Kathy H. “Miss Emily said, ‘Yes, why Hailsham at
all . . . We took away your art because we thought it would reveal your souls.
Or, to put it more fi nely, we did it to prove you had souls at all.’ Kathy H replies,
‘Why did you have to prove a thing like that, Miss Emily? Did someone
think we didn’t have souls?’ ” (237–238). And Miss Emily then knew that
her educational experiment worked: the students could be “taken aback.”
She missed, however, how these students returned the improbability of her
surprising reading. What she could not know is their negation: the reply, “I
do not understand.” What the students could not know as well is that they
already had their deferral called childhood and they made that from their
inexplicable wish to know their own insides.
In the allegory that is reading, our copies cannot know themselves as cop-
ies, nor do our phantasies know their own negations. Psychoanalytic reading
teaches us a lesson we already know, that we cannot let go of affected life—
we are always reading between the lines, wagering meaning and deferring it.
Here is where we fi nd that our constructs fail. Illegible experience turns us
into slow readers, returning us to a time before language when oral and anal
phases reign supreme, where introjecting the world and projecting it back into
 READING 59

the world of others mark and read ontological difficulty. If Ishiguro’s novel
presents us with our phantasies of being born without parents, of our worries
that we may have to donate our insides, of having to go to school without
knowing why, of always having to fail our reading comprehension tests, of
having sexuality without reason, and of the wishing for immortality with our
little hope for a deferral—indeed, of never having to let go—he also reminds
us that these phantasies may take on a life of their own, and in some sense
may need to in order for us to read at all. In the strangest of ways, Ishiguro
writes of reading’s development and returns us to our private never-never-
land. In this regard, what makes us all special students is that the anxiety of
reading belongs to us; that when we read, we really do rob someone’s insides,
we really do read into things. The act of being a slow reader performs these
ontological difficulties, something needed for symbolization and art as well.
While experienced from within, ontological difficulties, what Klein (1930)
simply called “unreal reality,” (221) and reading into this involve a work of
belonging to others and a second chance.
This page intentionally left blank.
 CHAPTER FOUR

Psychology

What was life? No one knew. It was aware of itself the moment it
became life, that much was certain—and yet it did not know what
it was. . . . Consciousness of self was an inherent function of mat-
ter once it was organized as life, and if that function was enhanced
it turned against the organism that bore it, strove to fathom and
explain the very phenomenon that produced it, a hope-fi lled and
hopeless striving of life to comprehend itself, as if nature were
rummaging to fi nd itself in itself—ultimately to no avail, since
nature cannot be reduced to comprehension, nor in the end can
life listen to itself.
—Thomas Mann, The Magic Mountain

TELOS

Not much is certain about representing our affected psychology, about turn-
ing affect into language, and about learning from within this uncertainty. If
we then turn to the field of psychology for answers as to what we are about, we
may attribute our anxiety to its content, weighted by the burden of explain-
ing human development and its problems of mind, motivation, behavior, and
character. Its hearing may burn our ears. Psychology, after all, is talking about
us. And if we fi nd in its language our paranoia, our obsessionality, our perver-
sions, and our neurosis, it is only because we are already psychological beings.
In Piera Aulagnier’s (2001) view, it takes a psychology to make a psychology

61
62 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

and our sounding begins the moment our fi rst other draws us into “the plea-
sure of hearing, the desire to hear, [and] the demand for meaning” (57). This
much is certain: as pleasure turns to demand for love and for meaning, we
become subject to the symbolic, and to our own overhearing, mishearing, and
refusing to listen. As soon as the erotic body vibrates with anticipation for the
other, as soon as we become aware of ourselves, as soon as we become self-
conscious and thus vulnerable to our thoughts about these thoughts, we both
want and do not want what we fi nd. And the questions that follow, an echo
of our resounding desire, may also unnerve us.
But if it takes a psychology to make a psychology, the field called psychol-
ogy eludes this transference neurosis and its own anthropomorphic nature. It
is as if it writes with an invisible hand. When Foucault (2006) approached the
field of psychology as apparatus, practice, and as object of knowledge/power/
pleasure, he found its history of forgetting within the receding vantage of
madness and how the human sciences passed over this with their insistence
on a discourse of mental illness. He related this genealogy of knowledge to
its three domains: power, ethics, and pleasure. Together they impress and call
forth our fault lines with meanings of normality and pathology. As a mecha-
nism and function of power, knowledge raised for Foucault the question of
how and when the human became posited as a psychological being, subject to
its own interiority and to those of others. As ethics, Foucault asked how the
human becomes a problem for the impossible professions of medicine, edu-
cation, and government. The pleasure domain, from whatever side, lends to
these procedures of knowledge the erotic charge of mastery and identity tied
to the desire to look, to examine, to auscultate, and to be seen, examined,
and heard.
The metaphors of psychology register these confl icts: exchanging mad-
ness with biology, bringing discourse to observation, and reconstituting evo-
lution with ecology. One consequence of these great discursive knowledge
shifts is that the more the human’s vulnerability and limitation become tied
to the progress of science, the more science becomes silent about its own
affected history. Another consequence follows: this silent history speaks, now
from the vantage of what it does not say but nonetheless acts out. In Foucault’s
(2006) view: “In the reconstruction of this experience of madness, a history
of the conditions of possibility of psychology wrote itself as though of its own
accord” (xxxiv). It is as if the field of psychology repeated our own Oedipal
mythology of love and hate, wishing to give itself birth while still needing to
kill its parents and have the baby. Even as psychology’s new century turns from
the language of psychical confl icts to those of cognitive deficits, it continues
 PSYCHOLOGY 63

writing “its own accord,” now with another discourse, one that Fodor (2007)
ironically calls “panpsychism.” Left to its own accord, consciousness is pre-
sented as an endless production of itself: as the cause, consequence, effect, and
condition for its own mastery.
As the psychological field turns toward the biology of cognition, the mind
is thought to emerge from and function with the gray matter of tiny neurons,
themselves actions upon actions (Doidge 2007). Impulses are hiring, fi ring,
and misfi ring themselves, forming pathways of vast circuitry that somehow
stimulate and inhibit bodily functions with links to desire. The idea is that
the brain is plastic, endlessly creating itself, and capable of making up its own
mind. Certainly others are needed for these affairs, yet the solipsism of the
field’s imagery of multiplying and dividing neurons lends to the brain, and
to the field, a weird autonomy. Big questions must follow: why are circuits
subject to breakdown? Who fi xes them? Who comprehends what? But also,
if the mind can be anything, why would it go to such great lengths to deceive
it? These questions are foreclosed as the applications of neuroscience enter the
field of education. We fi nd ourselves subject to endless practices of cognitive
improvement programs, repetitive memory tasks, motivational advice, and
exercises to reorder the brain. Without much comment, the new catchwords
are learning and unlearning, accomplished through the baby steps of positive
thoughts supported by rewards. We are urged to enjoy our education.
And yet the capacity for consciousness to know its own procedures as it
thinks and that education can have its way here—to say nothing of what it
feels like and can mean to symbolize the history of our own insides, indeed,
to wonder how this gray matter comes to matter at all—remains ineffable.
We cannot know the meaning of life, nor can we even say why we have
meaning at all. Not even neuroscience can touch the affective vulnerabilities
of learning made from unanswerable questions and our pleasure and terror
in having to ask them. We cannot give ourselves reasons for our reasons.
Nor can we leave the language of psychology to account for why psychology
makes us nervous.
Second thoughts may bring us to the heart of the matter: the psychologi-
cal subject must take itself as its own object of knowledge, moving deeper into
its own psychology, but in that process incurs self-alienation through turning
against the self. We can only objectify the self with something nonobjective:
our projections. Through projecting into our own identifications, we also are
gambling with a constitutive alienation for the hope of refi nding our own
lost cause and unity. This is the tragic condition of the bodily ego that Freud
(1923, 26) described: a projection of its own surface that can then take itself as
64 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

its own love object but also become the cause of its own derision. It is almost
as if, in its very process of coming to know, the ego encounters the history of
its own losses. And yet, without absence, there would be no reason to symbol-
ize. Only humans struggle to fi ll this lack with becoming who they are. As
Lacan saw it, all in the name of truth, humans are the only animals capable of
self-deception, illusion, and disillusion. Humans are the only creatures who
link and sever their authenticity for the other’s desire (Lacan 1998b).
Psychoanalysis begins with this history of otherness: how need turns to
want and then migrates into demand, how in this occurrence love and hate
are never so far apart, and then how we come to want to give birth to our-
selves only to fi nd a discord in our own accord. These confl icts posit and
divide the human and give us their remainder: psychical life. In this narrative,
consciousness, as the exception rather than the rule of life, serves as a protec-
tive barrier against intolerable stimuli and the violence of the real. Its other
is the unconscious, an unknowable force of antihistory made from desires
without contradiction, negativity, or time. And psychoanalysis gives the func-
tion of biology away for this problem of having to symbolize. “We owe it to
psychoanalysis,” writes Aulagnier (2001), “to have shown that the need for
the presence of an Other is in no way reducible to the vital functions that it
must carry out” (72). Leaning on the other leaves us with our own inexpli-
cable remainder: our psychical life.
Given its own conditions of possibility—that psychology must incorpo-
rate, defer, and repress that which is beyond it—neither the field called psy-
chology nor we as psychological beings can comprehend with reason a crisis
of subjectivity that the human must suffer in order to develop. That we are
unnerved by any psychology is the return of this repressed. And one aspect
of this crisis emerges from something that is not gray matter but feels like
it, what Lacan (1998a) calls “ the status of knowledge [that] raise[s] another
question, namely how it is taught” (141). In this turn to education that is yet
to come, Lacan was not suggesting a better teaching technique to make psy-
chology digestible, for he saw instituted education itself as a defense against
desire and urged us to think of something indigestible about our psychology.
In placing the problem of knowledge into the question of how it is taught,
Lacan returned us to the crisis of education from the vantage of a style of
teaching and learning (Felman 1987).
Let us consider our discomforting psychology as it is linked to teaching
and learning with the idea that there is an ontic crisis magnified when one
tries to think of the mind and body as composed of gray matter, chemical
procedures, networks of neurons fi ring and misfi ring, or even when one
 PSYCHOLOGY 65

encounters representations of the mind and its affects as radically relational

and as unbound by consciousness and its projection of bodily boundaries,
time, and space. From this problem we may slowly make our way to the idea
that ontic crisis—the anticipating body that attempts to confront the real—is
also a resource for hope and the condition for how Klein (1940) presented
“the depressive position” (345), a change in the procedures of thought and
feeling, conveyed through the poignancy and risks of love. Klein linked
the adult’s work of mourning losses to the development of a child’s mind.
She believed that learning emerged with the confl ict between the hope for
goodness and the anxiety of its loss. In this relationship, Klein’s theory may
be used to link learning with the wish to restore and repair one’s inner and
outer world.
While discussions of neuroscience play a role in the problems sketched,
my aim is neither to argue with this science nor to idealize a time when the
mind was not likened to plasticity, wireless networks, and automata functions.
Yet knowing how something works does not give rise to a theory of learn-
ing. Nor is the specification of the mind’s functions the same as experiencing
our feelings through words. I will raise some special difficulties that affect us
because the field of neuroscience is presented as having a capacity to reorder
human behavior and reorganize, without much critical comment, our val-
ues and attitudes toward what can count as order and disorder, as error and
pathology, and as progress and regression. If education is always affected by
the question of how knowledge should be taught, received, and retained and
in this way is always on the verge of suffering from its own memory disorder,
the field of neuroscience now pressures it with what can count as hope and
hopelessness, and education and malediction.
We don’t really need the field of psychology to feel this vulnerability
since we cannot help anthropomorphizing the mind and populating it with a
strange combination of our own creaturely life and our dearly held and feared
objects. Taking in and spitting out is the beginning of psychology (Aulagnier
2001). Try as we might to bend this beginning into relevancy or subject it
to memory, however, it takes us to the limits of consciousness. There is no
cure to prevent inner causality from its compelling libidinality and its adhe-
sive expression through procedures of introjection, projection, identification,
and transference. Nor can we understand with certainty the odd occurrence
of needing to disavow reality and history without realizing why. And there
is no answer our defenses can give us as to why the human feels the urge to
dominate nature, no ultimate reason why affective life may be rendered as
irrational and as something to overcome.
66 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

While there are a great many contexts one may call upon to understand
this crisis of meaning and so of subjectivity, the field of education provides our
transit point, specifically the classroom, since the ideas of general psychology
and now cognitive science tend to be introduced, conveyed, and disseminated
there. Lectures are still the technology of choice in university courses, yet
rarely do we link this knowledge’s dissemination to a constitutive confl ict
in subject/object relations. While students and teachers feel a great deal of
anxiety over the uses and meaning of psychology as they anticipate how their
own psychology is conveyed by them and received by the other, these affects
take their force from the primal scene of our first education, where the other’s
knowledge addresses both our ignorance and desire, and where, through our
lawless sense of being, our unconscious registers what neither party ever con-
sciously intended. This unprecedented mismatch is repeated in teaching and
learning, and, if all goes well, is a part of what is studied.
To understand the problems of representing psychology, I turn to the
psychological lectures of Freud, Winnicott, and Adorno, each of whom links,
with different emphasis, the crisis of subjectivity to problems in teaching
and learning. The genre of lecture itself is instructive because the lecturer is
making an attempt to communicate a style of teaching and learning without
really knowing how the knowledge will be heard. Not knowing can be one
of our most honest admissions in educational settings, unless, of course, the
lecturer becomes nervous. In the case of the psychoanalysts, much psycho-
analytic knowledge has been conveyed through the lecture, usually peppered
with commentary on teaching style, resistance to learning, and objections to
its theories. It is this seasoned knowledge that confers on these lectures their
problems in symbolization. They all convey an antipedagogical flavor with
the acknowledgment of learning’s latency. These lectures turn on the ques-
tion of affect, taking their residence within a paradox of human learning,
fi rst raised by Anna Freud and then heightened by Klein (Britzman 2003a).
The problem is that there can be no learning or teaching without anxiety,
yet anxiety, an anticipation and story of self/other relations, calls forth both
phantasies of and desires for knowledge and defenses against its loss. But if
anxiety signals that fi rst urge to think, it is also the force in which thoughts
lose their curiosity. Anxiety exchanges what does not yet exist in the name of
what has already happened.
To glimpse what it feels like to think the psychology of our psychology,
I then turn to two novels, which also have their own lectures. They reside in
that other gray area, literary knowledge, what Felman (1987) theorizes as a
knowledge that cannot be in charge of itself, yet charges its readers to think
 PSYCHOLOGY 67

differently about how we experience our confl icts with mastery, progress,
and difference. Thomas Mann’s (2005) Magic Mountain and Richard Pow-
ers’s (2006) The Echo Maker are novels of illness and education. They can be
thought of as historical bookends to the question of teaching and learning
psychology. They play in the ruins of the collapse of their pedagogical themes.
Each novel presents a protagonist’s crisis of development as coincident with
world crisis and his thoughts on life and death. Their genre is the Zeitroman,
novels critical of their own age; indeed, they represent a literary register of
disillusionment with the promise of progress, education, and cure. These time
novels are well equipped to service our own imagination, itself a peculiar dis-
order of the mind needed to interpret the erotic force of teaching and learn-
ing. Mann’s novel opens the twentieth century as affected by its coincidental
technologies of interiority: the X-ray machine, discovered in Germany 1895
and psychoanalysis, discovered around the same time in Vienna by Freud’s
hysterics and then through his own dream life. These shadowy inventions—a
special introduction to our own otherness—open the body to questioning its
mysterious interiority. Our young unformed hero, Hans Castorp, spends his
time novel in a sanitarium where he learns from others how to be ill. Over
the course of his long stay, Hans receives many lectures on psychology and
education and gets lost in its thickets.
Powers’s novel plunges readers into our twenty-fi rst century. It, too, is
affected with the technology of its time such as neuroscience, the Internet,
the cell phone, the global economy and their contribution to the “post 911”
mentality of paranoia, surveillance, information, and fear of falling. Our
late-in-life hero, Gerald Weber, is a neurophysiologist in the midst of falling
into his own nervous breakdown. He, too, learns from others how to be ill,
but not before he ruins his own empire of neuroscience, originally dedi-
cated to knowing and popularizing its cases. Despite his intentions, Weber
could not help himself from being affected by the strange and estranging
world of neurological disorders. And like his patients and students, Weber
has difficulty with recognition. His disorder repeats what cannot be sym-
bolized by the knowledge he holds; he only learns this while giving a lec-
ture. I conclude with the ontic question of the crisis of meaning as a human
condition needed for what Lear (2006) calls “radical hope.” Here education
as both cultural process and psychological experience may encounter new
ways to question our recourse to mastery and the defenses against differ-
ence that follow. From this ruin the enigmatic qualities of our culture and
mind do become needed resources, even if one cannot know where these
resources lead.
68 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

LECTURES

Freud was the fi rst lecturer on the problem of taking in and spitting out
psychoanalysis. He already knew that psychology makes us nervous. Indeed,
over the course of his career, he wrote many lectures on this topic and his
(1933[1932]) New Introductory Lectures on Psycho-analysis began with a poignant
admission:

These new lectures, unlike the former ones, have never been delivered . . . a
surgical operation had made speaking in public impossible for me. If, there-
fore, I once more take my place in the lecture room during the remarks that
follow, it is only by an artifice of the imagination; it may help me not to for-
get to bear the reader in mind as I enter more deeply into my subject. (5)

But keeping the reader in mind meant having to argue with her and with
his own doubts in assuming the depths of his speculations. Perhaps he was
also speaking then to himself when he advised his readers to expect hazi-
ness, indeed, to accompany him through the bewildering haze of the mind.
The request is difficult and Freud knew too well that, when it comes to the
matter of psychology, readers only want to know what they already believe
with the insistence on confi rming what they feel has already happened. And
they will encounter uncertainty by reproaching Freud’s knowledge for being
insufficient. More insufficiencies will follow and Freud will see these defenses
as a repetition of infantile theories of learning, even as he readily admitted
that their strange affair is the basis of and resource for anyone’s imagination
(Freud 1908).
Freud’s lecture then shifts from his address to the general reader to prac-
titioners of psychoanalysis. They are not left off the hook. The next resistance
belongs to them and he warns that if they apply psychoanalysis only to others
without questioning how they, too, are affected, two mistakes will follow. If
the analyst insists that knowledge taken in is the same knowledge the analyst
intends it to be, then psychoanalysis will dissipate into the uselessness of sug-
gestion. Teaching and learning, like theory and practice, Freud argued, are by
their nature in confl ict with one another. If one tries to settle their discord,
psychoanalysis will be lost. The second mistake occurs if the analyst imagines
that only others have an unconscious and thus acts as if her interpretation only
has to do with the analysand and not the countertransference. Psychoanalysis,
Freud reminds both friend and foe, will affect the analyst in ways the analyst
cannot control but nonetheless experiences. These two mistakes—that there
is such a thing as transparent communication with an unequivocal language,
 PSYCHOLOGY 69

and that the unconscious can be mastered—are defenses against being affected
by the uncertainties of life that psychoanalysis invites us to put into words.
The resistance, however, comes in many forms and, in Freud’s view, resistance
breeds resistance to resistance and the very thought of having psychology to
affect psychology will incur ontic confusion. More haste will be created from
the haze of knowledge.
Winnicott (1996) invited such confusion in his lecture on some difficul-
ties in learning psychology. The difficulties of its learning, he will suggest,
cannot be separated from its teaching. This is a different take from Freud in
that whereas Freud insisted on confl ict between teaching and learning and so
on the discord between theory and practice, Winnicott focused on the ambiv-
alent use of this confl ict, with the assumption that students both want and do
not want this knowledge. He expected students would be ruthless with and
without concern for the object of knowledge and in this attack repeat what
must remain as infantile in learning. Yet this aggressive move was not con-
sidered as resistance to the knowledge. In a curious way, he considered this
aggression as a sign of hope that the object will survive. Winnicott does warn
students that their fi rst encounter with psychology will be affected; indeed,
their destructive impulse will become an omnipotent defense. Students will
measure this new knowledge against their own experience. If it does not
hold up, then the knowledge cannot be believed. This reversed empathy will
only lead to the analyst’s mistake Freud mentioned: they may decide that the
knowledge of psychology is only relevant to others who need it.
Where Winnicott departs from Freud is with a new question: will the
knowledge survive the ruthlessness of object relating? If it does, these students
may consider psychology as something to take in even if it is already there.
This is just the beginning, for in taking in knowledge, our procedures of
incorporation create whole new worlds in competition with the one already
there. So his lecture concludes with a style of teaching and learning contained
in the uncertain idea that even if we can take in the fact that our lives are fi rst
and foremost psychological lives lived with others and that our procedures
made for trying to know will use new knowledge to repeat an archaic vulner-
ability of helplessness and defenses against it, we are left with the next affected
question: what can one do with this new conviction that one’s own psychol-
ogy matters to how psychology can matter at all?
Both of these lectures by Winnicott and Freud attempted to warn us that
psychology is our nervous condition. We will feel intruded upon by our own
self-consciousness and cannot prevent our play of interiority from register-
ing a protest against this gray matter. Yet the knowledge itself may make our
70 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

nerves stand on end. Meltzer’s (1992) discussion on claustrophobia gives us

a clue as to why this may be the case: “psychoanalysis has moved relentlessly
from a simplistic explanatory hypothesis and an optimistic aim to cure mental
illness, towards a state of bewildered description of mental phenomena” (3).
Our descriptions of mental life bewilder because mental life itself is bewilder-
ing. But this then means that knowledge will always be partial, contradictory,
equivocal, and a transfer point.
Adorno (2006), as well, gave some lectures on psychology with a focus
on the bewildered mind, what he saw as a mind under a spell of a social haze.
Around that same time, Adorno (2007) recorded a dream about a lecture. In
the dream a psychotherapist was giving a lecture on the music of Schubert,
but from his field’s psychological perspective. Adorno was in the audience.
Suddenly, the lecture hall turned into a pub. A pianist was banging on the
piano. Off-key, the psychotherapist began to sing a line from the Schubert
lieder, titled “Impatience”: “I would like to carve it on every tree-trunk”
(69). In the dream Adorno became livid. He recorded what happened next: “I
harangued [the audience] . . . with the argument that this performance was so
barbaric that it turned anyone who tolerated it into a barbarian as well. . . . We
all joined forces to beat the psychotherapist to death” (69). I imagine Adorno
woke up in a mess; one could safely surmise that he didn’t like therapists or,
at the very least, didn’t want to be mistaken for one even as he found him-
self giving lectures on psychology and working as an accidental psychologist
(Hullot-Kentor 2006).
Without his associations, the dream cannot be interpreted. But enough
is known about Adorno to point out that he loved his Schubert and saw in
music the capacity to represent what cannot be met with reason but nonethe-
less urged its possibilities to feel what life can become. Yet the dream seems
to doubt this radical hope. Moreover, the affects of the dream—outrage,
impatience, haranguing, banging, carving, beating—lead to my speculation
on his anger at lecturing on psychology: his feeling that he was in the wrong
field that ruins the sublime or wishes to do so; his question as to whether he
or his students would be as thick as wood and be barred from meaning; his
impatience in the lecture; and, perhaps, his worry that somehow a therapist
sitting in his lecture will judge him as a barbarian, just as he judged the
therapist. Adorno, after all, had his quest in the intolerable and the trau-
matic. And so it can turn out that giving a lecture on psychology makes the
lecturer dream.
My identification with this dream as well is emblematic of my anxious
lectures on psychology: that I, too, will be seen by others as eschewing the
 PSYCHOLOGY 71

material world, that I speak off-key the psychological register, that I’m taking
cover in my own self-absorption, and that my speculations in psychology ruin
the sublime of critical theory. I, too, worry that my lectures will be an episode
of runaway meaning: a harangue instead of a hope. After all, when we plead
for psychology, we are really pleading for ourselves and that certainly makes
us nervous.
Adorno’s (2006) lecture on psychology can be read as an elaboration of
the affective side of learning psychology with his attempt to convey what is
bewildering about having to live in a world others have already made. Like
Freud and Winnicott, he begins with the ego defenses, also knowing that his
students may ignore what he has to say when he reminds them of our charac-
ter masks, itself a concept that has gone out of date or has been supplanted by
identity claims. “By character masks I mean that while we imagine that we
act as ourselves, in reality we act to a great extent on the agents of our own
functions” (69). When we believe we are the authors of our origins and inten-
tions, our egos mistake reason for being. Adorno then argues that, for any
action to be possible at all, there must be something besides consciousness that
urges it to act. He calls this impulse “the additional factor” (218) and later in
the lecture links this impulse to act to “ the corporal element, the very thing
that cannot be fully identified with reason” (238).
Adorno was worried about something that is not reason, but cannot be
separated from it. His lecture on psychology is really about the limits of imag-
ination and its confusion of compliance to culture with its own self-preser-
vation that is then fused to the desire to dominate nature, in turn becoming
our second nature. And he attempts to warn these students about what they
cannot help doing: mistaking their ego defenses with their character, missing
how it is that the desire to dominate one’s own nature turns against the self.
Only here does he call upon psychoanalysis, with Anna Freud’s (1995) dis-
cussion of the ego’s defense of identification with the aggressor. The problem
with identification with the aggressor, he says, is not so much that evil others
are identified with and thus incorporated into ego, itself a terrible confusion
of good and bad. Rather, for Adorno, the devastating identification is with
“the course of the world just as it happens to be” (76). Through identifying
with institutions, education, the law, the culture industry, or even the idea
of progress, he says, we are not just subject to ideology but actually become
ideology. This is what Adorno meant when he lamented the ways we become
functions of our functions. No doubt, Adorno argues, humans are symbol-
dependent creatures; we must think ourselves into being the authors of our
consciousness and our freedom. The danger is that we forget not only our
72 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

dependency on symbols but on others as well. And he suggests that if we mis-

take the work of interpretation with the force of this immediate world, we
may believe we accompany our representations, but, in actuality, cannot feel
or think them as such.
One way to understand the collapse Adorno leaves us with is to turn
to the problem of symbolization by considering “the additional factor,” the
bodily impulse that sets the mind to work, as anxiety. Klein (1930) proposed
this bodily force as emerging from an instinct for knowledge, fi rst dedicated
to knowing and possessing the mother’s insides and, later, this curiosity for
what cannot be seen is transferred to the work of symbols. Its earliest form
of knowledge, however, will be anxious and paranoid and will collapse from
the pressure of its own concreteness, resulting in “symbolic equation” (220),
where anxiety over loss is equated with an outside object. This is akin to
what Adorno saw as mistaking the immediacy of the order of things for
reality’s test, a procedure that bewilders the problem of how the loss of the
object’s autonomy is also our loss of the object’s representational, metaphori-
cal, and even enigmatic qualities. In symbolic equation, nothing can change
because phantasy and reality merge through the archaic defense of projective
identifications.
The psychological paradox is that symbolization emerges from our earli-
est efforts to know and thus both contains and conveys anxiety. André Green
(2000), for example, argues that the work of symbolization requires a double
action: a unity is attempted between two things that were split off and the
new representation contains rather than disavows its earlier history of disunity
and confl ict. This view is close to how Adorno (2006) thinks of the function
of art: as “ a particular relation to the experience of structures that purport to
be meaningful and that provide a model both of meaning that can be explored
and of the crisis of meaning” (125).
These views on the symbolization take us to the heart of what is difficult
about our psychology: we must symbolize affect and yet, according to Green’s
(1999) study on the status of affect, psychoanalysis puts forward the idea of a
constitutive force-relation between affect and thought:
If the affect is the witness of wild, ineliminable thought, present at the very
heart of the most abstract, the most rational processes, the fi nal refuge of the
affect is rationalization. The fact that nothing, neither in its content nor in
its form, allows us to distinguish it from reason, shows that the only attitude
that it ought to inspire would be to let the discourse continue, until such
time as its own movement, the one that forges it, undergoes the test of its
challenge. (231)
 PSYCHOLOGY 73

In this sense, symbolization is our reality test for our desire for discourse
to be affected. Affect’s reason marks, propels, and leaves its remainder in
every thought.
What is noteworthy in these lectures and in Adorno’s strange dream is
that symbolization contains the problem of negativity or destruction and so
highlights the disunity, or the negative dialect carried on by our psychology
and that migrates into meaning as such. And these affective processes already
carried into meaning by the other begin our psychology and our attempts
to think it. But this then means, to draw upon a Kleinian frame, that the
work of integration is not a problem of continuity thought to guarantee the
future but, rather, signifies the act of tolerating the disunity, nonsemblance,
and the enigma of our subjectivity. Klein considers this work as ongoing
and configured through depressive anxiety, an awareness of both the play
of aggression and goodness in the process of trying to learn. If symboliza-
tion leans on what Klein (1935, 1940) came to understand as the depressive
position—a toleration of absence and transience—then learning itself is also
characterized by the work of mourning painful losses, including mourning
the history of our disunity, what inhibits, fragments, or destroys the mind,
and times when goodness seemed destroyed. These emotional processes
are also the hallmark of a constitutive loneliness representation brings and
that our symbolization inherits for commentary. This is also what Adorno
understands as the function of art. A turn to the Zeitroman, or novels of disil-
lusionment, critical of their age, will allow us to press this gray matter into
the shape of the depressive position.

ZEITROMAN

Hans Castorp, our protagonist in The Magic Mountain, was twenty-three years
old when he traveled from Hamburg to the International Sanatorium Berghof
to visit his ill cousin. He planned to stay for three weeks and then return from
his visit exactly as he had left. Except that on the day of his departure he came
down with a cold, a fever, a pounding heart, and “a moist spot.” The director,
Behrens, advised him to stay on for an indeterminate amount of time and live
like his ill cousin: take rest cures, walk, eat many meals each day, talk with the
other patients, and attend lectures on unsanctioned love by the psychoanalyst
Krokowski. Hans comes under the sway of many teachers, one of whom was
the autodidact Settembrini involved in writing an endless encyclopedia on the
topic of suffering and its cures that had the ambiguous title Sociological Pathol-
ogy. Days blend into one another, the late nineteenth-century crept to its early
74 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

twentieth, and time lost its efficiency. In no time at all, seven years will have
passed. And our Hans will have been changed. On this Magic Mountain, Hans
Castorp learns how to be ill by falling in love with an unattainable woman,
Frau Clavdia Chauchat. This would be a world where something that got
on his nerves, such as a woman’s arm slamming the dining room door each
time she entered, would become the cause of his love. Just as the slamming of
the door carried meanings it never intended, so, too, did his pounding heart.
Among other things, our Zeitroman symbolizes the inevitability of meaning’s
slips: that a pounding heart can mean a problem of the heart, fear, overexer-
tion, desire, and sexual excitement and that the heart registers what the ear can
hear and the eyes can see.
The omnipotent narrator of The Magic Mountain, the one critical of his
age, warns us readers not to read for the novel’s plot, partly because nothing
much happens at the manifest level of this novel of ideas and because antici-
pating how they would come to matter before their time would be useless.
There are other reasons to turn the page. But readers also learn to experience
the pleasure of reading along with Hans who must fi rst surrender to the Magic
Mountain in order to feel what he thinks. It is not easy for Hans or us readers;
only gradually do we learn to become a patient. As for Hans, he must fi rst
get his X-ray so that he can see for himself his “moist spot.” The title of this
chapter is “My God, I See It!” When Hans is made witness to the inside of his
own hand, he feels something other than its gray matter: he realized that he
would die. Seeing his insides leads to the thought of their loss. The director
noticed his distress and said, “Spooky, isn’t it? Yes, there’s no mistaking that
whiff of spookiness” (260).
Thoughts on the inevitability of his own death led him to do some
research, without really knowing where his drive to know would lead him
next. In the chapter titled “Research,” Hans pores over scientific texts and
in the attempt to make sense of his own insides bumped into the idea that
these scientific and philosophical representations of the mind obscure their
own procedures of representation. The novel’s narrator, like a Greek chorus,
registered Hans’s anxiety with their repeated refrain: “What was life? No one
knew” (326). As Hans continued to read and question life’s ultimate meaning,
he became aware of warmth spreading throughout his own body. Then, both
his sensuality and his thoughts strayed into a dream.
Our narrator intrudes on Hans’s reverie: “And yet for all that the accom-
plishments of protoplasm remained quite inexplicable—it seemed that life
was prohibited from understanding itself ” (334). Perhaps this prohibition
lead Hans to transgress it by multiplying his surface: “at the very moment
 PSYCHOLOGY 75

when one thought one had reached the outermost edge, everything began all
over again . . . inner world after inner world within his own nature he was
present over and over again—a hundred young Hans Castorps” (338). Hans
exhausted himself with what Adorno spoke of as “the additional factor,” that
bodily impulse, that cannot comprehend itself yet creates a dream. In that
unworldly world of dreams, research is symbolically equated with our fi rst
sexual research and our wishes for that knowledge of origin. Hans dreams
that the arms of Frau Clavdia Chauchat, the very ones that kept slamming the
dining room door, now wrap around him. Without reason, through the trial
of acknowledging his own mortality, Hans fi nds love, itself a radical hope.
Things did not go as well for Gerald Weber, our fifty-five-year-old pro-
tagonist in Powers’s novel The Echo Maker. He used to think of himself as a
successful neurophysiologist and self-proclaimed specialist in presenting to
the lay audience the field’s case studies. With lectures, Weber proffered this
knowledge as both cautionary tales of what can go wrong with the brain and
as laudatory reports from the field on the progress of his science. In our age
of research ethics, however, the public turns against Weber. He’s accused of
exploiting other people’s narratives and violating their privacy. His colleagues
have also turned against him. They consider his narrative approach as too soft,
too subjective, fi lled with errors of desire. Weber feels himself as imposter,
“the pseudoempirical equivalent of reality television, profiting from fad and
pain” (222). Suddenly, Weber becomes stupid in academic conferences. When
interviewed on television he feels speechless or worries that he sounds crazy.
Is he promoting his own madness? Then, he worries these interviews will
endlessly replay on the World Wide Web for all to see. He fi nds himself obses-
sively checking the Web, fi nding what he abhors, but not being able to stop
looking for copies of himself and then chasing after his runaway identity.
Much of the novel concerns Weber’s involvement with a special case of
a young man with a brain injury and his sister Karin who left her own life to
care for her brother. It was Karin who contacted Weber for help just at the
point when he needed a new project. Mark Schluter cannot recognize his sis-
ter as his sister. Instead, he becomes more and more certain that she is a copy
of his sister pretending to be his sister for some sinister purpose. Capgras syn-
drome is the name given to individuals who are certain that the most impor-
tant and loved people in their lives are impostures or doubles pretending to
be an original. Here the problem of giving birth to oneself reaches the height
of its agony. Weber’s increasing helplessness, indeed his susceptibility to the
Capgras syndrome and to his own narrative impulse, forms the heart of the
novel; what breaks the heart or stops it short revolves around how knowledge
76 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

becomes, for all involved, both a reminder of absence and a transference car-
nival. The irony is that throughout his adult life Gerald Weber has dedicated
himself to explaining the minds of others without giving much thought to
his own.
Late in the novel, Weber returns to the classroom for a lecture on the
disorders of the mind, but his own thoughts intrude and criticize his efforts.
The students, tattooed and pierced, now appear to him as foreign and hostile.
He feels out of context. Just as his colleagues did, these students seemed to be
waiting for him to make a mistake. In this transference, Weber can no longer
tell the difference between what he sees and what he feels. And this transfer-
ence intrudes, affecting perception and ruining his knowledge. He cannot tell
the difference anymore between science and story. Our omnipotent narrator
gives us this sense: “He cast a last look at his notes: organized ignorance, next
to the brain, all human knowledge was like a lemon drop next to the sun”
(359). Yet it is Weber who is melting. In an effort to save himself, he decides
the only way to capture his students’ attention would be to present the side-
show of neuroscience, defending his efforts with the field’s unpronounceable
words. And even as he spoke of its famous cases, he felt ill, believing he saw
his wife enter the lecture hall, but now as she was at age twenty-five. His jokes
fell flat; the students were too young to have any associations. All he could do
was describe how neurons became lost. Then he ran out of time. And just as
Castorp had to confront the idea that no one knew, so, too, did Weber: “Long
after his science delivered a comprehensive theory of self, no one would be a
single step closer to knowing what it meant to be another. Neurology would
never grasp from without a thing that existed only deep in the impenetrable
inside” (365).
The students never knew what disaster occurred in Weber as he lectured
them because they were having their own. Weber was beside himself; he was
taken over by the young woman sitting in the lecture hall’s back row whom he
thought was his wife and whom he suddenly needed to have just as she walked
away. In the midst of this mess, one of the hostile students then appeared to
ask Weber about the case of David. “ ‘Your account of that, that meningioma.
David?’ His voice apologized. Weber nodded him on. ‘I’m wondering . . . I
think that maybe my father. . . .’ ” (366). Weber had already stopped listening
because he could not stop could looking for his wife, as she was when they
fi rst fell in love. He should leave teaching, he thought; maybe even write a
neuroscience novel. And when Weber fi nally returned home that night and
was asked by his wife how the lecture went, he replied that he was sure that he
was brilliant, a way for him not to tell her how lost he had become.
 PSYCHOLOGY 77

Our protagonists have stumbled into the inadvertency of knowledge:

it cannot provide its own reasons, protect itself from its equivocations and
from our questions, and anticipate that which undoes it even as it undoes
something else. But that then leaves us with our use of knowledge, however
equivocal, as leaning on and conveyed through what Adorno called “the
additional factor,” a feeling that sets knowledge on edge with something that
is not knowledge at all. This encounter, which feels more like a confronta-
tion, is what Aulagnier (2001) proposed as “man’s factum . . . the effect of
anticipation” (10). We are always being confronted with the anxiety of not
knowing and needing to know.
The critique of reason, too, has its remainder, for if reason is to reflect
upon itself, if reason could see in itself the kernel of its madness, it may end
in expectations of hopelessness. Against all odds, Adorno, with his additional
factor—the idea that we can grow so sick of the order of things that we
decide to say no to its demands and go a different way without really knowing
what will happen next—suggests critical theory’s depressive position. Hullot-
Kentor’s (2006) discussion of Adorno’s work illustrates its paradox when he
quotes his translation of a transcribed conversation between Adorno and his
friend and coauthor, Horkheimer. Their insistence on a negative critique led
Horkheimer to ask Adorno: “Can one really do anything with these sorts of
ideas? My difficulty is that I always get exactly as far as we have gotten today,
that is, as far as objective despair.” Adorno replied, “What gives knowledge
the stamp of authenticity is the reflection of possibility” (30). This did not
seem to satisfy Horkheimer so he tried again with what he felt he lost in
objective despair:

HOR K H EIM ER : I have not given up the claim to happiness, but I do not
believe in happiness. Whoever really believes in happiness is in the
worst sense naïve.
A DOR NO : We must be at once more naïve and much less naïve. (30)

One could argue that there is no such thing as objective despair because the
experience of despair leads to something that is both objective and subjective:
loss, absence, and, perhaps, resignation. And, even in despair, one cannot stop
wanting something more.

RADICAL HOPE

That psychology makes us nervous—by which I mean psychology as that

affective index associating and writing the evocative meanings of life joined
78 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

by our anticipations, phantasies, and expectations for the other—characterizes

the vulnerability of learning. Even if symbolization can never complete our
desire, our libidinal world founders without its work. Klein (1940) proposed
this work as the depressive position, where the inevitable losses that compose
and decompose life constitute not only the sadness of its learning that revives
our constitutive loneliness but, more centrally, she saw the potential for love,
gratitude, reparation, and symbolization as emerging from human loss. Ani-
mated by the other’s absence, the depressive position urges the symbolization
of this gray matter of knowledge, now as residue, association, and remainder.
It is a style of conveying self-knowledge as much as it is an experience with
learning knowledge beyond the self.
Lear’s (2006) discussion of radical hope may be read as urging a new
consideration of the depressive position when he describes one of the pro-
found limits of consciousness: it cannot prepare for its own destruction and
for the destruction of its telos. In some sense, Lear’s view of radical hope goes
beyond the depressive position, for its potential can only be felt from the ruins
of identity, reason, and cultural life, when every working assumption of how
the world should be is no longer meaningful, available, or relevant. Yet the
paradox is that culture designs our continuity. Its pedagogical efforts organize
continuity between generations secured through cathexis of rituals and cat-
egories of cognition, mimesis, and recognition, through modes of childrear-
ing, and through outlets for sexuality and aggression. Through its conceptual
categories of intelligibility, beauty, and truth and with its group psychology
and its defi nitions of madness and sanity, culture’s propositions of what counts
as success and failure depend on the presumption of continuity. Ontological
vulnerability, however, disrupts its plans, as does the problem of language
itself. Things can always mean something other than what is pronounced and
we are subject to our overhearing. Yet the defenses needed to split off vulner-
ability from its own nature cannot maintain themselves for the simple reason
that culture is also the repository for our love, our reality, and our Weltan-
schauung, all humanly created things that break (Bass 1998). Even if the mind
is a plastic mind, its creations—desire, meaning, goodness, and love—are all
subject to loss. Because efforts in continuity cannot anticipate or imagine its
own disunity, culture, as with consciousness, contains within its own design
its breaking point. Its nature is to resist its own plasticity, its own excess.
Anthropologists have taught us that, for cultures to persist, they must be
capable of extreme, radical change at the level of their most intimate symbol-
ization. Humans must, if they are to live, meet this same demand. But this
demand for symbolizing that which does not exist can be felt as persecution
 PSYCHOLOGY 79

and then be symbolically equated with loss of unity, purpose, and reason.
The paradox is that culture and consciousness, and the educational structures
that render them intelligible, given their intention of mastering nature, lose
their pliability in order to be plausible. Lear tells us that, for radical change to
occur, culture and consciousness must give up and leave behind all that was
once relevant to living a life. I believe this surrender characterizes the depres-
sive position and the psychological qualities of teaching and learning.
Without guarantee, Lear proposes a new ethic in the form of “a commit-
ment to the idea that the goodness of the world transcends one’s limited and
vulnerable attempts to understand it . . . no claim to grasp ineffable truths”
(95). Lear suggests that the resource for radical hope—the hope that some-
thing good, even as one cannot know in advance what form goodness will
take—flowers within what is enigmatic to both consciousness and culture,
what it does not yet know. Dreams, as a creative play on affected reality, are
one enigmatic resource because they invite interpretation and imagination.
Literary knowledge, a knowledge that cannot be in charge of itself and that
can set meaning loose without knowing its destination, is another.
When Lear writes of radical hope, he ties it to the fact that we are “finite
erotic creatures” (119), another way of proposing our depressive position.
This was a fact that Hans Castorp confronted, that the neurophysiologist
eventually came to ponder, and that our lecturers Freud, Winnicott, and
Adorno attempted to convey. We may imagine our omnipotence, but can-
not be omnipotent. We may project ourselves into the world and mistake our
identifications for perceptions, yet this can only be the beginning. We crea-
tures are slow learners, subject to risks, mistakes, errors, misjudgments, and
unhappiness, dependent as we are on the mismatch of self and other. Even as
we project ourselves into the world to identify with it and even with our addi-
tional factor of anxiety, all of which lends meaning and enigma to our erotic
character, the world is more than our fi nite projections. But the problem of
telos is also a problem of our psychology. In Lear’s view: “It is because of our
fi nite, erotic natures that we come to conceive of ourselves as fi nite erotic
creatures” (123). I add to that our additional factor perhaps best described as
the drive. It takes a psychology to make a psychology, and because of this gray
matter, we can come to symbolize ourselves as fi nite, erotic beings with all
the naivete, disunity, hope, and desire it brings. For these reasons, learning
and teaching psychology take us beyond psychology.
This page intentionally left blank.
 CHAPTER FIVE

Countertransference

Unless we take into account our nurseries and our family homes,
our behaviour to our schoolmasters would be not only incompre-
hensible but inexcusable.
—Sigmund Freud, “Some Reflections on a Schoolboy Psychology”

Most teachers agree that the act of teaching conveys more than the material
taught. We run into trouble, however, if that something is attributed to “the
unconscious.” More often than not, we do not want to know anything about
it. So the idea that teaching transfers the teacher’s emotional world (including
what is unconscious about it) as much as it does the material may be hard to
take sitting down, for it means that, in teaching, each and every aspect of the
self, including its most unwanted and unknown parts, is called upon. The idea
that the teacher communicates something she knows nothing about invites
our passion for ignorance. When Freud (1914b) wrote of his schoolboy years,
he admitted that he did not know which affected him more: what the teacher
taught or whom the teacher was like. He was fairly sure that teachers ignored
the students’ emotional use of them, although on reading Freud’s passionate
description, it seems odd to be so blind to this family romance:
We courted them or turned our backs on them, we imagined sympathies
and antipathies in them which probably had no existence, we studied their
characters and on theirs we formed or misformed our own. They called up

81
82 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

our fiercest opposition and forced us to complete submission; we peered

into their little weaknesses, and took pride in their excellences, their knowl-
edge and their justice. At bottom we felt a great affection for them if they
gave us any ground for it, though I cannot tell how many of them were
aware of this. (242)

The unconscious steps in precisely when we are not aware of it. We can
say with conviction that education emerges from the transference-love made
between the teacher and students. It takes its force from the emotional world
and that teachers’ responses to how they are (unconsciously) addressed is the
basis for the teachers’ quandaries, or the countertransference: feelings, phan-
tasies, anxieties, defenses, and wishes made from what teaching feels like. But
why is it that what is most subjective in our work—the stuff that lends cre-
dence and incredulity to our conceptions of teaching and learning—is hardly
considered as the flora and fauna of our teaching practices? Can this subjective
world be used as an enigmatic resource for understanding the boundaries,
limits, and desires of subjects at work?
The problem made by denying the force and influence of the teacher’s
emotional world is that if we cannot link how we feel to the way our work
conveys and transforms our feelings and ideas, both the work and the self are
diminished. If only seen as a technical skill, the language of teaching suffers
from what Gregorio Kohon (2007) calls “symbolic impoverishment” (212).
It becomes impossible to wonder how the work of the unconscious, itself an
index of our affective history of learning desire, leads us to what we look for
and hope to refi nd in the world of others. But it is as if this index is always
being written in invisible ink, referencing what is illegible in experience. We
must read between the lines for the advent and vicissitudes of our emotional
world; but, to do that, we need a language and an educational setting unafraid
to write a story different from the one anticipated.
My assumption is that the teacher’s object relations—a way to character-
ize the affective workings of our inner world—are her earliest emissaries of
learning and give play to practices of teaching. Object relations personify
features of affect, turning them into feelings given perspectives from the van-
tage of their phantasies, anxieties, and their archaic psychological history.
They convey what is enigmatic about one’s feelings toward others, instruct
and disrupt hopes for recognition, and rationalize disappointments. It is not
that object relations are little people in our head, although sometimes we
may depict our feelings as inner voices, as intuition, and as cautionary warn-
ing devices. Object relations always refer to events with someone. They are
formed from taking in features of others from the vantage of how others relate
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 83

and form relations with us and with their others. Object relations contain
what is good and bad; we express these judgments through styles of loving
and hating, through what we take in and expel, within what we assume as
the incline and decline of knowledge, and then they service urges for destruc-
tion and reparation. They can be thought of as the procedures, functions,
mechanisms, and theories of feelings. And they break through the barrier of
conscious intention to convey what is enigmatic and unresolved about feel-
ings of dependency, love, recognition, authority, and care.
The version of the human behind this theory is that, from our beginning,
we are not merely dependent on others for our needs, but are object seeking
and object making. In this view, the teacher’s feelings represent a history of
her learning object relations and gain semblance and disunity in the presence
of teaching and learning. That teachers have grown up in school only to
return as adults means that their relations to authority, knowledge, to school
objects, and to the differences between the teacher and the student are never
neutral but rather are in confl ict with their own infantile phantasies of educa-
tion, now in the form of implicit theories of learning and teaching and their
idealization of the profession (Britzman 2003b). Yet this subjective aspect of
the teacher’s world also conveys what is most problematic about boundaries;
it is one of our most difficult and avoided topics and perhaps the most delicate
to interpret because feelings turn need into demand and then to desire. Feel-
ings signify our relations to others: how we wish to encounter them, what it
feels like to miss them, what we want from others without having to ask, and
so on. Feelings get hurt, disguise themselves, are projected into others, return
as identifications, and then set out again through projections. They muddle
boundaries of time and space and of self and other. Feelings, as statements of
need, are difficult to acknowledge and read.
So if we are object seeking, what can this mean for how we organize
education and how we recognize what counts as pedagogical? If representa-
tion is a basic feature of psychic life, what is it like to symbolize our most inti-
mate wishes? There does not seem to be an official engagement with affect’s
advent, no psychological language that structures the work of learning a pro-
fession and that is readily called upon to interpret the emotional meanings
of the teacher’s world and her sense of happening education. We have yet to
construct a language for teachers’ learning the work of education that invites
curiosity toward interpreting their inner world and how it links to conceptu-
alizations, symbolization, and interpretations of education. Over the course
of this chapter, I suggest one word that may be of use in understanding what
teaching feels like when the teacher is confronted with her or his boundaries,
84 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

limits, and desire: the countertransference. As readers will see, the word car-
ries its own difficulties because its meanings cannot be settled, because of the
contentious history it holds in the education of psychoanalysis, and because
getting to know one’s feelings may also mean encountering emotional pain,
hostility, and aggression. And these affects do break open the boundaries of
the teacher’s imaginary.
To be fair, it is not only the field of education that forecloses inquiry into
the use of our emotional world; few institutions welcome our unanswerable
questions and our need to symbolize our excitement and doubts in repre-
sentation (Newcombe 2007). Few institutions have the means to address the
emotional life they both call upon and may agonize with its rules, routines,
and implicit cultural life. Yet education, whether for adults or children,
plays a role unlike any other institution and so lends to teachers a particular
responsibility for a world students have not made yet nonetheless inherit,
represent, and affect. In the space of education, the promise of knowledge
and language are given their promise by teachers’ relations to their work and
their difference from their students. That we have language at all, however,
means a lifelong struggle to symbolize affect into feelings and to make from
that admixture self-knowledge and relations to the world. Putting urges to
words, feeling heard by the other, questioning one’s motives, and being curi-
ous about what is on one’s mind, is, after all, a sign of hope that language
is more than a technical exercise of literal description that protects us from
what is latent in our words, even if our meanings are congealed again by
that which is there before us: the procedures of language and its means of
repression. But language also returns us to a primary loss and, in straining to
overhear, one experiences overmeaning, only to encounter what Aulagnier
(2001) calls “the violence of interpretation.” No one can read our minds, nor
can we read the minds of others. As speaking subjects, we may be reminded
of this loss as it bounces between the image and the word, the desire and
having to say it to someone.
I believe to understand the depth and potent creativity of the emotional
world requires a particular language dedicated to that world’s symbolization,
a language that can contain “the violence of interpretation” by attending to
its own affective play, including aggression and scenes of love and hate. Some
of its qualities would be to invoke the means to analyze its constructions,
break open the claustrophobic space between the word and the thing, and,
of course, be represented by speakers unafraid of their own negativity and
the words used to name it. In short, I am suggesting an erotic language that
attracts the speaker’s interest and involvement in the play of interpretation
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 85

and its rough edges, a language that can question its own work. Compare
this view with the obfuscation, so ingrained that it almost goes without say-
ing, of what is demanded of teachers: teachers love students and are altruistic,
unstamped by narcissism. That such an insistence is developmentally impos-
sible is almost beside the point. That it can be encountered as chastisement
for the feelings one does hold may be this discourse’s secret desire. This use
of language does not so much keep us in line as it functions to draw the line
between good and bad teachers.
We may attribute some of our affective chaos to the nature of what is
human in the human professions. After all, education as an impossible profes-
sion relies on and bothers the subjectivity of its practitioners as much as it tries
to wrest it away through knowledge of its procedures and functions and, para-
doxically, with the education of educators. Are there other ways to account
for the upset made when we try to make sense of what we feel should count
as good and bad practice and its conceptions of being right and wrong? How
are we to understand what one feels while thinking on one’s feet? And, along
with the immediacy of the felt encounter, how might we make sense of our
afterthoughts, the ones that cast their doubts on the question of what counts
as education and malediction? Rarely are these judgments of good and bad
education considered as links to affect, to how one feels while one teaches,
to why certain feelings render one’s actions as hazy or crazy or to what it can
mean to grow numb and depressed in our work. Even the sources of feelings
themselves are hardly linked to the teacher’s object relations and how her
history of wishes, phantasies, anxieties, and defenses returns in the presence
of teaching. The missing link is that the teacher’s feelings are a theory of
learning, but that this theory of learning is, more often than not, a residue of
infantile education.
The field of education has plenty of terms to steer the teacher’s actions
away from her or his emotional life by reducing teaching to the mastery of the
student’s learning. We speak readily in the shorthand of behavioral goals and
objectives, and of the teacher aims, purpose, and strategies for delivering les-
sons. We think of where students should be because of our efforts.1 We can say
that the language used to discuss the teacher’s work, grounded in behavioral
psychology, is an externalizing one, that it reduces teaching and learning to a
problem of the student’s reception to the teacher’s efforts, and that it flattens
our frustration to the condition of being endlessly irritated at the student who
writes bad sentences, misspells words, and can’t read anyway. The dry lan-
guage of technical expertise, usually conflated with the teacher’s experience,
however, is not easily thought of as a defense against being affected by and with
86 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

our work. We do not readily speak of the teacher’s narcissistic injuries, or the
use of archaic defenses of projective identification, omnipotence, and splitting.
We do not often associate our demand for certainty in our work to the Kan-
tian notion of empty thoughts,2 or through the traumatic events Bion (1993b)
called “an attack on linking” (93), the ways a thinker destroys her mind by
severing thoughts from their affective ties and being frightened by new ideas.
The teacher’s emotional life, as learning from experience, remains with-
out words, without a language that invites curiosity toward her own learning
and to what else happens when one works with others. And we hardly ask
one another, what kind of teacher do you want to be? I believe these silences
are devastating to the teacher’s creativity and to the promise of education.
To understand the gambles of our emotional world, I turn to the language of
psychoanalysis, one of the few practices and theories in the human professions
that begins with and is affected by the relation between our object world 3 and
our sense of relationships with self, others, and knowledge. This psychoana-
lytic effort will bring together two different experiences of education: the
analyst’s education and the teacher’s education. Comparing their education
will take us into the heart of the problem of countertransference.
Throughout this chapter, I will be claiming that the teacher’s world is
fi rst and foremost an affected world and representing its eventfulness lends
new grounds for the teacher’s learning. I consider that the teacher’s psychical
confl icts—affects conveyed through phantasy, anxieties, and defenses against
them—provided that they can be symbolized, are an enigmatic resource for
insight into the nature of teaching and learning and its play of object rela-
tions. I will also suggest that much of what occurs to the teacher emerges
from the negation made within what Lacan (1998a) called “the passion for
ignorance” (121), used to describe the teacher’s imaginary history of educa-
tion that includes not only instituted education but the family romance and
infantile theories made in childhood. These archaic phantasies are called upon
and unhinged from their fi rst history and become one of the underpinnings
of the teacher’s countertransference. They return when, say, a new student
feels terribly familiar, when the teacher feels the echoes of narcissistic injury,
when the day goes badly, when the teacher just doesn’t feel right but cannot
anchor feelings with its reasoning, and when the teacher does not know but
feels that she should. In all these affective events, the teacher’s unconscious is
animated without its being symbolized. Projected into the screen of educa-
tion are the teacher’s confl icts and identifications. The tension is that if these
affects are deemed as only a disruption to the work, we forfeit the idea of how
their tenacity breaks the heart of the teacher’s learning.
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 87

In my view, what our field of education defends against when it disavows

the teacher’s affect is a problem best described as one of experiencing experi-
ence, by which I mean making sense of what is fi rst felt as nonsense: the unex-
pected ways we become affected by what happens to us because of what we
try to make happen. I am contrasting this view to the field’s dictum of acquir-
ing experience or being experienced, ideology that dismisses and even makes
unthinkable the idea that experience is always emotional experience and as such
always signifies frustration and resistance. A second aspect of the problem is that
the psychology that has most influenced the teacher’s education and the one
that organizes education’s structure is Skinnerian behaviorism with its emphasis
on problems of motivation, stimulus and response, and the language of mastery.
Behaviorism is an expedited theory of learning that presents with certainty
the work of teaching as consisting in reinforcing student learning through the
exchange of reward and punishment. It provides experience as necessity, not
as contingency. Here, it is important to recall that humans are object seeking;
our needs and wants are addresses to the other. We wish to be met. A third
aspect of the problem resides not in our field’s negations but within a constitu-
tive difficulty of symbolizing the work of affect in the teacher’s learning since
this would take us into problems of representing the meaning of emotional
pain made from the teacher’s love and hate, pleasure and unpleasure, masoch-
ism and sadism, paranoia and obsessionality, and, too, the teacher’s erotic life,
for instance. It would take us into words that may at first be blamed for their
meanings, as an indication of the “violence of interpretation.”
The psychoanalyst Ester Bick (1987), who worked with teachers in their
educational contexts, suggests that being with others is always an emotional
experience made from conflating perception with one’s own internal aggres-
sion and defenses against it:

The greatest bar to protecting oneself or people whom one loves from the
many external danger situations that arise, is the difficulty in disentangling
those from other dangers deriving from one’s own destructive impulses. The
destructiveness from within is the one danger from which we can never
escape—physically speaking it kills us all in the end—yet it is the danger which
we spend much of our energy in trying to escape, to deny, and to project out-
wards. Insofar as we do this, it clouds our perception of ourselves and of our
world. It causes us to be unduly fearful; to look for other people to blame; to
take up positions of inferiority from which we can feel above reproach. (312)

I draw attention to Bick’s discussion on anxiety to include the idea that a great
deal of the work of teaching turns on the problem of loss: of love, of meaning,
88 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

and of idealization. Fear of losing invokes the old feeling that something in
our objects is dangerous. Bick reminds us we cannot flee from our objects,
but we do evacuate them into others. In this cycle of situating blame, the idea
that the teacher may be rehearsing and evacuating a history of her or his losses
hardly comes to mind. What may be more difficult concerns the idea that the
teacher’s negativity may well be the basis of self-understanding.
The question of what emotions may mean for the teacher was raised over
fifty years ago. The classic study of the teacher’s emotional world is Arthur
Jersild’s (1955) When Teachers Face Themselves. Its title tells us the whole story
in miniature, for when teachers face themselves they experience what is enig-
matic and ineffable in their inner world, including the boundaries, temporal-
ity, and space of emotional life, and the difficult feelings that accompany any
human relation. Today, we can situate this study as the beginning of the move-
ment of humanistic education and its openness to student movements for civil
rights, the Vietnam antiwar movement, the women’s movement, the deschool-
ing movement, and their grand narratives of feminism, black liberation, gay
liberation, and children’s liberation. But also, for a time in North America,
these world crises of antiimperialism, liberation, education, and identity were
thought through with educational innovation joined with the therapeutic ideas
of people like Carl Rogers, Eric Fromm, Karen Horney, Martin Buber, Erik
Erikson, and Anna Freud (Britzman 1998). Their views are worth recalling.
Their therapeutics of education spanned the life cycle. They insisted that
confl icted emotional relationships, there from the beginning of life with oth-
ers, are the fi rst means for self-understanding and the capacity to think with
others. They linked interest in the uncertainties of being with others to the
fragile ground for learning. They all proposed a relation between observing
the world and self-understanding. They were concerned with conceptual-
izing the emotional pain constituted by the difficulties of listening and dia-
logue, of choosing freedom, of understanding the meanings of presence and
absence, and of the confl icts between the conscious and the unconscious.
They wondered how these developmental fault lines affect our sense of mor-
tality, morality, judgment, and ethics, and thought of these actions as emerg-
ing from and conveying emotional experience. Such concerns as these led
them to create a therapeutic of self/other relations joined to education.
Jersild’s study can now be read as anticipating these great educational
changes when he asked teachers to question the significance of their emo-
tional life. His method was a strange combination of Likert scale and phe-
nomenology. Teachers were invited to contrast what people say with what
they actually believed and thought, to identify the congealment of belief with
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 89

compliance and discuss how compliance leans on hostility. He identified areas

where teachers knew they parroted the fears and ideas of others even as they
believed in something else. He tried to get at the secret thinking of teachers.4
He placed emotional life in the discord of autonomy and dependency, which
in turn structured his chapters on anxiety, loneliness and the search for mean-
ing, and sex, hostility, and compassion. Jersild considered this vocabulary as
central to the teacher’s self-understanding. A great deal of this work included
giving language to the arbitrary undertows of education, where suddenly
the teacher feels taken over by the immediacy of experience, institutional
demands, and feelings insufficiency.
Yet the undertow is more than the force of school structure, although
this structure seems to pull us back to childhood confl icts with dependency
and authority. Its force is also a metaphor for our drives, bodily impulses seek-
ing objects, expressing aims, and exerting pressure. Jersild suggests there is
something in the work of teaching that may call forth the teacher’s hate, Eros,
and frustration, for example. His study is also noteworthy for another reason:
Jersild may have been the first educator to describe the unconscious world of
the teacher and her ego defenses against that world. And the teachers he spoke
with admitted that there was a great deal about their selves that they did not
understand but would like to know more about. While the teachers and Jersild
called this area of concern “self-understanding” (15), we can ask: what is the
nature of the knowledge involved and what resists the Socratic commitment to
“know thyself ”? Further, how is it possible to think about self-understanding
if the language of teaching obliterates the self who teaches when it demands
that teachers need to be ultraistic and just serve the students.
Bick (1996) noticed a similar wish in child psychoanalysts. She divides
internal stresses into “preformed anxieties” (169), or what the analyst brings
into the profession, and countertransference issues, or how the analyst is
affected by preformed anxieties and the child’s conveyance of suffering.
They are linked. She warns that while there are “real” problems the child
faces, meaning external factors that impinge on the child’s suffering, the ana-
lyst’s feelings are also real. The problem is how preformed anxiety is used to
rationalize away the feelings of the analyst as unimportant as compared to
the external disaster of the child. Yet the analyst’s feelings are an enigmatic
resource of her work and one way to know this is because of the confl icts the
work invites her to address:

The intensity of the child’s dependence, of his positive and negative trans-
ference, the primitive nature of his phantasies tend to arouse the analyst’s
90 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

own unconscious anxieties. The violent and concrete projections of the

child into the analyst may be difficult to contain. Also the child’s suffering
tends to evoke the analyst’s parental feelings, which have to be controlled so
that the proper analytic role can be maintained. All these problems tend to
obscure the analyst’s understanding and to increase in turn his anxiety and
guilt about his work. (171)

In Bick’s account, the feelings of the analyst are tied to both the child and
to the analyst’s own experience with the profession. And this intersubjectiv-
ity is confl icted, as all intersubjectivity must be. The analyst is subject to her
own anxiety and to the anxiety of the other. The other powerfully affects the
analyst’s identifications, phantasies, and defenses, as do the myths of the work
itself and countertransference is the term given over to this relation. As the analyst
was once a child, she brings to the work the many irresolvable confl icts being
a child leaves behind. These confl icts, however, are not so out of reach that
they cannot be called back in times of current distress. The analyst’s regression
is a risk of the work yet, without the capacity to regress, the analyst would be
hard-pressed to understand the child. It is an awareness of these unconscious
relations that may characterize the ways the psychoanalyst’s work comes into
being. I believe the educator steps into a similar mine field: anxieties and guilt
over the nature of their work, fears of regression, and feelings of helplessness
and parental identifications.

THE CANDIDATE ANALYST AND THE TEACHER

I am both a university professor and a candidate training in a psychoanalytic

institute. As a try to learn another impossible profession and as my psychoana-
lytic training unfolds, I am reminded of my time of learning to teach, when I
had to return to high school as a student teacher. It was chaotic and unnerv-
ing; the learning was painful, made from dreaded experiences of mistakes,
misunderstandings, and missteps and then having to learn to understand my
feelings as a way back into my teaching. At the time, it felt like too much to
ask since I was learning before I could understand and I did not understand
the swirl of my own emotional life, let alone the emotional world of others.
There was no way to prepare for the strange time of learning’s deferral and no
protection from the emotional pain of experience. I am also reminded of my
confl ictive hopes for educational change and the education I wish for. While I
want to believe that my psychoanalytic training is making me a better teacher
and that my background in teaching allows creativity in my psychoanalytic
work, more often than not I am confronted with the surprising question:
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 91

what kind of learner will I be? I could hardly prepare for feeling again like
a bad student, for the bitter fights with my classmates, for not really under-
standing the hatred I made, and for barely containing my elaborate fantasies
of revenge against whomever I believed was in my way. What I did not antici-
pate is how these familiar object relations configure my countertransference
to both education and to learning.
Here, too, the training requires my emotional presence, yet I have diffi-
culty in the seminars analyzing my feelings while trying to learn with others.
Is there something about the nature of education itself that returns to us our
deepest fears and wishes and to our earliest learning of love and hate? And if
the experience of education is other to the structure of education and if learn-
ing confl icts are the inevitable consequence of this mismatch, what would it
be for education to begin with or even notice its own contribution to what is
also a confl ict needed for learning to become something more than a repeti-
tion of one’s childhood of education? Can education renew its promise for the
promise of language and knowledge?
In returning to school as a student, I fi nd myself flummoxed by its arbi-
trary rules, by meeting teachers I do not like, by the dependency the educa-
tional structure seems to invite and disavow, by having to follow directions,
and by feeling subject to my childhood of education. It is difficult to separate
who is doing what to whom. I am struck by how helpless I feel in my learning
and how easily I regress to my adolescent defenses of idealization. My hope for
an educational oasis and perhaps what may be a wish for an oceanic education
without pain now seems like I’ve returned to narcissism and all of the defenses
this entails. I’ll return to these confl icts in my “tailpiece,”5 with the idea that
there is no smooth transition between education and learning, between intel-
lectual understanding and affective insight, and no smooth transition between
the fields of education and psychoanalysis. Indeed, these confl icts are the edu-
cation and symbolizing them is the work one learns with the help of a lan-
guage to understand what is loved and hated about learning.
My idea is that the training of analysts has a great deal in common with
the education of teachers because both fields invite the childhood of educa-
tion and the subjectivity of the practitioners. Both professions experience the
confl ict between theory and practice, encounter others as the objects of their
practice, are supervised by others in one’s work, write reports, attend confer-
ences, and, at least ideally, consider their education as ongoing. Both groups
study in educational institutes and so are subject to both their childhood theo-
ries of learning and to the institute’s implicit theories of learning a profession
that itself is subject to the dream of education. There are some significant
92 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

differences in the respective education: the largest is that the analyst under-
goes her own analysis, undergoes analytic treatment and is a patient. It is here,
rather than in the didactic seminars of psychoanalytic training, that one may
confront the truth of trying to learn and where one may interpret infantile
strategies of learning, one’s own unconscious theories. It may strike those of
us in education as odd to take this quality of training into our field; that is,
to require teachers to undergo a psychoanalysis to qualify as teachers. After
all, how would this be graded? Anna Freud (1974), for instance, made this
argument that teachers be analyzed and I believe it is useful to reconsider the
nature of this request—what it would ask of teachers in their own learning—
since self-analysis only comes after an analysis with others.
The other differences between these fields can be best approached through
how psychoanalysis thinks about the way its work unfolds as in relationship
with the analyst’s unconscious. Fernando Urribarri (2007) poses this as a prob-
lem of language and listening: “The acknowledgement that the unconscious
“speaks” in many dialects promotes an ideal of a ‘polyglot analyst’ ” (184). But
here, too, in learning a language that speaks more than it can say, and that can
say the opposite of what it means, psychoanalysis may fi nd its limit in how it
thinks about its own education. The differences between learning to teach
and learning to be an analyst founders on the paradox of education: while one
fi nds in psychoanalytic training an orientation to clinical practice and a rich
vocabulary for this scene to play, the emotional experience of learning this
work is felt as a private matter and is difficult to symbolize. It is almost as if the
power of psychoanalysis would break open the silences of its own education,
which leads me to think that psychoanalytic institutes might stretch Anna
Freud’s view to analyze their educational structures.
Within psychoanalytic work, there are four qualities of practice that could
be useful for imagining educational relations and the structure of education,
whether it is the education of teachers or of psychoanalysts. First, one fi nds in
psychoanalytic discussions attention to the analyst’s and the analysand’s emo-
tional contribution to the therapeutic work. That is, there is the idea that, in the
clinic of psychoanalytic practice, the analyst and the analysand create together,
through the slow work of construction, the psychoanalytic objects both will
use and destroy over the course of the treatment. Their respective positions
and different functions mean that understanding is always under construction
and repair. Second, the analyst’s feelings in this work are subject to further
analysis and are considered as a reservoir of information. The work itself is to
clarify, in terms that tolerate frustrated satisfaction, experiences when clarity
eludes the analyst. Only gradually does the analyst learn to work from within
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 93

this ignorance without leaning on a passion for ignorance or the stance of not
wanting to know anything about it. Third, there is an attention to the analyst’s
function, or the asymmetrical responsibilities of the analyst and the analysand.
As part of the analyst’s work, the analyst learns to analyze her practices as
consisting of and opening her motivations, defenses, fears, phantasies, and dis-
claimed experiences. These great unknowns are considered as both a needed
resource for understanding the work and what destroys it. And fourth, there is
the cultivation of an awareness of not knowing and an ethic of tolerating this
uncertainty as part of what the analyst learns over and over. But this means that
the place of both theory and practice repeats these odds.
If these psychoanalytic orientations can structure the educational encoun-
ter as well—that teachers and students create the objects of learning, that there
is a difference in their respective roles, that tolerating not knowing allows
the work of learning to proceed, and that the analysis of one’s experience is
the teacher’s significant learning—then education may be in contact with its
unconscious emotional scenery. It is after the event of teaching that the teach-
er’s work can symbolize the question of what becomes of education. While
there are many words to describe these affective relations, in what follows,
I confi ne my comments to the work of the countertransference, keeping in
mind that what links education and psychoanalysis is a theory of learning.

COUNTERTRANSFERENCE

The idea of countertransference is one way to conceptualize both how the

analyst is unconsciously influenced by feelings the work creates and the con-
sequences of these feelings for the analyst’s capacity to think about psycho-
analytic work and her or his analytic function. The term underlines the idea
that the analyst is susceptible, affected by the dynamics, confl icts, and func-
tions of psychoanalytic contact and that being affected can be thought of as
an enigmatic resource for the work. The tension is that self-understanding is
constructed by considering the other’s influence as an emotional experience
with ideas, associations, and theories of life. So countertransference is both
a technical frame and a danger. The term has a rich and confl ictive history
in psychoanalysis and while it is well beyond this chapter to index its many
meanings, including how this term may perform the history of psychoanaly-
sis itself, a few discussions may be useful to thinking about the teacher’s
emotional dilemmas. Its transformations in meaning and in use give us a clue
as to how combustible its theoretical problematic is for both the analyst and
the analysand.
94 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

In a rather polemic address early on in the psychoanalytic movement,

Freud (1910) argued that countertransference indicates the unresolved feel-
ings of the analyst that are given free play under the guise of treating the
patient. It was akin to the analyst’s acting out without an ulterior motive but
with an intuitive defense. When something feels right, there is the counter-
transference that Freud felt destroyed the analyst’s neutrality and free-floating
attention. Freud believed that the analyst’s susceptibility to the analysand’s
influence was a consequence of the analyst’s own unresolved complexes and so
the countertransference really belonged only to the psychical confl icts of the
analyst. Something happens to the one who gives help and who may feel help-
lessness when doing so. And while Freud knew the analyst must be affected
to do her or his work, must have a conviction about the power of uncon-
scious communication, when it comes to the transference-love, the analyst’s
counter transference needs to be analyzed, not enacted.
One large question is from where does the countertransference come?
Does the patient project her feelings into the analyst who then plays out a
particular role? Are the analyst’s feelings already there and so ready at hand?
Perhaps, given the asymmetric mutuality of the analytic session, counter-
transference is a new construction? Or, it really is difficult to say who is doing
what to whom when two unconscious subjects meet. In the early history of
psychoanalysis, however, Freud urged the analyst to the procedures of self-
analysis as a means to overcome the countertransference feelings. Here, the
countertransference was deemed an obstacle to the analyst’s neutrality and an
indicator of his emotional fragility.6
Benjamin Wolstein’s (1988) introduction to his edited volume on the
transformations of the uses and meanings of countertransference points to
the key problem Freud opened when the countertransference was only seen
from the perspective of the technical failing of the analyst. Wolstein reminds
his readers that the origin of psychoanalysis began with Freud’s exploration
of his own psychical life, essentially his own transferences by interpreting his
dreams and his symptoms as meaningful to self-understanding. Many con-
sider that Freud’s transference of his psychical events into a theory of psychical
life lends to psychoanalysis its potential humanity. This leads Wolstein to raise
the significant question: why not take as a model, and as the basis of psycho-
analytic technique, Freud’s creative process of self-analysis? It is this question
that touches the analyst’s education. Why not begin with the work of the
dreamer? Or, why not take the analytic session as a dream?
In one of the more extensive surveys, Heinrich Racker (2002) argues
that countertransference is best understood as the analyst’s total psychological
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 95

response made within the analyst’s “intention to understand” (135) her or his
patient. This does not seem to settle much because two unconscious subjects
occupy and meet in the analytic setting and each has a history of trying to
understand and be understood. Indeed, the intention to understand is already
an emotionally wrought experience, for it returns us to times when we can-
not understand and when we ourselves feel misunderstood. This is the his-
tory that composes the countertransference configuration. But the question
countertransference poses is different from the question of empathy in that in
empathic efforts one tries to understand the emotional logic of the other from
that vantage whereas, in countertransference, the analyst may identify with
the analysand’s internal objects in such a way that her own internal confl icts
repeat the analysand’s pain (Bolognini 2001). What can play out then are the
phantasies of lost understandings.
Racker suggests that the psychoanalytic process relies on the analyst’s
Eros, a particular orientation to listening, to relating, to interpreting, and to
being silent. He goes so far as to say that understanding itself is Eros: “It is,
above all, the understanding of what is rejected, of what is feared and hated
in the human being, and this thanks to a greater fighting strength, a greater
aggression, against which conceals the truth against illusion and denial—in
other words, against man’s fear and hate toward himself, and their pathologi-
cal consequences” (32). I fi nd Racker’s formulation sufficiently dramatic since
he includes the carnival of affects that provoke and destroy the need to under-
stand: love, hate, fear, envy, aggression, and how these affects are evaded
and disclaimed. These missed experiences, felt before they are known, must
be symbolized to confront what is most existential and most fragile about
our lives. Indeed, therapeutic action depends on the analyst’s Eros, a desire
the analyst must put into action in order to urge the other’s desire. But this
introduces the analyst’s difference, how the analyst understands and so sets
into motion “the violence of interpretation” by which I mean the idea that
language comes at a terrible price in that it names the absence and animates
loss of the object.
James Strachey (1990) eventually ties an understanding of therapeutic
action to the analyst’s difficulty in giving mutative interpretations, by which
he means an interpretation that opens thinking to the force of its emotional
meanings. He suggests that analysts have all sorts of reasons for not giving
interpretations and then draws upon Klein’s views: “Mrs. Klein has suggested
to me that there must be some quite special internal difficulty to be overcome
by the analyst in giving interpretations” (76). While not explicitly linking
these difficulties to the countertransference, Strachey points in this direction:
96 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

“at the moment of interpretation the analyst is in fact deliberately evoking a

quantity of the patient’s id-energy while it is alive and actual and unambigu-
ous and aimed directly at himself. Such a moment must above all others put
to the test his relations with his own unconscious impulses” (77). Admittedly,
one can shy away from Strachey’s particular language. However, what is sig-
nificant for me is Strachey’s sense that the analyst’s interpretation emerges
from a highly cathected affect directed to the analyst. This must mean that the
analyst’s responsibility is to clarify her own unconscious contribution, itself a
study of the countertransference.
Clarifying one’s own contribution in an intersubjective field, however,
raises further tensions with situating the countertransference and its uses. Con-
temporary formulations, as pointed out by Urribarri (2007), bring into the
mix the problem of the analytic setting as calling the countertransference, as an
“essential dimension of the representational process” (181), and as “being the
common cause of the constitution and dynamics of the analytic field” (181).
In this view, the countertransference is both a representation and revision of
the analytic relationship. It represents what the analytic setting feels like and
how these feelings transform the relationship between two unconscious minds.
Notably, it is the setting, which composes the analytic relation and its particu-
lar frame, that invokes the urge to transform affects into representations. Less
noticed is that what also transforms both the analyst and the analysand is their
different experiences of not knowing (Kohon 1986b).
If Strachey and Racker give us a clue as to the analyst’s feelings and if an
intersubjective approach gathers the dispersal of representation, Winnicott’s
two papers on the countertransference, written twenty years apart, touch
upon what breaks the heart of the analytic experience. His first paper has the
ominous title “Hate in the Countertransference.” Winnicott (1992) makes the
important point that “however much [the analyst] loves his patients he cannot
avoid hating them and fearing them, and the better he knows this the less will
hate and fear be the motives determining what he does to his patients” (195).
The paper is mainly about hate as the analyst’s response to the emotional bur-
den of the work itself. Winnicott sees in this hate something more than the
work of hate and, indeed, argues that unless one can understand the nature
of hate, one cannot conceptualize the problem of love. Yet hate, as internal-
ized and externalized, is one of the most powerful forces in life and perhaps
one of the most difficult to grasp without repeating what is experienced. I
tried to give a glimpse of this earlier when I admitted to my discussion some
of my hate in psychoanalytic training. Just as it is difficult for the teacher to
understand that her unconscious hatred is there in the classroom, so it is with
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 97

the analyst to understand that her or his hatred is there in the session. Hatred
breaks through the veneer of idealization of the analyst’s and teacher’s self and
the profession’s fantasy that the analyst only wants to be a good analyst and the
teacher only loves children.
Given the power of the analytic setting to evoke the analyst’s counter-
transference, we may speculate that the classroom works in a similar way, in
which case the teacher’s countertransference is to education as such. One form
this takes is through the teacher’s identification with the instituted myths of
education. Earlier I referenced the demand in education that the teacher loves
children and that this is one of the most powerful myths that lend idealiza-
tion and confusion to the teacher’s function and boundaries. While I believe
we may feel surprise when we admit that the teacher hates the children, in
Winnicott’s view, unless we can make that admission, we neither understand
love nor hate. Just as significant, unless the teacher can confront the defenses
of idealization and omnipotence in her or his teaching, there will be no real
contact with others. Nor will the teacher’s countertransference to this myth
be recognized.
In my teaching, I give my graduate students this paper by Winnicott
and am always surprised at how much they love it. Few of these students see
that in giving them this paper, I may be also expressing my hate of them.
The problem is that at some level it is difficult to tell the difference between
love and hate in learning, specifically because involved in any teaching and
learning is a certain ruthlessness, an aggression with both the material taught
and with our respective uses of it. The teacher, after all, is a witness to
how students ruin her lessons, misinterpret her intentions, refuse to read,
hand in late papers, and generally go their own way without thinking about
the teacher’s plans, schedules, or even her feelings. Students have felt the
teacher’s ruthlessness in the practice of grading, of writing over their work,
and of refusing to accept late papers. Winnicott, however, makes the argu-
ment that the analyst’s hate—and I shall add to this the teacher’s hate—often
remain latent: it is there unconsciously and defended against by the ego. We
then give ourselves all kinds of reasons for loving our work: we chose it, it
is gratifying, we learn things, we like to help, progress gives us rewards, the
students/analysands like us, and our parents are proud, for example. Win-
nicott puts it this way: “[The analyst] cashes in on the success of those who
did the dirty work when the patient was an infant” (197). As for the teacher’s
bankroll, each year the teacher cashes in on all that came before the school
year begins. And when the teacher cannot cash in, so to say, the bankrupt
teacher of the previous year is blamed.
98 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

Our good reasons for doing the work, many of which are idealizing how-
ever, do not take away the analyst or the teacher’s anxieties, frustrations, and
irritations. Idealization does not help the analyst or teacher understand how
the demands of the work affect the self who is working. Nor can idealization
indicate itself as a defense against loss, or the loneliness that threads its way
through the work. When Winnicott wrote of the hate in the countertransfer-
ence he located one of its sources: “the analyst must be prepared to bear strain
without expecting the patient to know anything about what he is doing,
perhaps over a long period of time. To do this, he must be easily aware of
his own fear and hate” (198). Winnicott believes that the analyst’s position
is not so different from the mother’s relation to the infant. And he speculates
that the mother hates the baby before the baby hates the mother. The rest of
his paper gives us nineteen or so experiences of the mother’s hate. When I
ask my students to read this article by Winnicott, we play with these reasons
by substituting the teacher’s hate of the student. Surely one can also put the
student’s hate of the teacher there as well, but the purpose is to consider how
the teacher experiences ordinary events in extraordinary ways. Here are a few
of Winnicott’s statements:
The baby is not her own (mental) conception.

The baby is not magically produced.

At fi rst he does not know at all what she does or what she sacrifices for him.
Especially he cannot allow for her hate.

He is ruthless, treats her as scum, an unpaid servant, a slave.

He is suspicious, refuses her good food, and makes her doubt herself, but
eats well with his aunt.

He excites her but frustrates—she mustn’t eat him or trade in sex with
him. (201)

Noting these ordinary experiences are not made to congratulate the

mother on her sacrifices and her altruism. Instead, they touch upon the moth-
er’s boundary that the baby creates for the mother and the differences between
them. These experiences frustrate and disillusion the mother’s omnipotence
and narcissism, which the baby is allowed to do and indeed, needs the mother
to experience for a self to develop. And because the mother was once a baby
who leaned on this allowance, what remains of these omnipotent feelings and
their history of disillusionment and loss returns to the mother with great force.
The couple reminds the mother of her hate. This last turn of Winnicott’s paper
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 99

is perhaps the most difficult to accept. While the mother must hate the baby
without acting it out, her hate may be conveyed only through putting the baby
to bed, lending the baby the terror of nursery rhymes and fairy tales of children
being eaten or lost in the woods, and, eventually, sending the baby to school.
But the baby, too, needs this hate because the baby “needs hate to hate” (202)
and also because the baby needs to know that it affects mother. That is, in
order to develop her own complexities and desires, the baby needs—as do our
students and colleagues—to encounter a passionate, complex other.
Many years later Winnicott (1988) wrote a second paper, “Countertrans-
ference,” noting that his first paper was really about hate while the new paper
was meant as a communication to the psychoanalytic field. His message was
that the term countertransference had become so overstretched in psychoanalytic
debate, so ready at hand to describe any feeling the analyst had at any time,
that it was in danger of losing its technical focus. I have the sense that Win-
nicott was losing patience with his colleagues, fatigued by the old argument
of whether the analyst’s own analysis was at stake in the interpretation of the
countertransference. The paper reminds analysts about a different limit to the
work itself. He seemed to suggest that not everything was countertransference.
He told his audience: “Professional work is quite different from ordinary life,
is it not?” (263). One difference is that there are specific strains in the work
in maintaining a professional attitude: “A professional attitude may, of course,
be built up on a basis of defenses and inhibitions and obssesional orderliness,
and I suggest that it is here that the psychotherapist is particularly under strain,
because any structuring of his ego-defenses lessens his ability to meet the new
situation” (264). Another novelty is with the analyst’s function and her com-
mitment to the analytic frame, which is also different from ordinary life. Yet
the working professional must remain vulnerable because she works with her
own mind. For Winnicott, this means that the analyst’s countertransference is
not just any response but one that indicates and represents the idea that the line
between professional work and ordinary life has been lost.
Winnicott’s understanding of countertransference seems to be a variation
on Freud’s view with the proviso that the focus is on the work itself: “Insofar
as all this is true,” Winnicott writes, “the meaning of the word countertrans-
ference can only be the neurotic features that spoil the professional attitude
and disturb the course of the analytic process as determined by the patient”
(266). In other words, the experience of countertransference is to be used as
a way to conceptualize the fragility of the professional’s boundaries between
self and other and as a commentary on the limits of the work itself. In my
view, this last paper raises a significant paradox in the impossible professions.
100 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

The miasma of ordinary life is always threatening to dissolve the artifice of

psychoanalysis and professional life lends an added burden to the professional.
For if we must lean upon our emotional life and our defenses against feeling
helpless or misused or misunderstood in our work with others in order to
conceptualize the emotional world of the other and our uncertainty, and if
our work contributes to that life that then contributes to our capacity to work,
given emotional life’s fluidity and its tendencies to forget its permutations and
boundaries, the countertransference presents us with this remainder, itself an
unconscious communication on the difficulties of separation and difference.

“TAILPIECE”

When friends learn that I am training to become a psychoanalyst and that I

am in private practice, they fi rst ask, “How do you do it?” The question is
familiar; teachers are asked the same one. But the “it” referred to takes us into
what is unspeakable about the history of our learning, about times when one
did go crazy or felt as if one would just break apart. My friends seem to be
asking about so many experiences, beginning with what they imagine goes
on in my consulting room, perhaps with a worry that they are undergoing
a secret psychoanalysis each time we speak. Are boundaries being broken?
They may wish for me to listen to their complaints, anxieties, hatred, and
stories of disappointments. Then they may wonder why anyone would want
to do such work. Beyond these problems of separating who is doing what to
whom, some imagine that my training in psychoanalysis prepares me for “it”
and so I never have to ask myself, how do I do it? And yet, like learning to
teach, there is no way to prepare for the uncertainties and emotional demands
of the practice; there is no protection from the vulnerability, doubts, fears,
and bouts of helplessness made when one tries to understand another as one
tries to understand the self. There is no agreement as to what it means to not
understand, to encounter the work’s limits, the limited self, the hurt feelings,
and still continue working. And there is no way to prepare for the surprise of
the forceful countertransference.
One of my teachers, a senior analyst, used to joke when asked how he
does the work day after day. He said “All I do is show up.” This analyst did
not explain much more, but I found myself thinking a great deal about what it
can mean to show up, what it means to offer one’s emotional presence without
knowing in advance what else can happen. When the analyst (and, we should
add, the teacher) shows up each day, she proves to the analysand (and student)
that anxieties have not destroyed the analyst, that grudges belong to ordinary
 COUNTERTRANSFERENCE 101

life, that speaking about them is not the same as carrying them out even if it
feels like it, and that, in the analytic setting, inviting ordinary life in the form
of speech brings to the setting what is extraordinary and most abstract about
it. The same rule applies to the analysand. By showing up each day, she shows
the analyst that the analyst’s mistakes did not kill off the work, that there is
something about the violence of interpretation that can be accepted, and that
together, even with old material, they can write a new page.
As a way into the uncertainty of the work in terms of its difficult bound-
aries and our limitations, the question, how do you do it, can also be taken
through what Winnicott (2001) spoke of as the paradox of “the conception-
perception gap” (151). Winnicott proposes that conception, or the theory of
and anticipation for experience, comes before perception. Perception has to
do with what one fi nds in experience, which differs from what one antici-
pates. It comes afterward. But this means that the object affects theory, signi-
fying the gap between them. Winnicott urges us to see this gap as a needed
place of study and as uncloseable. It makes me think that education as well
lives in this gap and creates the gap in which it lives.
My friends also fi nd it funny to see me back in school. They know me
enough to know that I was one of those children who grew up hating it and
who has difficulty following directions. I suppose my revenge was to become
a professor. Now, with my analytic training, I continue seeking this revenge
for having to learn by attempting to understand my experience as a candidate
through the countertransference, itself a dialogue with my own history of
object relation learning. If trying to understand my countertransference gives
me access to how my learning is made from deep regressions, defenses, and
phantasies of education, there is a great deal to learn about these theories and
how one’s education may welcome this work that is already occurring. The
surprise of the teacher’s countertransference is that she refi nds her own stu-
dent self as countertransference with education. I show up in my education
with all of these affects, but am beginning to understand that these feelings of
love and hate, my countertransference to education, need not end in a show-
down, for, after all, education is different from ordinary life, even if it draws
from what is most unresolved there. Indeed, the gap between conception and
perception is education’s playground. But this raises the question of whether
the very structure and thought of this education can tolerate how our love
and hate plays there.
This page intentionally left blank.
 CHAPTER SIX

Transference People

O, fair,
O, strange voice,
it is right
that you ask
why I weep;
I looked on this house,
I was caught
by an ancient regret
—From Kreousa’s lament in
H.D.’s (2003) adaptation of Ion

AESTHETIC CONFLICTS

In 1933, the poet H.D., then forty-seven years old, traveled from London to
Vienna for psychoanalysis with the seventy-seven-year-old Freud. The analy-
sis, conducted in English, was to last three months.1 They met five times a
week and, when not in analysis, H.D. wrote letters, read, went to the cinema
and opera, and joined artists, poets, writers, actors, and the friends in her
circle. A decade later, H.D. (1974) began writing her eloquent, dream-like
construction of the analysis. In these pages, she remembers her fi rst words
and then Freud’s reply as she began the session with her desire to fi nd the root
of her distress. Only retrospectively could she understand how she held her

103
104 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

habitual past tightly as Freud drew her to their unknown present. Between
bouts of weeping, she may have told Freud and now us readers: “I would
deliberately assemble all the sorry memories in my effort to get at the truth.
He said, ‘We never know what is important or what is unimportant until
after.’ He said, ‘We must be impartial, see fair play to ourselves’” (119).
Perhaps Freud touched upon questions she already had. How does one
recount a life without falling back on deadening habits? From where does the
truth of one’s life emerge? And, if H.D. is to be an artist in the world, in a
world of war, intolerance, and violence, what kind of artist can she be?
Freud’s invitation was ironic: narrate all that inhibits your words. Or,
perhaps, put into speech all that is not speech. He said, “We never know
what is important or what is unimportant until after” (119). Today, we may
understand this psychoanalytic impartiality as urging an aesthetic distance
from repeating our “sorry memories” and as a clearing for new understanding
of events that could not have been understood at the time of their unfolding.
Artists, too, cultivate aesthetic distance, even discordance, between the raw
events that become experience and its afterlife in symbolization; they make
from the ruins of what feels utterly wrecked a new beginning. The dynamic
of imagination—what we in education may also call the labor of thinking—
represents these fissures of then and now. Imagination places the heart of
learning to live within the problems we have with tendentious meaning. Let
us try to see this work of imagination as a response to understanding our
responsibility.
This chapter presents a few artists from the vantage of their efforts to
express the inexpressible in history—their personal history and the history to
which they responded. But rather than simply narrate some interesting stories
and leave these artists confi ned to their historical dramas, I place our present
concern—what education can mean as a practice of imagination—into ten-
sion with the historicity of these artists’ lives and comment on our responsi-
bility toward what these artists have left us. The history they lived becomes
for us an encounter with our own time of testimony. Freud (1914a) named
such efforts with the past “working through,” when the persistent encounter
with the traumatic past—what resists time and words—can become narrated
as a problem for memory and testimony. We will meet again H.D. and other
artists and writers such as Rilke, Mahler, and Walter. Some sought or called
upon psychoanalysis to understand the great problem of what in the world—
the internal and the external world—inhibits words and thus the imagina-
tion. They will be presented not through their accomplishments, although I
celebrate their work, but from the side of their doubts, inhibitions, aesthetic
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 105

confl icts, and then how they understood the failure of imagination and its
reparation. Psychoanalysis as well will be presented from the vantage of its
doubts, its uncertainties, and its reparative use of the arts. We will see efforts
to understand unconscious life, where things are never what they appear to
be, where the accidents of life become fused with a story of desire, destruc-
tion, and history, and where the repressed carries both the symptoms of vio-
lence and its fears of representation.
I call the figures in this chapter “transference people”2 because they pro-
vide me with an opportunity to explore our internal world as composed from
the libidinal relations we lend to and take in from others, and that create the
erotic ties we need for symbolization. Certainly, my approach takes seriously
the freedom of imagination, following along the lines of how Kristeva (1998)
postulated freedom as “synonymous with an interiority to be created in rela-
tion to an external world to be internalized . . . freedom as the internalization
of the outside, if and only if this outside (to begin with, the mother) allows for
play and lets itself be played with” (11). While not speaking specifically about
the formation of the ego, Kristeva’s sense of freedom is intimate. Her concern
is with the transference or the creation of the ego as that aesthetic link made
from internalizing and externalizing the world of others. My “transference
people” permit play with the idea that there is a double difficulty in con-
ceptualizing the poetics and promise of the imagination: all at once we are
reminded of our dependency to others and to the unknown world. Imagina-
tion is dependent on what is enigmatic in psychical life and a response to the
unknown outside world. More concretely, through artists’ encounters with
psychoanalysis and in psychoanalytic encounters with the arts we glimpse a
new orientation for understanding imagination, as a counterdepressive force
against intolerance. Understanding imagination is both an enigmatic resource
and responsibility for education. After all, when the field of education encoun-
ters the failure of imagination, it confronts both its own crisis of responsibility
and its relation to others. We face the same choice Freud presented to H.D.
We can stay on the side of the failure of imagination and its repetitive gram-
mar by insisting that we know in advance what is important and unimportant
or we can try again to encounter the unknown.
H.D.’s analysis, which I’ll return to shortly, began with an aesthetic con-
fl ict—what Meltzer and Williams(1988) defines as a confrontation with “the
enigmatic quality of the object” (27). The object is available to the senses, yet
invokes doubts and mental pain over the nature of understanding the inner
world as an already internalized relation to the absent other. Appreciation of
what is ineffable about self and other relations is, for Meltzer and Williams,
106 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

a question for the imagination. And the large question is whether imagina-
tion can contain the agony of “the tragic element in the aesthetic experience”
(27). Because the aesthetic confl ict entangles doubt with loss and beauty with
destruction, imagination—or the capacity to bring what is absent into sym-
bols—must work overtime to grasp where it can fail. Now what is interest-
ing to consider is that Meltzer and Williams place our fi rst aesthetic confl ict
within natality and so within the human condition of having to be born into
helplessness and dependency and be met this way by the unknown world of
others. They imagine the infant is called into life by the mother’s beauty, then
mesmerized by her mysteries, then anxious over her loss. The creating of this
relational bond excites the infant’s desire for her or his own mind and, too, the
anxieties and phantasies that make this mind an area of confl ict, knowledge,
and desire.
There are two intimate enigmatic object worlds: the inner world of drives,
phantasies, and object relations and the external world of others, culture, and
historical reality. This is what I think Kristeva (1998) meant when she saw
interiority as created “in relation to an external world to be internalized”
(11) and when she proposed this freedom as vulnerable to the other’s capacity
for play. For Meltzer and Williams, too, the inner world of object relations is
made from being with others, the condition for our desire that leads them to
claim: “Desire makes it possible, even essential to give the object its freedom”
(27). What belongs solely to the subject, what the subject becomes responsive
to and eventually carries a responsibility toward, is the confl ict between her or
his drive to possess the other to center the self and her or his desire to choose
freedom, even if this choice is also a source of pain. Thus, their claim that
without aesthetic confl icts, without internal doubts and anxieties over the loss
of the other, there can be no imagination for the external world. The sup-
position is that both psychical reality and material reality are enigmatic, not
just subject to the unknown but part of the unknown. Together, these inner
and outer realms must be symbolized over and over. And this symbolization
will constitute memory and freedom from it. The supposition is that we begin
within confl icts of love and hate and with a preoccupation with beauty and its
loss. And with this formulation, which places aesthetic confl ict at the heart of
affi nity and loss, psychoanalysis becomes a poetics of subjectivity, designating
narrative as its expressive art.
Perhaps one of the most courageous questions we can ask ourselves is this:
from where does one find the artistic truth of one’s life? This was certainly a
question for H.D. Freud implied that artistic or emotional truth is made only
within the play of impartiality. While Kristeva reminds us that fair play is the
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 107

responsibility of that first other, Meltzer and Williams consider the new and
tragic element of responsibility that is yet to be made from giving the object
its freedom. This courage to play within the unknown, I think, is the neces-
sary gamble for imagination. Yet in times of social strife, there is pressure to
be loyal to a one-sided reality; there is pressure to comply and to give up one’s
own mind. Recall that H.D.’s analysis occurs in Vienna in the growing shadow
of Nazi Germany. By 1933, impartiality, or the capacity to listen, to speak
freely, to choose an uncensored artistic life was under attack. It was the year
Hitler became the German chancellor in Berlin and the year of book burnings
there—Freud’s as well as others.3 There, too, the Third Reich would deem
music by Jewish composers as Entartete Musik or “degenerate music.”4 Today,
we can listen to this banned music, pondering its censorship and its beauty.
Today, the city of Berlin holds a library reading week to commemorate the
book burnings of 1933. We can think of the censorship of the arts in our own
time of war. We can wonder how the arts come to be deemed offensive and
consider what else is lost when freedom of imagination is feared.
In 1933, after his concerts were banned by the Nazis, the conductor
Bruno Walter, whom you will meet shortly, fled Berlin for Vienna (Ryding
and Pechefsky 2001).5 That year, too, writing from Berlin, novelist Joseph
Roth (2003) would, in anguish, report of the books being burned and the
artists under attack. And he would proclaim the artists’ defeat by their own
society and their own capitulations when he wrote: “The European mind is
capitulating. It is capitulating out of weakness, out of sloth, out of apathy, out
of lack of imagination (it will be the task of some future generation to estab-
lish the reasons for this disgraceful capitulation)” (207). The attack on artists,
he implied, was no different from destroying anyone’s mind. Today, we may
consider that an attack on the arts is an attack on impartiality, itself the condi-
tion for creative work that lends imagination its freedom.
Sixty years later, with a quiet monument, Humboldt University in Berlin
now commemorates that place where the books were burned. In the Bebelp-
latz, across from the Law School, one fi nds “The Empty Library” created in
1995 by the Israeli artist Micha Ullman. This underground monument is easy
to miss and walk over. But there is a small glass pane embedded in the cobble
walkway, its surface scratched by weather and the scuff marks of shoes. One
must crouch low to see what lies below. Then, one encounters only empty
bookcases lining its four walls to mark our memory with this erasure and loss.
A small plaque, also on the ground, quotes the poet Heinrich Heine, who
wrote a century before: “Where they start by burning books, they’ll end by
burning people.”
108 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

So, too, in the newly built Jewish Museum of Berlin, the contributions
and loss of German Jewry are memorialized. It is not supposed to be a Holo-
caust museum, yet its jagged architecture and its narrative of destruction lead
the viewer to what is most unthinkable about the Shoah. Indeed, near the exit
sits a small television screen. It was there that I watched the endless loop of a
1964 edited interview with Hannah Arendt, which took place in what does
not exist anymore, West Germany. I became mesmerized by what I thought
was Arendt’s insistence that it was not the year of 1933 that so affected her
generation. Instead, with the terrible hindsight of living after, she said, it was
when they heard of Auschwitz. When the interviewer asked why, she replied,
or I thought she replied, “The bodies.” This, for her, she said, was the abyss,
what should never have happened but in fact did happen.
Then and now psychoanalysis resides within this paradox of tying the
threads of imagination to brute reality: even as words became an enemy to
destroy, it would be only words that would repair the soul and narrate the
societal depression. The words used to destroy the mind and our capacity to
think—by 1933, it was Nazi law, censorship, street violence, and propaganda;
today we may ponder our own wars—would have to be met with other words
to lend to the loss of the mind the significance needed for its repair. H.D.’s
analysis, too, resided in this paradox. As books were being burned and as H.D.
found it difficult to write, psychoanalysis would only propose, to lend relief to
her depression, the free association with words. In the memoir of her analysis
written ten years later, still in the midst of war, H.D.’s reconstruction extends
Freud’s fi rst advice. She permitted the important and the unimportant to
have their say and even affect what is tragic for both. In this literary affair, in
the affair that is psychoanalysis, we are requested to suspend preconceptions,
themselves a defense against the unknown. And H.D.’s memoir plays with this
advice. In her tribute to Freud, she wrote of walking in the streets of Vienna
where “tiny confetti-like tokens” (58) fell to the ground. H.D. reported their
message: “Hitler gives bread, Hitler gives work” (58). Her testimony many
years later carries her own reply: it reads as if she tore her memories into a
thousand tiny pieces, threw them above her head, and then, like so much
confetti, witnessed their drift, how her memories, no longer fi xated in the
timelessness of the unconscious, could now scatter into something new.

H.D. AND FREUD

Before that aesthetic achievement, which for H.D. had to be won over and
over, there was the difficult beginning of analysis: her fi rst impressions and
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 109

the aesthetic confl icts they conveyed. In her daily letters written to others
during 1933 and 1934 and in the later memoir of the analysis, we learn that
the beauty of Freud’s consulting room fi rst overwhelmed H.D. She (1974)
would later recall that Freud handed her his favorite statue, Pallas Athené:
“‘She’s perfect’ he said, ‘only she has lost her spear’. I didn’t say anything” (69).
Then again, H.D. returned to how this felt to her: “She had lost her spear.
He might have been talking Greek . . . although he was speaking English
without a perceptible trace of accent, yet he was speaking a foreign lan-
guage” (69).
On that fi rst day of her analysis with Freud, she could not stop looking at
Freud’s collection of objects of antiquity, the couch draped with an Oriental
rug and then the chair placed behind it, the books he would sometimes lend
her later, and the desk that held, perhaps, his favorite ancient artifacts lined up
in such a way that, when sitting behind his desk, Freud might hide, take ref-
uge in the play of his own writing. H.D. felt the consulting room as museum
of tiny treasures for her to discover: here the preserved past was still affecting
its own mysteries and now, through the transference, she, too, would affect
and rewrite her mythology. And the room itself seemed to invite her private
mythology, with the proviso that it be interpreted as always under construc-
tion, subject to play, and also to loss and to mourning. H.D. would learn it is
not that the events of her life, what she fi rst called her “sorry memories,” that
would themselves change. But her understanding of memory’s work would.
What became the core of the analysis was the work of understanding the fail-
ure of imagination, so devastating for the writer and, ultimately, for the social
imaginary in which writers live.
Freud’s accidental pedagogy, if I could put it this way, began with bits of
advice. He was telling the writer not to prepare a draft of each session prior to
their meeting, that the material would emerge without her effort to control
what should be said or how her words would be heard, and that together in
free association, they would create the courage needed to meet the unknown.
Ever the writer, even when in the throes of her writing block—of needing to
say something but having no words—H.D. wished her memories to have, for
him, drama and narrative flair. It was, after all, what she hoped for her own
art but it was also where she felt most dissatisfied. Freud was not interested in
this performance; he needed only her rough, unprepared drafts. H.D. (1974)
writes of needed negations: “He said again that he did not want me to pre-
pare. I could not explain adequately that I did not. He does not, apparently,
want me to take notes, but I must do that” (165). And indeed, “the Professor”
as she sometimes called Freud in the memoir and “papa,” which she called
110 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

him in the letters, continued to ask her, when the material flattened her curi-
osity, if she has prepared for the analysis.
One preparation, having to do with the work of the unconscious, was
permitted. H.D. could not stop preparing in the form of magnificent dreams
she made for Freud. And it surprised her when Freud asked for her interpre-
tations, when he found delight in her play. Yet when pressed for details, she
hardly remembered the historical facts, or else, when the forgotten details sud-
denly came into view and so became the camera obscura, they presented some
other story than the one she may have desired. Let this negativity emerge,
Freud seemed to say, as he invited her to narrate her phantasies of history and
associate freely with what she herself had made from the accidents of her life,
from lost chances and loss of love, from what she could not make happen,
and from what she could not explain but nonetheless felt. Her responsibility
would be a commitment to symbolize this unknown. After the analysis, I
think, H.D. began to learn why history is so difficult for the psyche, how this
difficulty impresses and obscures memory, and why the work of becoming
responsive to the unknown matters for living an artistic life.
As I read through her letters and memoir, I wondered whether H.D. had
difficulty tolerating her otherness—as modernist poet, as woman, as bisex-
ual—and so suffered from a particular failure of imagination. She suggests as
much in her memoir of the analysis, but refuses to secure the source of her
distress in the social disparagement of her plurality. After all, H.D. felt isola-
tion but was not isolated. She was a part of a larger, lively expressive revolt
committed only to the imagination. Today, we might understand her circle as
“Queer” in that she and her friends embraced the artists’ diasporas, crossing
racial, ethnic, sexual, geographic, and imaginary boundaries. They had their
neurosis, but also took great pleasure in the know-how of their transgressions.
They protested inequalities in the world and enjoyed how their art defied
conventionality to break open the repressed of symbolization. So I think the
otherness that agonized H.D. was of a different order than the one we typi-
cally associate with the pains of social difference. What held her back, what
was particular about her anguish, cannot be placed neatly into a personal
response to social disregard. Nor would her anguish be extinguished solely
through recognition, although this would help. Perhaps we are touching upon
the tragic aspect of life when we raise the question of what is enigmatic about
the unconscious and its otherness. Here then is our original relation to the
unknowable. And while psychoanalysis may sometimes render this intimacy
as agony and even invite anguish and sadness by way of interpretation, this
aesthetic confl ict is given free play.
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 111

Freud told her not to prepare and gave her two other instructions: fi rst,
that she was not to discuss her analysis with anyone and, second, she was
never to defend him. We know from her letters and memoir that H.D. broke
both rules; she kept a journal of their 1933 sessions and wrote daily letters
about her analysis to her intimate patron and friend Bryher and to others as
well (Friedman 2002). The memoir came later, not as defense but as grati-
tude and reparation. Freud, too, broke his own rules. His archive of letters is
fi lled with psychoanalytic misadventures, bad advice, the failures of defense,
and the anguish of his own self-analysis. Almost all of his published writing
constitutes a defense of psychoanalysis, for he understood the anxiety, fear,
uncertainty, and hatred his method invoked. Nor did he shy away from his
own doubts. Sometimes charming and at other times deflating, Freud’s writ-
ing carries a double voice, addressed to believers and disbelievers, to impartial
people and to those enraged. He anticipated and even welcomed the resistance
to his method. And throughout his career he continued to write for the gen-
eral public, lecture to civic groups, and pressure his theories with the expres-
sion of artists, his own doubts, and his aesthetic confl icts. But also, in the case
of this daily analysis with H.D., his impartiality was always threatened by the
transference between them: gifts were exchanged; there was shared gossip,
and some contact beyond the analysis. And the transference obeyed neither
reality nor psychoanalytic convention. As with all transference, it became
both an obstacle to the analysis and its needed resource for the work, only to
be eventually sublimated.
When Freud requested that H.D. never defend him, he was well aware
that others could see psychoanalysis as indicating not just a personal failure,
oversusceptibility to its method, or as a waste of one’s time. It could be also
thought of as a betrayal of friendship. H.D.’s letters suggest as much and her
friendship with Ezra Pound, for example, suffered when he accused her of
choosing Freud over him. Yet the primary reason for not becoming Freud’s
defender turns on the psychoanalytic problem of resistance, which is itself a
theory of learning. Defending psychoanalysis would only make the one who
dismisses it angry. Rationality neither cures intolerance nor revives the failure
of the imagination. And let us admit that one can hardly be rational in the
face of intolerance. Surely clinical work helped Freud understand the affective
difficulty of changing one’s mind, the need to have both hated and beloved
objects, the terror and paranoia made when one feels love is being taken away,
and the sorrow, indeed, the mourning, that accompanies disillusionment. Her
Tribute to Freud rehearses what she remembered of his reasons, now seeming
to address the reader:
112 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

You will do no good to the detractor by mistakenly beginning a logical

defense. You will drive the hatred or the fear or the prejudice deeper. You
will do no good to yourself, for you will only expose your own feelings. . . .
You will do no good to me and my work, for antagonism, once taking
hold, cannot be rooted out from above the surface, and it thrives, in a way,
on heated argument and digs in deeper. The only way to extract the fear
or prejudice would be from within, from below, and as naturally this type
of prejudiced or frightened mind would dodge any hint of a suggestion of
psychoanalytic treatment, or even, put it, study and research along these
lines, you cannot get to the root of the trouble. Every word, spoken in my
defense, I mean, to already prejudiced individuals, serves to drive the root
in deeper. (86–87)

Yet words were all that could be traded in the consulting room, and as Adam
Phillips (2006) has suggested in his introduction to the new literary transla-
tions of Freud, “Freud is the writer for people who want to fi nd out what
words may have done to them, and may still be doing” (vii). Words, however,
as Freud warned H.D., get under one’s skin even if there is also a denial that
words can really matter.
For this very reason—that putting things into words matter to the
writer—Freud desired analysands who were artists. In his book of mistakes
Freud (1901) said as much: “In the field of symptomatic acts, too, psycho-
analytic observation must concede priority to imaginative writers” (17).
Already they knew the power of words as capable of clearing confusion and
expressing its affects. Already they presented our emotional world as subject
to what could not be seen or experienced and gave a story to unconscious
confl icts that animate our relations to others. Already they presented what
is disagreeable in reality and in doing so show us how reality is susceptible
to that which is not reality at all. Already they depict the terror that ensues
when meaning breaks down, when hatred overtakes the mind, when the
imagination fails, when motives cut lose from their purpose, and when one
devises an inhibition or meets with despair a prohibition against thought.
Already they put into speech all that is not speech. And they affect us with
their affect, creating for our mind, new transference people, new aesthetic
confl icts that invite us to play.
Freud’s relation to the arts, however, was both a source of inspiration and
an index of his own ambivalence in trying to understand the mythology of
the mind (Britzman 2006). He was always interested in creativity and while
he had so many theories as to what stops it short—what inhibits desire and
what collapses meaning into stultifying routine—he could never quite answer
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 113

the question: where does creativity come from? In his essay on the creative
writer and daydreaming, Freud (1908) wondered: “from what sources that
strange being, the creative writer, draws his material, and how he manages to
make such an impression on us with it and to arouse in us emotions of which,
perhaps, we had not even thought ourselves capable” (143). The best Freud
could do was to suggest the creativity of imagination as a paradox: the creative
writer works with the products of phantasy without the defense of reality, yet
does not turn away from reality or phantasy. Artists may lend insight into the
terrible confusion of these two realms and in so doing posit memory itself as
a question. They present an uncanny index of the doubts that rush in and the
terrible cost of not distinguishing one’s projections from the enigmatic object.
Indeed, the paradox is that the arts can symbolize the social and individual
failure of imagination; they can present our passion for ignorance without
recourse to defending reality. Perhaps it was from imaginative works that
Freud made sense of the creative power of impartiality and the patience to
play with the nonsense of the unconscious.
H.D. sought analysis with Freud because she suffered from a writing
inhibition. She could not fi nish manuscripts, hated the work she had done,
and felt stagnant in her creativity. She felt like a man when she wrote and a
woman when she didn’t and this terrible split was paralyzing. Why her distress
migrated to matters of gender was part of the analysis, although, to my mind,
putting this confl ict into words presented H.D., and now us, with new ques-
tions: how are our bodies lived as phantasy, as contradiction, and as wish and
desire? What is it to play with misrecognition and lost others? There were, of
course, unspoken desires and bisexual yearnings somehow entangled in her
distress over the impending war that returned with great anguish the traumatic
losses she experienced in World War I. Yet how brave she must have been to
travel to Vienna in 1933 to meet with an ailing Freud who was already begin-
ning to experience the persecution that would lead in 1938 to his exile.
H.D. wrote of one regret in her memoir: that she never asked Freud
how he felt about the growing anti-Semitism of Vienna. Both of them were
aware of that present danger, but what it would come to mean could not yet
be known. They often spoke about the street violence and the beatings of
Jews by Nazi gangs. Yet in a letter she wrote to Bryher on March 22, 1933,
during her analysis, she does know how Freud feels. She writes Bryher with
worries over Freud’s safety and recounts how she tries to reassure him that
the worst will not happen, that the world will not let the worst happen. Freud
was unconvinced, she reported to Bryher, and then reminded her of what is
important now: “He says, ‘. . . many, many, people will be murdered.’ (He
114 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

meant Jews.) I said I didn’t think massacre was possible, there was still the
open sympathy of the world. Poor old, old little old papa. However, he gave a
flea-shake to his shoulders and said, ‘well, we better go on with your analysis.
It’s the only thing now.’ So, on we plunged” (Friedman 2002, p. 135).
Two months later, H.D. left Vienna suddenly after a bomb scare on the
streetcar. She returned again in 1934 for another two months of analysis with
Freud. Again, more rules were broken and they continued to face war. When
she left Freud again, she carried with her the old problem of trying to write.
The cure would take longer than the analysis, but a seed of cure had already
been planted by Freud’s insistence that even in times of war and its destruc-
tion, even when individuals are the last beings to matter, even when under-
standing one’s emotional life has only the power to affect the self, her analysis
did matter as did her struggle to live, against all odds, an artistic life.

OTHER ARTISTS: RILKE, MAHLER, AND WALTER

H.D. was not the only artist Freud analyzed but she may have been his last
and, to my mind, the most eloquent poet of psychoanalysis. We now meet
a few other artists who encountered Freud, beginning with the poet Rilke
in 1915, then back to the composer Mahler in 1910, and then further back
to Mahler’s protégé, the conductor Bruno Walter in 1906. Like H.D., each
artist suffered from his own crisis of creativity, made from that potent and
singular combination of life’s accidents, personal failings, loss of love, wor-
ries over success and failure, and the fraying of libidinal ties in an uncer-
tain world. They all felt confl icted over what, in living an artistic life, is
important and unimportant. And with each encounter we meet an affected
Freud interested in both destruction and creativity, in beauty and violence,
and so with accepting the sudden expression and the slow symbolization of
aesthetic confl icts.
The poet Rilke met Freud during World War I. Today, we may consider
him as the negative of H.D. in that he did not want an analysis. Subject to
depressive bouts and doubts over his creativity, Rilke never quite made it
into Freud’s consulting room. The analyst Lou Andre Salome, Freud’s col-
league and Rilke’s great friend, did her best to suggest that he see Freud (von
Unwerth 2005). Rilke did visit the Freuds socially in 1915 and while Freud
invited him back, he never returned. Like so many artists and intellectuals,
Rilke felt that his madness—his depression and his oddities—were necessary
to his creative life’s work. Perhaps he is half right, for we do need our pri-
vate madness to even approach the question of imagination. Where he went
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 115

wrong, in my view, is with what he imagined psychoanalysis would do to

him. He worried that psychoanalysis would erase his creative edge, make him
normal, and so cure him from writing at all. Rilke felt his neurosis as a needed
treasure, even if it also carried his mental pain. But he must have also ques-
tioned, during depressive bouts of sadness and despair, when he could fi nd
neither words nor beauty, whether his writing was a symptom of the illness
or its inspiration. This aesthetic confl ict is one Kristeva (1989) claims for the
literary struggle, that “literary creation . . . constitute[s] a very faithful semio-
logical representation of the subject’s battle with symbolic collapse” (24). And
if Rilke’s poetry is a testament to this struggle, so, too, is psychoanalysis.
Freud never formally mentioned his fleeting relation with Rilke, but
in the beautiful imaginative history of their meeting, von Unwerth (2005)
places the haunted figure of Rilke into the center of Freud’s (1916) poignant
paper, “On Transience,” which was written during World War I. There,
Freud muses over a walk in the woods, taken with a young friend and with
another person he called “a young but already famous poet” (305). Perhaps
it was the poet Rilke. This poet was joyless, overcome by his doubts on the
fleeting life of nature’s beauty. Why, he asked, should I care about the beauty
of nature if all living things must die? And why would one love if loss was the
inevitable ending? Wouldn’t it be better not to love? These grand questions
and their painful plaint Freud considered as a symptom of mourning the ill-
ness of the human condition. The only consolation Freud could think of was
that beauty’s impermanence, its transience, lends beauty its value, gifts, and
our gratitude. But the impermanence also touches our doubts over loss and
thoughts of death. Beauty calls forth our aesthetic confl icts and so fleeting
beauty will be inevitably linked to mortality and its loss. It was in this paper
Freud fi rst proposed that the capacity to appreciate beauty is affected through
the work of mourning even as this work must include attaching memory to
loss and fi nding again a new and different world with the living.
Freud took another walk in 1910, this time with a composer of music.
Like the poets H.D. and Rilke, Mahler, too, broke open conventional form
to imagine lost worlds that never existed and, in the same gesture, bid them
welcome and farewell. He tormented the height of romanticism with the
negativity of its destruction; sounds of the new clashed against the old, con-
fl icts of illusion and disillusion made revelation. There played in his music the
untimely time of the aesthetic confl icts. Freud was fi fty-four years old when
he walked with the fi fty-year-old Gustav Mahler. The consultation lasted four
hours, and occurred just a year before Mahler’s death. Stuart Feder (2004)
tenderly recreates their brief encounter, what he imagines as “the walking
116 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

cure” (206), suggesting that, by the time of the consultation, Mahler’s cre-
ative capacity to integrate emotional crisis into his music had foundered.
Adorno’s (1992) study of Mahler’s music also alludes to his consulta-
tion with Freud. There Mahler’s music is likened to Freud’s early cathartic
method, where the psychodrama of affects, so fi xated on traumatic events,
are revived for memory to loosen the past’s hold on the present. What strikes
Adorno, perhaps a shadow of Rilke’s fear, is that Freud “declined to cure
his person out of respect for his work” (39). We might consider that Freud
approached anyone this way since for him cure only meant the capacity to
work and love. Still, Adorno rails against any suggestion that a psychological
analysis of Mahler’ crisis does any justice to his creative work. There is, for
Adorno, an objective reality beyond psychology. Yet the psychology remains
when Adorno wrote, “Mahler’s music is the individual’s dream of the irresist-
ible collective. But at the same time it expresses objectively the impossibility
of identification with it” (33). Music, he implies, composes history as a crisis
with its own dreams. Music, he implies, begins with our aesthetic confl ict of
beauty and loss.
I suppose Freud’s brief encounters with Rilke and Mahler point to the
difficulty of understanding together creative life with the artists’ despair over
its loss. I imagine these walks with the poet and the composer leave us with
new questions as to the nature of creative life, its relation to the artists’ time,
and what within the artist stops it short. We can wonder, for instance, about
external conditions as the obstacle to understanding its own imaginary but
that would leave out our freedom, how we internalize the world of others
and express this world. Their work, after all, leaves behind a story of beauty
and destruction; we receive the symbolization of desires from their vanishing
point: what has not lasted or even what could have never existed. Theirs was a
faith that symbolization, as the attempt to encounter what is absent, mattered.
Expressions of this play, including the moment it can shatter, take us to the
realm of what is most difficult in imagining living in our world. The analysis
of Mahler’s associate, the conductor Bruno Walter, allows us a closer look
into the idiomatic details of this struggle and the relation between aesthetic
confl ict and sudden responsibility.
Walter began his analysis with Freud in 1906. Psychoanalysis was a new
theory and treatment, but it already suffered from an illicit reputation due to
Freud’s exploration of infantile sexuality and his insistence on the vicissitudes
of Eros. Walter consulted Freud because he had developed an arm paralysis,
a catastrophic symptom for an orchestral conductor and surely a crisis of cre-
ativity and confidence. No physical cause could be ascertained and Walter
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 117

was afraid that he would no longer be able to conduct. Years later in his slim
volume on music, Walter (1961) would write that the conductor “guides and
influences the playing of others” (83). The responsibility is terrible and ter-
rifying: “The moral danger which, at the same time, is an artistic one, lies for
the conductor in the power he has over others” (121). Still, the conductor,
alone, is responsible for his ear and hand. And here is where the crisis erupts:
the hand loses its assurance, marches of doubts overwhelm the mind, and
one’s inner sense of the music is lost. In his volume on music, Walter tells us
that in this crisis, the conductor’s overreliance on technique will only provoke
more difficulties.
Sixty years after he saw Freud, Walter (1966) writes in his memoir: “The
consultation took a course I had not foreseen. Instead of questioning me about
sexual aberrations in infancy, as my layman’s ignorance had led me to expect,
Freud examined my arm briefly” (164). Then Freud asked him if he had ever
traveled to Sicily, told Walter to travel there that night, forget about his arm
and use his eyes. This he did and while the vacation relaxed Walter, his arm
was not cured. On his next visit, Freud told Walter to continue conducting.
Here is how Walter (1966) recalls their conversation: ““But I can’t move my
arm.” “Try it, at any rate,” “And what if I should have to stop?” “You won’t
have to stop.” “Can I take upon myself the responsibility of possibly upsetting
a performance?” “I’ll take responsibility”” (167).
Freud’s cure was not miraculous and, in another report of their encoun-
ter, Walter is suspicious as to whether his analysis did in fact help (Ryding
and Pechefsky 2001). But what is most striking to me about Walter’s memoir
is his gratitude toward Freud’s willingness to relieve him of a responsibility
further burdened by his anxiety of not being able to work. What, after all,
could Freud actually do when Walter stood to face the orchestra? How could
he ever take responsibility for Walter’s failure to conduct? And yet I think
Freud’s willingness to be used and maybe even blamed, his willingness to
become one of Walter’s transference people, should something bad happen,
may have opened Walter to a different understanding of his anxieties; that
while he felt such danger, he was not alone. Indeed, the analysis did allow
Walter to reconsider and change many of his ideas in the areas of responsibil-
ity, psychoanalysis, and understanding his own doubts and aesthetic confl icts.
Walter thought that psychoanalysis was the art of memory; what struck him
most was Freud’s insistence that he forget about his arm. Walter thought Freud
would see something infantile in his symptom and so relate it to sexuality, but
Freud dismissed Walter’s interpretation of psychoanalysis, just as he did with
H.D. Most memorable was that Walter did not forget Freud’s willingness to
118 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

accept a responsibility that could never really be taken. That was how the
analysis began and years later Walter (1966) wrote: “So by dint of much effort
and confidence [in Freud], by learning and forgetting, I fi nally succeeded in
fi nding my way back to my profession” (168).

NEGATIVE CAPABILITY

From these imaginative constructions made from the remnants of history,

we glimpse the psychoanalytic problem of trying to understand the expres-
sions and symbolization of internal plurality. What matters to living an
artistic life is tolerating the unknown. The poet John Keats described such
effort as “negative capability” (Forman 1960). He used that phrase in one of
his letters written in 1817 as he tried to describe the artist’s labor of imagi-
nation. In the language of his time he wrote: “I mean Negative Capability,
that is when man is capable of being in uncertainties, Mysteries, doubts,
without any irritable reaching after fact and reason” (71). I think all of the
artists—H.D., Rilke, Walter, and Mahler—suffered a crisis of negative capa-
bility, one that threatened to destroy their creative work. There is a terrible
confusion of doubts over the nature of beauty and goodness and anxious
questions over the source of one’s misery. There is a loss of hope that one’s
efforts can matter.
Earlier in this chapter, I raised the unanswerable question: where does
creativity come from? The other side of the question concerns the origin of
misery. If we consider only the world of others as the source of our misery
and artistic failings, we are apt to fall into an impossible defense that Freud
warned H.D. about, or else decide too soon what is important and unimport-
ant. If we situate the external world as the only source of misery, as Jacqueline
Rose (1993) has argued, the inner world becomes irrelevant, small, private,
and either a privilege denied to others or simply a sign of narcissism. There
is then no responsibility, for everything is ordained. Yet the external world is
just as affected when the internal world is disavowed: it, too, becomes ideal-
ized, disparaged, and timeless. Paradoxically, the more we refuse our inner
world in the name of rationality or politics, the more we feel its unimpor-
tance, the more rigid, timeless, and unforgiving reality becomes and the more
lost, disparaged, or forgotten becomes our history. With the idea of negativity
capability we are permitted the depth of emotional reality as capable of both
registering the world that cannot be known and signifying how it is that we
come to be affected. Keats’s idea of negative capability holds open this empty
space and leaves us our doubts and questions.
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 119

Meltzer and Williams (1988) expand Keats’s negative capability with

their idea of aesthetic confl ict, an encounter with both beauty and violence:
beauty of the object, violence in its capacity to be destroyed or to destroy.
They asked about our agony: “How to live with a relatively harmonious inner
world enriched by the bounty and beauty of one’s good objects, in an out-
side world that mirrors its beauty but not its harmony, about which one can no
longer remain unconcerned?” (ital. original, 221–222). Perhaps they are a bit too
oblique although I felt this confl ict as I walked through the Jewish Museum
of Berlin. I think they are speaking both to an experience of responding
to a work of art that is itself a representation of what the artist cares about
and our ability to relate to that which is without art: difficult experiences of
social despair, intolerance, and the breakdown of meaning. Negative capabil-
ity would allow forming the terrifying question: how does the capacity to
love beauty affect our encounters with intolerance?
By 1941, Bruno Walter was living in exile in the United States where he
published an article titled, “About War and Music.” In part he wrote:

I wanted to make up my mind whether now, when the battle of humanity

is being fought, music should be allowed to retain the same importance as
before. I began to see that music does not mean escape from world affairs;
it can, in fact, play an active role. . . . To cultivate those things which
have given meaning to our lives. . . . The more decency and fair play are
trampled underfoot by the enemy, the more faithfully should we observe
them. The more tyrannically the other side perverts science and art, the
more should we encourage a free art and a free science. (cited in Ryding
and Pechefsky, 272–273)

There is no escape from world affairs and our emotional world registers
this responsibility. And when the question of what is important and unim-
portant is raised, we can begin to see that what is most important is our
capacity to respond to what is most difficult about freedom. With negative
capability we may begin to understand that living in the world requires our
response to the world and our responsibility in the world is affected by our
having to symbolize the world.

MEMORY PROBLEMS AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF HISTORY

Testimony, we know, comes to us in so many forms: music, poetry, visual

art, literature, memoirs, built things, and also historical records. And educa-
tion, we know, receives its stammering. We are doubly affected: as we work
120 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

with testimonies that affect us, the fault lines of our education are animated.
How easily imagination and desire merge for the witness. And how difficult
it becomes to extricate our drive to know from our desire to understand what
has already happened to others but is inconceivable to us. What then is hap-
pening to what has already happened?
Ricoeur’s (2004) lectures on history and forgetting raise the question of
how we come to understand the truthful dimension of memory when memory
and imagination are so difficult to separate. He asks, “Can the relation to the
past be only a variety of mimesis?” (13). Yet a collapse of memory with imagi-
nation poses a paradox. Without imagination we cannot fantasize how others
experienced events we could not have lived through. Nor could we place our
own present in relation to the other’s past. The work of imagination permits
us this affected history. Still, imagination carries with it the distortions, repres-
sions, and unconscious wishes that remix and confuse history with our own
psychical life wishes and so render history timeless, like the unconscious. Here
imagination fails through denial of painful events and a radical difficulty to
believe the consequences of humanly created catastrophe as our inheritance. A
failure of imagination is essentially a resistance to working through the past and
thus a failure to mourn. Ricouer insists we have no other resource for knowing
the past except someone’s memory, which “signifies that something has taken
place, has occurred, has happened before we remember it” (21). And he links
this untimely time, an event before memory, to the question of the reception of
testimony as our capacity to integrate loss with memory.
Reality, even if accepted, is not easily known. Elizabeth Rottenberg
(2005) places the untimely time of the event before memory as a question
of “inheriting the future” (xxi), a responsibility to respond. She believes that
the giving and receiving of testimony is a psychological need: “human beings
need to humanize impersonal forces and destinies that affl ict them” (5). Yet
this need to humanize begins with projections and negations, through dis-
avowal of what is unpleasurable and indeed painful, what is inhuman. She
makes the argument that the field of ethics turns to psychoanalysis not because
the pleasure principle is so difficult to renounce but because of Freud’s under-
standing of the reality principle: that the ego has the capacity to turn away
from reality through its defenses. And she links this turning away from reality
to the prohibition against thought and judgment, where just as the ego, in
order to think, must take into itself that which is disagreeable but real, it can
also take cover in its phantasies.
For Eric Santer (2001), the turn away from reality raises the problem of
intolerance as both a defense against reality and memory. He, too, approaches
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 121

memory as radically relational, rather than simply mimetic, and as untimely

because memory, like imagination, is dependent on others and affected by the
symbolic register, or the meanings that precede us. The tension is that memory
is subject then to problems of authority and authorization and consequently, to
education. This brings him to the problem of education’s responsibility and to
his critique of our pedagogical efforts to cure intolerance. We tend to histori-
cize intolerance, situating it only in external conditions—differences between
cultures, for example. What becomes unimaginable and intolerable is the idea
that intolerance also has to do with a refusal to be affected by the other. This
was Freud’s point to H.D. when he reminded her never to defend psychoanaly-
sis. Intolerance, Santer suggests, also constitutes identity itself since identity is
subject to the drives, to excitability, perturbation, to phantasies, and to its own
defensive structures. Drawing from Freud’s view that humans are self-inter-
preting creatures, Santer proposes the problem we have with the symbolic. It
is not just that our symbols are saturated with cultural meaning and that we
merely take them in. The procedures of symbolization already carry a libidinal
relationship. “In a certain sense,” Santer writes, “psychoanalysis proper begins
with the thought that human beings can suffer not only from this or that inhi-
bition in one’s behaviour but also the very way in which the world is disclosed
to use from within, [what the poet Paul Celan calls]‘our angle of inclination’”
(39–40). That is, our inhibitions are a relation to what is intolerable in having
to symbolize the ways the world is disclosed to us.
As I read these debates on testimony, memory, and responsibility, I was
struck by the centrality of education as a public space for understanding and
misunderstanding, by the collapse of so many pedagogic themes, and then
by how I am affected in my own capacity to turn away from reality. Yet if
pedagogy itself inherits this problem when, for example, students and teachers
encounter testimonies of social discord, betrayal, and inhumanity, it may fi rst
need to pass through what is often inexpressible for us: our various phantasies
that defend against reality. This may be what Ricoeur considered as an event
before memory and what challenges our negative capabilities. In pondering
these problems I encounter my own defenses as well; it has to do with my
fascination with the year 1933, as if my own transference was unimportant.
Earlier I mentioned my encounter with the interview of Hannah
Arendt that endlessly played on a television monitor in a corner of the Jew-
ish Museum in Berlin. And just as Micha Ullman’s monument “The Empty
Library” was so easy for me to miss, so, too, was the little monitor in the
museum. I had almost walked past it. That interview, I found out later, was
published under the title “What Remains? The Language Remains.”6 I had
122 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

in fact read this interview, but had forgotten it. Rereading the interview,
what now struck me was how Arendt, only in retrospect, understood that
the year 1933 was important and unimportant. It was important because that
year she, too, with so many others, escaped Berlin to move to Paris where
she worked for a Zionist agency sending Jewish youth to Palestine. That year
was important both personally and politically in that Arendt said she became
deeply disillusioned with the capitulation of some intellectuals, perhaps as
the journalist Joseph Roth was. But the year was also unimportant when she
said to the interviewer,

You know, what was decisive was not the year 1933, at least not for me.
What was decisive [in 1943] was the day we learned about Auschwitz. . . .
And at fi rst we didn’t believe it . . . because militarily it was unnecessary and
uncalled for. . . . It was really as if an abyss had opened. Because we had the
idea that amends could somehow be made from everything else . . . but not
for this. This ought not to have happened. . . . Something happened there to
which we cannot reconcile ourselves. (Arendt, 2005, 13–14)

The year was unimportant because of what could not be known or believed
and what still cannot be understood. I wonder if my own insistence on the
importance of the year 1933 was a defense against what happened after-
ward, a foreclosure of memory’s irreconcilable time, and thus an event before
memory. I also wonder if my memory of the televised interview clip and my
misquoting of it were affected, as I walked through the narrow, jagged, dis-
orienting spaces of the Jewish Museum of Berlin, by my experience of feeling
the losses of bodies each exhibit marked. Perhaps my misrecognition was a
registration of an aesthetic confl ict, that timeless moment when memory
itself is caught within the need to keep the world as it was and the anxiety
of its traumatic loss.
Education, too, is a place where the world is disclosed, not just when we
meet our curriculum but in how this disclosure meets our own inclinations.
Our proclivity for censorship and forgetting, our eschewal and even fear of
affect, and our anxiety over the complicated, inchoate body, are, I think,
symptoms of our failure of imagination. If as Ricoeur suggests, memory and
imagination are so closely linked, and if, as Rottenberg reminds, testimony
itself is a psychological need and so registers within identity a quality of the
inhuman and its resistance to that quality, and if, as Santer insists, all these
affects constitute and call forth defenses against what is intolerable, then the
nature of our educational responsibility and its negative capability may be more
difficult than we have ever imagined.
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 123

OUR PSYCHOANALYTIC CENTURY

Kristeva (2001) has audaciously named the twentieth century “Our Psycho-
analytic Century” (5). We may see this century now as one preoccupied with
affect, subjectivity, family, and narrative; a century of testimony and educa-
tion, and a century of confl ict, sublation, preservation, and of overcoming.
But it is also the century of the return of the repressed, of archaic hatreds,
of the repetition compulsion, of war, and of suffering, and the advent of the
unconscious. Our psychoanalytic century returns what history has left us:
the question of imagination and the difficulty of how education may disclose
the world.
In the psychoanalytic clinic, learning and forgetting go hand in hand.
Indeed, in one of his few papers on psychoanalytic technique, Freud (1914a)
would describe the psychoanalytic process through its three modalities of
communication: “repeating, remembering, and working through.” His idea
was that we repeat what is forgotten, yet the repetition, itself an attempt to
master a traumatic perception, eludes our knowing it as such because the form
it takes is resistance to remembering. In Freud’s formulation: “we may say the
patient does not remember anything of what he has forgotten and repressed,
but acts it out. He reproduces it not as a memory but as an action; he repeats it,
without, of course, knowing that he is repeating it” (150). Remembering is,
for Freud, the work of the mind, an experimental means for placing an event
into time that has already gone. More than historicization, remembering is
also a libidinal tie, needed to symbolize absence. In a curious way, it gives us
the freedom we bestow to the object. Working through memorializes these
efforts, permitting imagination its capacity to symbolize the meaning of the
past for today. What has already happened will not change, but we become
transformed. Imagination is brought closer to the work of mourning, where
we experience the relation between our history of resistance to self-under-
standing and the loss of the other.
Loewald (2000b) has suggested that one of the greatest challenges each
of us faces is to allow the past to be over in order for reality to be interpreted
anew. His history also bore the shadow of World War II; he was once a
student of Heidegger and was dismissed from the university because he was
Jewish. Loewald left his philosophical studies in 1933 for exile, fi rst going
to Italy to study medicine and then to the United States where he practiced
psychoanalysis. He, too, understood that what has passed cannot, after all, be
changed. Rather, in psychoanalytic terms, the past leaves to us its excesses,
what could not or would not be grasped at the time of the event but now must
124 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

be symbolized. Loewald calls this work responsibility. And, with a change in

grammar, he opens a psychological distinction between accepting responsibil-
ity for the past and taking responsibility for the past. Taking responsibility,
Loewald implies, leads only to blame, guilt, and defenses against our inheri-
tance. Accepting responsibility is to own, in the fullest sense, one’s relation to
the past, to accept responsibility for representing, indeed for symbolizing, a
new approach to an old object. In his discussion on the repetition compulsion,
Loewald (2000a) argues there is a mode of repeating that is moral and that
gives birth to a self. And while Loewald may not have thought about Freud’s
analysis with Bruno Walter, I can see Freud’s acceptance of a responsibility in
Loewald’s terms because Freud invited its symbolization. I think we can also
see this acceptance of responsibility as an address to our fi rst aesthetic confl ict,
where the mother’s beauty and mystery call forth our minds and our worries
over loss and where, as well, we have our fi rst fair play.
One of the most provocative descriptions of psychoanalysis I have come
across, one without defense, belongs to Jose Infante’s (1995) view of psycho-
analysis as “a therapy of fate” (61). Infante’s formulation emerged as he consid-
ered Freud’s short essay on creative writing and daydreaming, in which Freud
could not really answer the question of where creativity comes from. Calling
on the Oedipus myth, Infante suggests that a great deal of what goes on in the
analytic sessions is an attempt to construct a new meaning from what could
not be known at the time. Kristeva (1989) sees this as “the subject’s battle
with symbolic collapse” (24). Certainly this method of interpretation, this
“therapy of fate,” was one H.D. (2003) created in her haunting translation/
adaptation of Euripides’ play, Ion. She completed this book around 1937, just
a few years after her analysis with Freud but still in the time of war. I noted
earlier that H.D. left her analysis in 1934 with her writing difficulties and her
translation of Euripides’ play can be considered as her working through of
the analysis (Friedman 2002). In H.D.’s Tribute to Freud, we fi nd his note of
congratulation on the translation, thanking H.D. for introducing to him this
Greek tragedy. Ion, in her hands, grapples with that tragic difference between
the important and the unimportant, with what is forgotten but repeated, and
then with working through the sorrow and loss made from remembering and
so learning to speak freely.7
H.D.’s translation cannot be loyal to any originary moment, partly because
the play poses a problem of origin, deception, and truth, partly because H.D.
chose the genre of an adaptation, and partly because she desired Euripides’
play, written around 418 b.c., to enliven our contemporary world by urg-
ing us to remember our unconscious. So many ideas are noteworthy here,
 TRANSFERENCE PEOPLE 125

including how this ancient play becomes, in her hands, “ultra modern” (172),
and a means for testimony to take residence in what is enigmatic for inner
and external worlds. Through her transference, time is confused, events come
before memory. Words are the transfer points for readers to move between
antiquity and modernity: we see the tension made when the wish for rhap-
sodic peace meets the terror of contemporary war. Ever the analyst, H.D.
gives us some instructions as to how to read the play, which she has arranged
in eighteen sections separated by her commentary. She advises readers, before
considering her words, to read the play through to its ending. But we cannot
follow her advice since her commentary is also the play. Here again one can
fi nd her interest with the analysis of unconscious worlds, with what occurs
beneath speech, with what cannot be put into speech and is acted out before
it can be remembered. Here, too, we may fi nd H.D.’s transference people: the
boy, the woman, the poet, the Greek chorus, and then something lovingly
abstract: the affected semiotics and the affected poet. And in her coda, written
almost twenty years after the translation, she insists that readers be affected by
the untimely time of imagination: “Today, again at a turning-point in the history
of the world, the mind stands, to plead, to condone, to explain, to clarify, to illuminate
. . . each one of us is responsible to that abstract reality. . . . What now will we make
of it?”(255, ital. original).
What now will we make? Education is where the world is disclosed and
where minds must plead, argue, and exchange aesthetic confl icts. This urges
education into something unknown even as it must accept responsibility for
responding to events before memory. But this means education, too, occupies
the space of a therapy of fate. To accept this imagination, education will have
to suspend its defensive insistence on what is important and unimportant; it
will have to accept responsibility for its disclosure of words and things and
for symbolizing our negative capabilities. Indeed, our education will have to
learn to respond to its own unknown as it also destroys the defenses made
from what we know too well.
This page intentionally left blank.
 CHAPTER SEVEN

The Impossible Professions

School life also gives opportunity for a greater separation of hate

from love than was possible in the small family circle. At school,
some children can be hated, or merely disliked, while others can
be loved. In this way, both repressed emotions of love and hate—
repressed because of the confl ict about hating a loved person—can
fi nd fuller expression in a more or less socially accepted direction.
—Melanie Klein, “Love, Guilt and Reparation”

While not explicitly addressing the impossible professions, Klein proposes that
our emotional ties expand when we add to the fray the additional factor of
education. Look and see what else happens when we go to school. Life in
school is a veritable carnival of projective identifications and there are ample
opportunities for love and hate to grow into ideas and new projects. While
Klein imagined this education as providing a new emotional playground for
children, we don’t often understand the adult’s education as also providing an
occasion for diffusing love and hate. What may be forgotten in this transfer-
ence neurosis—education’s own artificial illness—is the way love and hate
animate the adult’s phantasies of the educational frame. This corner of the
impossible professions is deeply defended since it reaches into the internal
confl icts the professions would rather disclaim. Can the impossible profes-
sions learn to tolerate their own internal confl icts—their love and hate—and
analyze their education? Freud gives us a glimpse of what one is up against

127
128 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

when he suggested education as one of the impossible professions. The term

“impossible” has emotional impact and it turns out that the very thought of
the impossible professions takes us into the heart of our educational neuroses.
Freud’s (1925c) fi rst mention of “the impossible professions” found in
his preface to August Aichhorn’s educational text Wayward Youth addresses
the field of education. He may have worried what educators would make of
this association, whether our feelings might be hurt. So he concludes with an
assurance: “At an early stage I had accepted the bon mot which lays it down that
there are three impossible professions—educating, healing and governing—
and I was already fully occupied with the second of them. But this does not
mean that I overlook the high social value of the work done by those of my
friends who are engaged in education” (273). Let us note that Freud’s assur-
ance to educators comes wrapped in a negation, a statement that says, “but
this does not mean that . . .” or “It’s not what I think.” Should we then sup-
pose that the very thought of education causes disturbance?
That same year, Freud (1925b) published an article on negation describ-
ing its work as “a way of taking cognizance of what is repressed; indeed, it is
already a lifting of the repression, although not, of course, an acceptance of
what is repressed” (235–236). Repression is one of the many defenses of the
ego that services the gap between the unconscious and the conscious. With
it, the ego tries to solve a confl ict between an unacceptable idea and its affec-
tive force by doing away with the idea. To read these two articles together,
one can ask: If it is so well known that education is an impossible profession,
then why is it so emotionally difficult to accept? Freud’s negation—“but this
does not mean that”—in his preface to Aichhorn’s book may give us a clue. In
listening to this affected speech, one takes away “the no” to learn something
more about the nature of the objection. What might be revealed in looking
over our high social value? And, if negation signals “a lifting of repression,”
can returning the emotional force to the original idea of the impossible pro-
fessions herald education’s therapeutic action?
Freud (1925a) also published what we may think of today as a short com-
panion piece to both essays, carrying the title “Resistances to Psychoanaly-
sis.” It gives us another clue as to how we are affected by what the impossible
professions demand of us. There, he points out that the strongest resistance to
this second impossible profession, often cloaked in an intellectual objection, is
really an emotional reaction against psychoanalysis: “The majority of [resis-
tances to psychoanalysis] are due to the fact that powerful human feelings are
hurt by the subject matter of theory” (221). Theory itself hurts our feelings
and also may carry a defense against having our feelings hurt. This leads Freud
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 129

to the question of philosophy, which also burdens itself with this dual func-
tion. Its feelings will also be hurt by psychoanalysis because philosophy invests
in the idea of the observing ego as the sum total of mental life and so it, too,
runs into the problem of narcissism. To begin elsewhere is to point out that
the ego’s perceptions are already influenced by what it does not want to know,
including its mechanisms of defense against anxiety such as intellectualiza-
tion, repression, negation, and resistance. Again, the powerful feelings both
hurt and protected belong to the ego’s narcissism.
Throughout this essay on resistance, Freud (1925a) persists in hurting
feelings, listing three theories that incur a narcissistic blow: psychoanalysis
provides a psychological blow to human narcissism, prior to that was Darwin’s
theory, which constitutes a biological blow, and earlier than that, a cosmo-
logical blow occurs with Copernicus’s theory (221). These theories challenge
feelings that sustain and idealize self-regard, agency, and omnipotence. Each
theory supposes that everything once felt as true and intuitive must be ques-
tioned and exchanged for something far more disturbing and uncertain. Yet
giving up the pleasures of certainty create particular problems for conceptu-
alizing education in the impossible professions since certainty, or the doing
away of difference, is one of the hallmarks of narcissism. What can the impos-
sible professions make of these terrible blows since each theory asserts human
meaning as in confl ict with its need for certainty, that ideas will attempt to
ward off the chaos of life and death, and that our theories originate from,
repeat, and defend against the trauma of human existence? What are we to
make of the problem that, when we try to approach our narcissistic inven-
tions, which also seem like a good idea, narcissism is hurt?
Freud’s formulation of the impossible professions may still feel like a
blow to our professional narcissism. Surely the charge of narcissism is affect-
ing since the impossible professions take pride in their altruism, or their
neutrality, or their objectivity. In pointing out the problem of narcissism, we
are on the verge of exposing what is most subjective, protected, and fragile
about ourselves as we work. Analysis excites doubt over our ideals and may
challenge our libidinal investment in such things as status, certitude, the
legitimization of measures, and may even crush our ambitions for science.
The charge returns us to our own unwelcome excess, the ways in which
we do not give up our libidinal pleasures easily, but also how love turns
into hate, or suffers in its loss, and the onslaught of deceptions made when
we fi xate on our conscious intentions. The idea of an impossible profession
affects us because it proposes a constitutive discontinuity, a lack the profes-
sion represses, negates, and projects into others. The impossible professions
130 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

are a terrible remainder of what is most incomplete, arbitrary, and archaic

in us and in the events of working with others. We may be returned to the
chaos of experience, our fi rst impossibility, what Agamben (2007) in his
investigation of the nonrelation between knowledge and experience provoc-
atively calls “infancy.” We may be subject to our own revolting questions,
themselves a precursor to therapeutic action.
There is something ironic about narcissism, to say nothing about its own
particular impossibility. The impossible professions have their own gigan-
tic share, yet, without self-regard, the subject would be nothing. Narcissism,
however, is not without ambivalence since perfection is impossible and since
it is so easily crushed and susceptible to depressive illness where nothing seems
to matter at all. Can the impossible professions give a good account of their
depressive qualities? How might we think our quest for love and our desire
for knowledge as affecting our own educational imaginary?
The subjective, affected world of education involves the impossible pro-
fessions with what love and knowledge signify there. The paradox is that while
love and knowledge may well be our cause, together they create the links of
the social bond and the agony made when bonds are broken. Our relations
with love and knowledge are also where we feel most incomplete, lonely, and
alienated. And they electrify what is most private yet nonetheless expressed,
namely, our emotional situation conveyed by our passion, phantasy, projec-
tive identification, resistance, transference, and even empathy. These primary
experiences are the means for introjecting and projecting affectivity: opening
life to modes for caring for the self, and expelling what is hated in the self into
the world and therefore communicating distress by evading anxiety. Through
these procedures, we witness and negate enigmatic subjectivity. They are also
the emotional means for understanding, misunderstanding, and for tolerat-
ing not understanding, subtle events that compose our moment-to-moment
education ( Joseph 1997).
Readers are asked to keep in mind this affected world of subjectivity
as our fi rst impossibility so that we can explore with psychoanalytic inter-
est the impossible professions’ affective logic, beginning with phantasies of
education. This direction will advance a general commentary on learning
difficulties within the impossible professions. My speculation is that learning
in the impossible professions is the Achilles’ heel of our education, by which
I mean the culmination of an area of vulnerability and uncertainty that
we defend against in the name of qualifications and high social value. The
chapter blends clinical, philosophical, and literary discussion to suggest that
a large impossibility we all share is the problem of symbolizing experience
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 131

in education. Bion (2000) called this subjective play—the inevitable drama

when people meet—“emotional storms” (321). Why the impossible profes-
sions have such difficulty claiming their affected experience in education
is one part of the story. The other part has to do with instituting educa-
tion itself and whether we might imagine the experience of learning within
the impossible professions as an encounter with what is most subjective and
intimate about fi nding our selves with others. Indeed, if education is our
transference playground of love and hate, learning one’s emotional situation
provides the means for tolerating the very thought of this education. With
the idea of the impossible professions, the heart of this chapter explores the
problem of how education, as the transference of desire for knowledge and
love, may be transformed into a capacity to tolerate uncertainty. While sub-
jectivity is there without the impossible professions, the impossible profes-
sions cannot do without their subjectivity.

RESISTANCE

We should admit from the onset that representing the force of our subjectiv-
ity is no easy matter and theory itself gives us this clue. In his “Resistances to
Psychoanalysis,” Freud (1925a) picks on what a philosophy forgets. Critical
theory, too, has its points of forgetting even as it teaches us how historically
saturated any representation of subjectivity must be. Its index is dazzling.
What is missing, however, is how critical theory understands learning—why
the subject learns at all, how it is so susceptible to aggression, violence, lan-
guage, and to its own inhibitions, for instance, and what it does with itself
because of what others do to it. Typically, subjectivity is approached as the
container of external events, themselves formed by social procedures such as
ideology, consumerism, information, and prejudice. Yet this does not solve
the old question Ruti (2006) brings to the fore: “How shall I live?” (1). While
learning critical theory is an entirely different matter and commentaries on
learning this theory are found in the published lectures of Foucault (2005)
and Adorno (2001), for example, the desire for love and the quest for knowl-
edge as the revelatory learning, are overlooked. And we hardly ask that other
question: “How shall I learn?” These are the absences that impoverish our
capacity to consider the creative source of subjectivity or ponder its impressive
nature. To acknowledge our capacity for depth and phantasy as an outcome
of love and knowledge would mean that something about us couldn’t be pre-
dicted, controlled, or prevented. And this depth psychology challenges the
narcissistic foundations of the impossible professions.
132 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

In the archive of critical theory, one fi nds subjectivity cataloged as struc-

ture, as subjection, as an effect of discourse, as constructed, as suggestible,
and as supposition (Copjec 1994). There are claims of history without origin:
that subjectivity is a modern invention or is always essentially there (Foucault
2005). There are arguments in favor of its unaccountability (Butler 2005).
Subjectivity is subject to its own multiplicity and divisions, to conditions of
culture and language, to power and knowledge, and to what is illogical about
the hermeneutic circle (Butler 1997). Agency, too, will fi nd its cul de sac in its
myths of grandiosity, in solipsism, in the monad, and in abjection or perver-
sion (Kristeva 1982). We meet fallibility through the Cartesian subject who
turns doubts into certainty, in the postmodern subject who performs again
and again, and in the potential space of Da-Sein, who somehow throws itself
into being there (Frie 2003). There, too, lurks the tragic Kantian figure, the
“I think that accompanies all of my representations” who bumps up against its
aporia, the Kantian block that Adorno (2001) eulogies as “a kind of metaphysi-
cal mourning, a kind of memory of what is best, of something we must not
forget, but that we are nevertheless compelled to forget” (176). It will be left to
psychoanalysis to explore our historicity as an echo of our neotenic condition:
that we are born immature, that the need we have for the other fuses with
the demand for love and the other’s knowledge, that sexuality inaugurates the
beginning of sensate life, and that the human, the slowest creature to mature,
is subject to regression to an earlier state and so to mental breakdown, to the
ecstasy of creativity, and to the enigmatic message of others. We are compelled
to forget these experiences, our own Freudian block, so to speak.
These theoretical subjects, however, can only begin in their own edu-
cation. Our subjectivity, after all, is parented and education itself is its own
Oedipal complex. The child is always with adults who seem to know and
every adult was once a child who needed this mysterious knowledge. From
the beginning of life there is the breast that links what is enigmatic in objects
to the advent of Eros, phantasy, infantile sexual theory, and symbolization
(Klein 1930). This dreamy progression of love and knowledge may give us
clues as to why, when subjectivity staggers, there is loss, melancholia, nar-
cissistic injury, anxiety, and a lowering of self-regard, or why, in its expan-
siveness, there is overvaluation, narcissistic completion, omnipotence, manic
triumphalism, and bliss. And perhaps these human extremes cannot be oth-
erwise since subjectivity is always subject to both its drives and to what is
uncanny in their worldly representation. Subjectivity’s own condition, having
to interpret unknown reality and the other’s unconscious, is always at stake.
And learning itself suffers from this radical indeterminacy.
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 133

Our theories, too, repeat this strange malaise in that theory itself can
never quite say why we have theory at all. This aporia follows from Laplanche’s
(1999) critique of what he sees as missing from psychoanalysis: “analytic
theory ought to help us understand the status of theory itself ” (118). For
Laplanche, the exemplary theory that neither knows its own reason nor its
duration is infantile sexual theory made from the desire to know one’s origin.
What follows is that any theory will be an attempt to bind the enigmatic
message of the other. But this then means that our attempts to make, learn,
or apply theory carries out an erotic quality, what Lacan (1998a), bringing us
back to the question of education, describes as “a passion for ignorance” (121).
It can seem as if we do not want to know why we have theory.
These subjective events pose profound difficulties for education and edu-
cation has always posed problems for psychoanalysis. Can there be an educa-
tion for analysts that can exceed education’s neurotic, psychotic, and perverse
trends? Can there really be a psychoanalytic education, an education that can
analyze its own unfolding? Freud needed education to introduce the impos-
sible professions, yet in admitting education’s strange admixture of influenc-
ing and being influenced, psychoanalysis would need to distinguish itself from
it, but not be so far away that its own educational limits would be ignored
through acting out (Britzman 2003a). If the key concepts of psychoanalysis
challenge the empirical world and the thinker’s motivations in understand-
ing and not understanding, what would be the ground of the psychoanalyst’s
learning? The gigantic problem is whether the very thought of this education
can be put in the service of therapeutic action.

THIS IS NOT A THEORY

We can glimpse the magnitude of this educational dilemma—that is, the

problem of what specifically is therapeutic or pedagogical about our actions—
through controversies over the status of psychoanalytic theory and its clinical
practice. Can one event really lead into another? Where would one locate
transformation or meaningful change? Can measures of experience stabilize
the radical unknown of the unconscious? This confl ict may well be a con-
sequence of the psychoanalytic field since psychoanalysis may be the only
theoretical and practical intervention that turns its inceptions—the primary
one being the unconscious and its resistance to being known—back upon
itself. But this means that both theory and practice begin with the analyst’s
latency or ignorance and learning one’s own latency as one is in the midst
of it requires not only techniques that can tolerate not understanding but an
134 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

interest in questioning how and why experience and reality come to mat-
ter. “Analysis,” writes the philosopher Sarah Kofman (2007a) in her essay
on this impossible profession, “does not fit into any preexisting techne, even
if most of the arts can serve as its metaphoric models” (61). When think-
ing through Freud’s advice on learning the profession of psychoanalysis, she
wonders whether in fact psychoanalysis is a profession at all, or whether it
can only be expressed with the irony of Magritte’s painting of a pipe whose
words negates the image of a pipe. Kofman then comments: “This is Not a
Profession” (56). The techniques of psychoanalysis are not instructions, can-
not really be taught, but are themselves instructive. Psychoanalytic technique
is an event before memory, affecting both the meanings of learning and the
subject who learns. All of this transference alters the analyst’s sense of becom-
ing. In Kofman’s view, what is impossible about this profession is also its best
irony: analysis attempts to handle the uncontrollable through play.
The analyst can only approach the circulation of knowledge and love
through phantasy and the detours of free association. The term used to con-
tain what is inexpressible and insistent about this exchange of love and knowl-
edge—what is most influential and combustible for the analytic couple—is
the impressive transference. Indeed, the history of psychoanalysis as deferred
action is always affected by psychoanalytic process. History as well is latency
and so is no longer something to be uncovered since it carries, as Copjec
(1994) argues, “a simple impossibility: no historical moment can be comprehended
in its own terms. . . . This impossibility causes each historical moment to flood
with alien, anachronistic figures, spectres from the past and harbingers of the
future” (ix). The impossibility is uncanny and these archaic figures confused
in time and propelled by anxiety present what is inexpressible in the anticipa-
tion of the historical moment. The impossibility is that the transference, too,
is both resistance to history and means for history to be retroactively con-
structed, questioned, and symbolized.
Now wait just a minute, readers may be thinking. How can the transfer-
ence be both resistance and the means to its overcoming? So, here, let us pause
for an intellectual objection. Many critics consider psychoanalysis as caught in
its own miserable teleology. They argue that if resistance to psychoanalysis is
located in the unknowing ego, where the ego cannot know its own mecha-
nisms of defense, does not this view of the subject, which only psychoanalysis
proposes, create the resistance that is then confi rmed by its order of psycho-
analytic knowledge? The objections are that psychoanalysis is deterministic
as opposed to existential, that it causes the transference that it then inter-
prets, and that psychoanalysis invents identification with the psychoanalytic
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 135

object. These objections collapse with the psychoanalytic view of temporal-

ity, psychical working over, and deferred action. Psychoanalytic temporality
is recursive, overdetermined by our capacity for revision and what undergoes
translation is not the experience but what experience could not mean at the
time of its impact. Apprehension of the meanings of life’s events can only be
made retroactively: narratives from present knowledge animated by a mem-
ory fold back into itself and therefore affect the current significance of past
events. The story childhood tells of itself are those of an adult looking back at
what could not be understood at the time and this temporality means, among
other things, that we are at our most impressive when we do not know.
Yet the more one argues with psychoanalysis, the more emotionally
entangled one becomes and the more psychoanalysis seems to enjoy the objec-
tion. Indeed, psychoanalysis depends upon enlivening emotional life, our sus-
ceptibility to the other, and our capacity to passionately attach our love to
anything or anyone for no reason at all. However, these objections take us to
one of the confl icts the techne effectuates, noticed by Kofman (2007a) when
she turned psychoanalysis around to act on itself. If psychoanalysis, too, is
subject to the transference, how can the field interpret its own transference?
What would be the future of its own critique?
Near the end of his career, Freud (1937) attempted to analyze the psy-
choanalytic field with a concept he called “resistance to resistance” (239). He
also returned to the idea of psychoanalysis as the second impossible profession
where, given its constitution, he concludes “one can be sure beforehand of
achieving unsatisfying results” (248). This essay tries to specify when analy-
sis is over. But the problem of cure leads Freud back to the analyst who will
fail, particularly if the analyst has expectations and a plan to impose. Freud’s
admission leads to two significant tensions, one having to do with the ana-
lyst’s qualifications and the other with the limits of psychoanalysis. Notably,
the problem of endings and qualifications brings Freud back to education: he
questions the analyst’s translation of psychoanalytic education and even the
nature of education as such. Essentially, the impossibility of the professions
leads Freud to the impossibility of their education.
As for the analyst’s qualifications, Freud understands this education as
interminable: “But where and how is the poor wretch to acquire the ideal
qualifications which he will need in his profession? . . . in an analysis of
himself ” (248). Even this affected education cannot escape the impossible
professions since education itself may deceive and its powers misused. What
can it mean, after all, for one impossible profession to anchor itself in another
impossible profession? Freud was pessimistic whether psychoanalysis could
136 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

overcome its own education and learning psychoanalysis would be the Achil-
les’ heel of psychoanalysis, just as learning to be an educator would be for edu-
cation. Can any of the impossible professions escape the compliance, paranoia,
and destruction of questions, which also occur under the name of education?
The second tension is related to the limits of analysis, another aspect of educa-
tion. How can one conceptualize the force of resistance to resistance without
claiming a transcendental ego and thereby reinstituting a centered and unified
subject? What could be the other side of resistance? More resistance, it turns
out, but, this time, from the analyst’s side.
The analyst’s resistance to resistance, what Derrida (1998) justly called
“resistances of psychoanalysis,” is a remarkable, irreducible dimension of sub-
jectivity. There is no chance of unifying resistance through the ideas of ego,
defense, repetition compulsion, the drives, or the transference, since psychi-
cal reality is discordance and since no one escapes the force of the dynamic
unconscious, itself defi ned by what resists or what is not known. Indeed, the
other side of this impossibility goes under the name of therapeutic action,
also accompanying resistance but now as a form of working through. This
resistance, as Derrida argues, brings psychoanalysis to its own Kantian block:
“when one seeks to determine the unity of this concept . . . one encounters a
“resistance to analysis” that figures both the most resistant resistance, resistance
par excellence, hyperbolic resistance, and the one that disorganizes the very
principle, the constitutive idea of psychoanalysis as analysis of resistances”
(22). The curious and difficult qualities of psychoanalytic practice concern
the fact that the analyst, too, is affected by her or his transference and the
form it will take is the transference, an unconscious exchange of knowledge
and love but also hatred and aggression. The analyst is affected by her or his
resistance that must place self-knowledge into doubt. This disorganization
may lead to the analyst’s question of whose resistance is at stake in the psycho-
analytic field. It may also lend new meaning to the impossible profession, but
now from the vantage of what is impossible about self-analysis.
Like education, psychoanalysis is an affected science, if we mean by sci-
ence a capacity to present new conceptualizations that can revitalize how we
approach old dilemmas and impasses in thought and if we mean by affect,
a capacity to be impressed with such feelings as pleasure, anxiety, and dis-
pleasure as we go about our work. André Green (1999) proposes the work
of affect as “an encounter between the effects of the tensions aroused by the
object and the event . . . not only the limit of their effects, but at one and
the same time, a zone of interpenetration and a point of turning back. . . .
affect is a time of revelation” (226). In its potential to register and repudiate
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 137

differentiation, the affect’s oscillations are revealed. Alan Bass (2000), in

his inquiry into resistance to interpretation, posits this event as “the trauma
of Eros”: while love animates the individual, it is also where loss of love is
simultaneously effectuated. Contact itself is feared. Interpretation services
this difficult function, introducing or loosening the opposition affect con-
tains but also incurring an excess of meaning. What the interpretation pro-
poses is not the meaning of the affect, but an invitation to association and
then to analyze its processive function as it plays out in the analytic relation
(151). Here is where science is most affected because the problem becomes
not so much what belongs to affect, for affect itself is belonging, but rather
the wager is with affect as revelatory potential. Here is where affected science
may internalize its own subjectivity.
Affected science is also a creature of culture. Both education and psy-
choanalysis signify their procedures: the work is conducted in language and
silence, both are intersubjective endeavors, and again and again both posit
their own dilemmas for understanding, misunderstanding, and not under-
standing. As in culture, both professions repeat a constitutive asymmetry
made through the play of registration, difference, repudiation, and perhaps
significance. What separates the function of education and psychoanalysis,
however, is that even as psychoanalysis bears procedures of culture, it may
aspire to create experiences beyond culture’s dictate of adaptation. In its most
radical potential psychoanalysis is against adaptation. Christopher Bollas (cited
in Molino 1997) pointed to our significant problem with reality: we cannot
adapt to it since reality is always complex reality and is therefore “unavailable
for adaptation” (49). The tension is that reality is always interpreted reality
and so will contain its own unknown and our resistance to that.
This unknown reality is deepened by the event of our singularity that
structures and is structured by the movements of love, knowledge, and our
questions. Joyce McDougall (1995) celebrates this diversity: “The remarkable
aspect of human beings in their psychic structure—as in their genetic struc-
ture—is their singularity” (172). Singularity, itself without qualification, will
pressure what we come to imagine as cure. McDougall advocates for an “open
ethic of psychic survival” (224), which lends to resistance a new meaning. She
proposes that if psychoanalysis is to affect its own ethics, if the analyst is to
resist imposing her or his values onto the scene of shared phantasy and work
against normalization and objectification, then therapeutic action should be
thought of as that which sustains and expresses the creativity of psychic sur-
vival and include in this work the analysis of how it may be destroyed. This
second movement is where education may be questioned: how does education
138 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

destroy its potential? An open ethic of education involves a push toward cre-
ativity and a critique of what in this push may stop it short.

THE TRANSFERENCE

Was it really a coincidence that Freud fi rst mentions the impossible professions
in Aichhorn’s (1983) Wayward Youth? Or was he trying to say something emo-
tionally difficult about our education? Wayward youth are those who rebel, lose
their way, or become so overwhelmed by what the society demands of them
that they return these demands as the tantrums they feel them to be. These
wayward youth are subjected to all three impossible professions. They run
away, break the law, steal and lie, refuse to go to school, and destroy relation-
ships. They are hard to pin down. They are impossible youth whose solution
to distress is to cause more of it. They possess the uncanny capacity to induce
adult rigidity and its perverse reply of needing to teach a lesson. Aichhorn
presents this education as an Oedipal confl ict. It is a situation not so different
from the state of the impossible professions. All have their wayward tendencies:
of repeating the internal confl ict they attempt to address, of eschewing cri-
tique, and of displacing doubt into others. This is the other impossibility that
the professions disclaim, which may be why Freud’s approach was to return
the negated critique back to us, as if to say that there can be no psychoanalysis
without a critique of psychoanalysis, no education without a critique of educa-
tion, and no government without a critique of government.
In bringing the impossible professions to their radical indeterminacy,
Freud would confront a necessary failure of love and knowledge, something
tragic in the human condition. But he also supposed that the professional’s
learning would always be out of joint. Defenses against not knowing would
be a feature of these professions since they too belong to both historical reality
and psychical reality. Such agony plays within the impossible profession even
as the professions have a tendency to destroy identification with this anguish
by objectifying its subjects without really knowing why. Lacan (1998a), we
have seen, named this mystification “the passion for ignorance” (121). Even if
we admit this otherness in our ongoing education—that it is difficult for the
human to think otherwise than what it wants to know, or consider what else
occurs when something occurs in the mind—even if we admit arbitrariness
and accidents as setting the time of our work, our admission will not settle
an understanding of what resists and invokes claiming the unknown as the
central feature of subjectivity. Our subjectivity lends to this transference its
poignancy and urgency, our means of both needing and not wanting to know.
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 139

Surely here we can feel a sigh of ambivalence, for we need to communicate

not only a lost history of missed encounters and our dreams for them, but also
our present currents of loving and hating. In this view, every affect is transfer-
ence, a commentary of our bodies and our relations to others (Bird 1990). In
this view, too, there can be no life, no love, no thinking, without the transfer-
ence (Loewald 2000b).
The transference raises a particular dilemma for the impossible profes-
sions since learning itself is tied to the revelation of affect. The clinic of psy-
choanalysis, after all, reminds us that when push comes to shove, so to speak,
the analyst’s appeals to reality or to explanations of symptoms cannot, in and
of themselves, become the basis of cure. Information, while interesting, may
only invoke compliance or disbelief. For Lacan (1998b), the transference indi-
cates the split subject. He considers the transference as signifying an “area
of loss . . . a certain deepening of obscurantism, very characteristic of the
condition of man in our times of supposed information–obscurantism which,
without really knowing why”(127). It is both a loss and a defense against it, so,
in Lacan’s view, transference is where “doubt is recognized as certainty” (126)
and where a closing up occurs. To open again, the subject must be touched,
affected by the differentiating qualities of words (Fink 2002). The tension,
however, is that language, too, indicates an absence and falls short in what
it can say. There may be too many words or not enough, we don’t want to
listen, we already know that, or, through the protection of negation, we may
deny being affected by the other. And resistance to interpretation plays both
ways since the force of the affect is resisted by the idea of affect’s meanings.
The analyst’s contribution can feel to the patient as interference that the ana-
lyst may then experience as a narcissistic blow. Just when something seems so
theoretically right and here, too, is the transference, our ideas alone, even the
most practical ones, cannot be the sine quo non of communication.
The analyst’s urge to interpret, then, is subject to psychoanalysis. Win-
nicott’s (1986b) understanding of his need to interpret brings in the other
side of the resistance, whether it is situated in a need for disillusionment or in
hatred in the countertransference. Winnicott certainly lends a different flavor
to Freud’s worry that the analyst’s efforts will lead to unsatisfactory results,
for Winnicott considers mistakes in the form of the analyst’s fallibility as a
sign of hope. His solution is to analyze his own efforts and he tells us he gives
interpretations for two reasons:
(1) If I make none the patient gets the impression that I understand everything.
In other words, I retain some outside quality by not being quite on the
mark—or even by being wrong.
140 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

(2) Verbalization at exactly the right moment mobilizes intellectual forces . . .

I never use long sentences unless I am very tired. If I am near exhaustion
point I begin teaching. Moreover, in my view an interpretation containing
the word “moreover” is a teaching session. (167)

Winnicott feels his mistakes as needed proof of the failure of the analyst’s
omnipotence and as evidence of his difference from the analysand. But there
is also the analyst’s hate and fear. The idea of hate in the countertransfer-
ence, or the emotional response to the burden of practicing in an impossible
profession, is Winnicott’s (1992) great contribution for the analyst’s educa-
tion. It can be linked as well to the problem of teaching: whenever I hate
my students, I teach without them. As for analysis, teaching sessions may
indicate the analyst’s loss of hope and patience needed to maintain “some
outside quality.”
We can begin to see how education comes to be understood as the work-
ing through of the procedures of knowledge, whether these refer to techne
or psychical affectivity. Its impossibility does not so much reside in the sense
of its events but rather in what eludes the experience of education. When
Freud warned that psychoanalysis couldn’t realize itself and that its techne
would repeat the problem it attempted to grasp, he introduced difference—
a lack—into its own identity. As for education, it, too, would be subject to
the transference and to repeating the learning problems it attempts to solve.
While normative views of education promise a progression of knowledge and
an accumulation of best practice, seen from the idea of resistance to education
or what education resists, the promise of education begins with the transfer-
ence and its difference.
The impossible professions ask a great deal of us, which may be one rea-
son why we must fi rst say yes and no to them. The invitation, too, is difficult:
to think without the Hegelian absolute and its illusion that knowledge can
dialectically resolve its constitutive vulnerability and so become unified and
whole. We are asked to question the romance of our measures and ponder
what escapes meaning. We are urged to consider what else occurs when we
feel certain and without our questions, or, as Lacan (1998a) put it, try to notice
the “equation of thought and that which is thought of ” (105) as a symptom
of inhibition or closure. We are asked to consider the fundamental fantasy of
development without mistaking this wish for progress with the thing itself.
We are asked to ponder our narcissistic defenses. We are invited to wonder
why we have theory at all and we are urged to work from our ignorance.
What is left to think is the impossibility of our work, not so much from
the place of its failure or the adequacy of technique but rather from within
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 141

the areas of confl ict, where our work is most incomplete, and where we
are surprised by what we do not really know. I take heart from how Rich-
ard Polk (2006), in his description of Heidegger’s idea of inceptive think-
ing, described this work as “tentative and incomplete—a way for perpetual
beginners” (125). Yet I also believe that we need to understand much better
how difficult it is to think of oneself as always beginning, specifically in
the contexts of learning the impossible professions where we feel placed or
may feel we need to place ourselves in the opposite position of “the subject
supposed to know.” This impressive, narcissistic phantasy originates in the
child’s relation to the parent and persists in the transference to knowledge,
authority, and love. It is also that which instituted education itself sustains at
great cost to its creative potential.

A CLINICAL FRAGMENT

While Freud brought the idea of the impossible professions to their radi-
cal indeterminacy, the structural and emotional force of learning from this
uncertainty is daunting. This kind of learning welcomes and relies on our
personal confl ict, what is most unresolved about having to learn. The new
problem is to imagine one’s psychic survival as desire. Recall that McDou-
gall’s (1995) open ethic of psychic survival linked creativity to the critique of
that which destroys it. We can elaborate this open ethic, where the content is
under construction, by way of a clinical fragment. I draw on a few sessions in
my psychotherapeutic practice where I found myself and my patient surprised
by something we knew nothing about, namely, what it feels like to symbolize the
uncertainties of impossible professions. “Mr. B” was a graduate student working
toward his doctoral degree. We met weekly in psychotherapy over three years.
He sought psychoanalytic psychotherapy after becoming disillusioned with
the rituals and routines of cognitive behavioral therapy. Mr. B explained that
he suffered from panic attacks while trying to teach his students and now
wanted to understand them.
Mr. B is learning to become a university professor. It is something, he
says, that he always wanted to become, but worries whether he can teach in
front of students since it is in the classroom where he experiences his panic
attacks. In the beginning of our therapeutic work, he would report each week
on the panic’s arrival or delay: initially it came regularly, took his breath away,
stopped all sense of time, and cut off his thoughts. He had a number of rituals
to prevent these attacks, but the rituals themselves reminded him of the panic
and its dangers. When Mr. B described what he worried would happen while
142 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

teaching his students, he could only imagine running out of the classroom, or,
even worse, crumbling to the floor as his students watch him lose his mind,
the enigmatic resource needed to become a university professor. Sometimes
his anxiety would erupt when the question he asked his students was met by
their silence; when things went well, his thoughts might wander into this
dangerous territory, as if daring an enemy to strike. In more than a few of our
sessions we both speculated whether the class might invite his panic so that
he will dismiss them a few minutes early. But when, on good days, the panic
refused to show up, he worried that letting down his guard and thinking that
all could be well would be the condition of the panic’s return. So, for much
of the time, Mr. B stands guard against himself, but, in doing so, fi nds it dif-
ficult to become the teacher he desires to be. And he worried that he cannot
be a university professor if he cannot even stand in front of a class, if he can’t
stand teaching.
After months of exploring the microscopic movements of the panic’s
procedures, bodily disruptions, and affective geography, we both felt the
futility of our efforts in situating a precipitating factor. Stories of origin will
not be useful; the panic seems to come from nowhere. I began to wonder
if the topic itself—our relentless tracking of the elusive panic—was making
us nervous and that somehow, with our incessant examination, we were
following along the symptom’s footsteps, almost as if the therapy itself had
become the bad classroom. Yet unable to leave this class, in one session it
occurred to me to invite his thoughts on teaching and what he imagined the
teacher’s work entailed.
I learn that the teacher is an authoritative figure who always knows what to
do, what to say, and so never experiences confl ict, headaches, nausea, or anxiety.
Oddly, the teacher is the perfect narcissist. This phantom figure never experi-
ences awkward moments because the teacher knows all that there is to know
about teaching before stepping into the class. The teacher is so perfect that he
doesn’t need to use any teaching techniques and in this phantasy the students
soak up the teacher’s superb knowledge as well as admire his absolute com-
mand. I know this teacher well. Its image has taunted me for years. Mr. B, too,
understands this phantasy as one that agonizes and excites him. It functions to
chastise him for the uncertainty he feels while teaching and promises a teaching
without confl icts. I feel I am about to step onto my own thin ice, for if I offer
any advice on what a teacher is or does or idealize my experience as a model to
emulate, I, too, engage my own narcissistic phantasies and be caught in the tidal
wave of the transference. I would also assume the position of the authority that
torments him, my identification with the aggressor. In these helpless feelings
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 143

and my defenses against them, in the transference/countertransference nexus, I

begin to notice my need to have a teaching session and say, “moreover.” I find
myself wanting to help Mr. B out of the phantasy but then wonder if this desire
is a part of the phantasy. So, I, too, am uncertain and I stay with what is slippery
in our relationship, with what I do not know. I wonder aloud about psycho-
analysis, sometimes known for wrecking authority by questioning the veracity
of certainty. I say: “Isn’t it funny that Freud called teaching one of the impos-
sible professions? It really is impossible.” We both felt relief that our respective
impossibilities were not a private sentence but a feature of our relationship. And
whereas the idea of the impossible professions may to lead us into critique, in
this instance, it opened emotional contact needed for symbolization and cre-
ativity in the therapy. We could leave the classroom together.
That teaching and learning incur emotional upset, that we teach when
we don’t want contact, or that we worry the contact will crush is neither
news to anyone learning to teach nor original for those who live its travails.
That we are affected by the act of learning itself, however, is a condition that
meets education’s passion for ignorance. Learning animates projections of our
internal world of object relations and defenses against them through bodily
communication: panic attacks, lack of nerve, loss of words, or what is more
commonly thought of as stage fright. Who wouldn’t be scared by the subject
presumed to know that, more often than not, takes the form of education
itself? Symbolizing bodily affects are rarely considered as relevant to learning
or to teaching. It may be because both knowledge and the teacher’s body are
depersonalized or because there is something about learning and teaching,
something about being educated that is hard to stand or even admit. There is
something abject about our work that feels like a personal defeat (Britzman
2006). Indeed, Kristeva (1982) suggests that feelings of abjection are “a kind
of narcissistic crisis: it is witness to the ephemeral aspect of the state called
narcissism” (14) that implies not just fragility but loss itself, an absence that
may inaugurate and destroy the desire for language.
These oscillations, or this narcissistic crisis, are conveyed through the
transference. Somehow our doubts become burdened with certainty and fate.
We worry about our qualifications, wondering, for instance, whether we have
the right to teach, but then are certain that others have this right. We become
anxious over whether we are able to withstand what we imagine the students
want and become convinced that students are becoming more needy and less
prepared. We wonder if the profession has already lost what some have called
“the war of education,” but may be puzzled at how besieged and overwhelmed
we feel. These anxieties, mirrored through the projective identification of
144 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

education, combine aggression with terrific idealizations. They are the condi-
tions for doubt to transform itself into certainty and for the narcissistic crisis
to confuse what Kristeva (1982) sees as “spatial ambivalence (inside/outside
uncertainty) and an ambiguity of perception (pleasure/pain)” (62). What fol-
lows are feelings of loss and then a turning of the defense back upon the self:
some of us will believe with a terrible conviction that there are no means we
possess to overcome barriers to learning and the barriers are experienced as
punishment for all that we lack. Many of these anxieties crowd out the desire
to teach and more often than not our education may render us more helpless
by its disavowal of its own feelings about helplessness, hate, and fear. We seem
to forget the matter of subjectivity, or reduce it to the confi nes of technique,
burdening newly arrived teachers with shiny rubrics, evidence-based teaching
tips, and an avalanche of advice that foreclose the emotional storms and aes-
thetic confl icts that are constitutive features of working within uncertainty.
This is another dimension of Winnicott’s (1992) hate in the countertransfer-
ence, when the educational institution, which is always made by people, treats
its subjects as an empty vessel.

THE SUBJECT SUPPOSED TO KNOW

Lacan’s (1998b) provocative formulation of “the subject supposed to know”

is a story of what happens to us when we demand knowledge from the other
because we believe the other already knows. But its address always misses its
destination. As soon as there is a subject supposed to know, there is the trans-
ference, “bound up with desire as the nodal phenomenon of the human being”
(231). The quest is impossible, for how can we actually possess the other’s love
and knowledge? It is an adventure in alienation since the “I think” cannot
accompany this representation. Indeed, what is encountered is the nagging
thought that absolute knowledge, a narcissistic knowledge without limit or
vulnerability, is not only out of reach but belongs to someone else. In Lacan’s
view, one of the most difficult tasks of analysis and of thinking, whether
it takes the form of theory or clinical practice, is the destruction, through
interpretation, of “the subject presumed to know” (267). What is destroyed
is identification. The terrible paradox is that the subject presumed to know,
there in times of uncertainty, and when love is demanded, is also the condi-
tion for both thinking and obscurantism.
The subject supposed to know is a pernicious figure in the history of
educational institutions and, as such, is a founding problem of what instructs
pedagogy (Derrida 2002). There really is no word that orients thinking to
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 145

the possibility of what it is that structures, precedes, and renders intelligible

pedagogical action. There is no word that contains something like how the
givenness of a pedagogical act is given. And our theories of pedagogy rarely
venture into the question of why we have theory at all. Yet we imagine peda-
gogy as the accomplishment of the subject presumed to know. It is here that
we exchange thinking for obscurantism and this is a feature of any field of
knowledge. Adorno’s (1991) review, “The Artist as Deputy,” may be read as
a commentary on the work of the impossible. I understood his essay as pro-
posing philosophy as a fourth impossible profession. The essay discusses the
poet Paul Valéry’s study of the impressionist painter Degas to comment on the
problem of thinking the impossible.
Adorno conjures an imagined reader who objects to his qualifications in
taking on this topic. Readers, he writes, may take “offense when a philosopher
talks about a book by an esoteric poet about a painter obsessed with craft”
(101). The nature of the offense is more than who has the right to transgress so
many academic boundaries, although at fi rst glance this problem of qualifica-
tion may concern some readers. However, it is the topic itself that will cause
consternation since what Adorno is after is the destruction of reality as given
and our feelings that we must adapt and comply to it. Adorno is most con-
cerned with a transgression or alienation internal to the act of representing the
thinking subject. Adapting to reality, he supposes, is like giving up on having
to think. In Adorno’s view, there can be no loyalty to an original object since
thought itself is never adequate to the object, and since there is something
tragic and comic about conceptualization as such. We cannot accompany our
representations because of negation, bungled actions, and, a constitutive limit:
the mind does not have the capacity to comment upon what its thinking does
to thoughts. And thought can be neither reconciled by better language nor
clarified with better knowledge. Thinking then is thinking antimony since
it expresses its own limitations and cannot know its excess. The very act of
thinking invokes the limit of thought.
Yet to meet Adorno’s list of characters in his essay on Valéry—the philoso-
pher, the esoteric poet, and the obsessed painter—may mean that we readers,
too, must wonder if there is also made here transference with being “obsessed
with craft” (101). After all, this obsession, however sublimated, signals a con-
fl ict with the nature of our own incompleteness. Adorno uses the esoteric poet
and an impressionist artist, both of whom may be accused of wrecking reality,
as a critique of the philosopher’s thinking that can mistake its assertions for the
object it seeks to know. Herein lies the problem. Adorno needs his imagined
objector to pressure the essay from within to push his critique beyond the limit
146 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

of accepted ideas of mastery, expertise, and even the ideal, so common to both
the fields of art and philosophy, of the natural genius. These are the qualifica-
tions of the subject presumed to know. The cost of writing without qualifi-
cation can be catastrophic. While commenting on Valéry’s ideas on Degas,
Adorno’s simplest sentence is also advice: “It is better to be ruined attempting
the impossible” (107). Here is where he summarized his own obsession as a
revolt against the affirmations that congratulate the expert.
Adorno insists that great art and great philosophy demand from both
spectator and creator a labor of thought that can think against itself. He may
be asking us to write our own literature or perhaps to see in our labor an
uncanny relation of nonidentity. Through this contradiction, the spectator
must be willing to enter that which does not exist but presents as real. For the
spectator, thinking itself becomes an act of creation and this act transforms
the thinker, rather than the art encountered. As for the creator of the art, she
or he must attempt the impossible by making something from nothing even
as, in the words of Valéry:

Each step forward makes it more beautiful and more remote. The idea of
completely mastering the technique of an art, of achieving the freedom to
employ its means as confidently and as easily as we do our limbs and our
senses in their ordinary functions, is one which inspires a few men to infi nite
determination, struggle, practice, and agony. (Valéry cited in Adorno, 103)

The desire for art and the impossible mastery of its technique leads to
the agony of trying to represent something that does not exist, yet still exerts
a claim. Perhaps this identification with what has never existed is also repa-
ration of sorts. Adorno suggests a new impossibility: that art and writing
about it “acts as the representative of what we might one day be” (107). This
transference then concerns the transfer of affects into creative acts. Artists and
writers seem to accept the emotional situation that there are no promises for
what tomorrow brings and they are still willing to risk inspiration and confi-
dence. To become what we have never been is to wager our craft along with
the obsessions that express, without qualification, a gigantic measure of our
ignorance. Vulnerable to error and accidents and subject to radical indetermi-
nacy, we wager our ignorance against “the subject supposed to know.”

“MAKING THE BEST OF A BAD JOB”

Bion’s (2000) last paper has the difficult title “Making the Best of a Bad Job.”
Its brevity presents to the impossible professions a new sense of both ignorance
 THE IMPOSSIBLE PROFESSIONS 147

and impossibility. Bion does not mention education, although its beginning
tells us a great deal about the impossible professions’ opening dilemma as well
as Klein’s carnival of affect found in school:

When two personalities meet, an emotional storm is created. If they make

sufficient contact to be aware of each other, or even sufficient to be unaware
of each other, an emotional state is produced by the conjunction of these
two individuals, and the resulting disturbance is hardly to be regarded as
necessarily an improvement on the state of affairs had they never met at all.
But since they have met, and since this emotional storm has occurred, the
two parties to this storm may decide to ‘make the best of a bad job.’ (321)

With or without awareness, whenever people meet, they create with each
other an emotional state. We might ask, “Who can live there?” This trans-
ference may well be our fi rst emotional storm and the means for conveying
it. For the impossible professions, everything is at stake in what happens
here and, in this sense, the bad job Bion points to has more to do with our
capacity to meet at all, to make contact with one another, than it does with
the work itself.
So while Bion begins with these hurt feelings, adding more to Freud’s
view of our affected professions, he advises that the analyst’s work will consist
in trying to further this emotional contact which he believes is the basis for
creating a “good account” (322). How hurt feelings can be noticed and used
is always the question. Part of a good account, I believe, depends on think-
ing of affect as revelatory and as indicating a collapse of our pedagogical or
therapeutic theme. Symbolizing emotional storms is the inevitable work of the
impossible professions, and, in my view, this is the responsibility that their
education must learn to represent. And giving a good account as to what is
happening when we meet may encourage us to ask our own questions, begin-
ning with “how am I to learn?”
Our educational challenges are great, contributing interminable feel-
ings to the impossible professions and thus their need for self-analysis. Perhaps
what is most impossible is the question: what do we understand about our
own ignorance? The wager for education in the professions is whether we
can stand the ideas and feelings made when ignorance takes its own novel
time, not as passion for itself, not as narcissistic defense, and not as disclaiming
affect and our impressive subjectivity. Rather, what if our education helped
us understand ignorance as a condition of not actually knowing. The paradox
is that not knowing can be represented through the wandering mind and the
unconscious, which opens a potential space that our instituted education, in
148 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

its own passion for ignorance, more often than not, fears and even hates. This
is education’s secret narcissism. When emotional contact is feared and reality
is treated as compliance, education’s depressive anxiety reverts to its paranoid/
schizoid position, a terrible anxiety where too much is known, fi xed, and cer-
tain. Admitting that we actually do not know what may occur as we go about
learning our work may well add a third dimension to McDougall’s ethic of
psychic survival. Recall that this ethic suggests our obligation is to attempt to
encourage psychic creativity and an awareness of how it may be destroyed. I
believe we can add to this the paradox of representing not knowing as a means
to open psychic survival to its own otherness and to consider this ignorance as
where we learn to tolerate, without qualification, affect’s revelatory potential.
Bion proposes a difficult ignorance made when we meet one another. He
believes we learn and meet the other only with “half our wits about us” (329).
There are at least three sides to his Oepidal claim. First, we may wonder which
half of our wits is being conveyed through our work. Second, Bion may have
been referencing the radical uncertainty created when two people meet that
he calls “emotional storms” (321). On this view, two halves do not make a
whole. And third, he may be greeting the unconscious, that other place of
half our wits, the one hardly known yet nonetheless insists on laughing. In
my view, one of the large problems we face when trying to make the best of
a bad job is whether we can stand the very thought of this indeterminacy as
our education, as the element without qualification, and as the condition that
grants to our imagination the grace needed for its therapeutics. After all, even
with our Achilles’ heel, we can still walk.
 Notes

NOTES TO CHAPTER ONE

1. Bion (1997) writes: “If a thought without a thinker comes along, it may be what
is a ‘stray thought’, or it could be a thought with the owner’s name and address on it, or
it could be a ‘wild thought.’ The problem, should such a thought come along, is what to
do with it” (27). Later in this short untitled essay, Bion recalls his own dreamy childhood
states of “idling way my time, thinking in this way—a way I could describe as being
almost thoughtless. If, as a child, I had been caught at it, somebody would have said,‘Why
on earth don’t you find something to do?’” (32). Indeed, why on earth do we dream?

NOTES TO CHAPTER FIVE

1. A great deal of discussion occurs on the idea of emotional intelligence and the
teacher’s need to develop with students the mastery of positive thoughts and motiva-
tion. For an example of this approach, see, for instance, Goleman (2000). Pitt and
Brushwood-Rose (2007) have formulated a stringent critique of its use in educational
settings, suggesting that the application of the measures of emotional intelligence
“may appeal to educators because it responds to important worries without strain-
ing at or placing under scrutiny education’s dream of knowing what the problem is
and how to solve it” (2). In other words, emotional intelligence cannot arrive at the
problem of its signification. I’ll set this discourse aside to propose a psychoanalytic
orientation to the symbolization of the teacher’s affect.
2. Kant (1965) argued that human knowledge has two irreducible sources:
objects given to perception and thoughts about them. “Without sensibility no object
would be given to us, without understanding no object would be thought. Thoughts
without content are empty, intuition without concepts are blind” (93). Bion (1993b)
would use Kant’s formulation for his idea of “thoughts without a thinker” (165) and
“empty thoughts” (111).
3. The word “object” is one of the most problematic terms in psychoanalysis,
partly because in everyday use the object is associated with objectification and thing-
ness and is a way to oppose the subject and partly because there is not much agreement

149
150 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

on the valence of the term. It refers to what is outside the self, objects of attraction and
disgust taken into the self, forming phantasies of the world and of others. The object
can be a “part object” referring to bodily zones and its libidinal aims. Although it is
partial, for Klein the object refers to the ways aspects of others are identified with and
endowed by phantasies of a person’s dynamics such as aggression, hate love, and good-
ness. In this sense, objects constitute object relations. They are unstated yet enacted
theories of being with others, and are given their afterlife phantasy. To distinguish this
mental constellation, I follow Klein’s spelling: phantasy.
4. Aulagnier (2001) proposes as a developmental achievement of children the
idea of secret thinking when they realize a statement of the mother can be doubted
and questioned without her knowing that.
For this choice to be made, a minimum of autonomy in thinking must be
accorded the I from the outset; the fi rst result of this autonomy will be
the ability to think secretly. . . . It is a pleasure that is reinforced by the
unexpected discovery that, despite the little real power possessed at this
stage in terms of bodily autonomy, despite one’s state of dependence for the
satisfaction of one’s needs, despite the vital demand for love to which one is
subjected, in the register of thinking the Mother may be just as much at your mercy
as you are at hers. (152–153)
Secret thinking, on this view, is never given up, but the pleasure attained is contra-
dictory since while secret thinking allows the pleasure at having one’s own mind, a
part of the pleasure is tied to the child’s aggression made in relation to the other who
cannot acknowledge and may even punish the child for having her or his own mind.
What is secret about these thoughts are feelings of hostility and pleasure.
5. I have borrowed the word “tailpiece” from Winnicott (2001), who ends his
book with a short paradox concerning the theoretical beginnings of the infant, itself
a strange use of theoretical since it references what is there but is yet to be made. This
tension is what Winnicott calls “the conception-perception gap” (151).
6. The early history of countertransference as an individual failing of the analyst
to contain her anxieties, has affected, for some, the ways clinical work is written
about. Bolognini (2001) for example, suggests that not only must the analyst’s “good”
veneer be disillusioned, but also one of the greatest challenges is trying to understand
the truth of one’s feelings as it relates to the one who feels: “What an analyst is called
on to do . . . if conscientiously invested in the countertransference work of self-
analysis, is to tell himself the truth, beyond any idealization and in the interests of his
own patients. This is both our right and our obligation” (129).

NOTES TO CHAPTER SIX

1. Hilda Doolittle (1886–1961), born in the United States, was a modernist

poet, translator, and essayist who lived most of her life in the UK. She was involved
 NOTES 151

with the modernist literary movement, itself an attempt to open language—through

cinema, dance, poetry, literature, visual arts, theater, and music—to its symbolic con-
fl icts. In the time frame of my essay, H.D. was immersed in psychoanalytic circles in
London, Berlin, and Vienna. Her friendship with Havelock Ellis and support from her
longtime companion, Bryher, gave her entrance into Freud’s psychoanalytic practice.
For a robust, scholarly discussion of her life and her circle of friends in relation to
the letters she wrote, see Friedman 2002. For what is perhaps the fi rst discussion of
H.D.’s testimony to Freud from the vantage of what Rose (1986) has called the “vexed
relation between actuality, memory, fantasy which is the domain of the Freudian
unconscious” (14), and then the impasse made during the analysis, see Rose 1986. My
reading of Freud’s request that H.D. never defend him departs from Rose’s discussion
since I am interested in what it might mean to defend psychoanalysis without becom-
ing defensive, or proposing a defense of psychoanalysis as a defense of the imagination
and its freedom.
2. The phrasing “transference people” was the result of my libidinal misreading
of Meltzer and William’s (1988) chapter on love at fi rst sight. It describes our capac-
ity for passionate emotional attachment to strangers and the accompanying wish for
beautiful, magical intimacy. It is the fi rst rush of the mind in love with a stranger that
caused me to fall, headlong, into my misreading. The sentence is: “Our minds are
full of characters in search—not of an author, for we ourselves are the author—but of
players to fit the part. Thus does transference people the intimate area of our lives”
(38). So, you see, it is not “transference people” but the idea that the purpose of the
transference is not just to project our style of loving into the other, but also to take
others, including their style of loving, into our minds.
3. Freud’s work, along with others, was publicly burned in Berlin on May 10,
1933. Just three years earlier, in 1930, Freud traveled to Berlin, a lively center for
both psychoanalysis and the arts. His trip is documented in the correspondence with
Jones, but one can also see today a picture of Freud boarding a plane in Berlin in 1930
found on the Berlin homepage of the Freud Lacan Society. (See Paskauskas 1995 for
the correspondence and www.freud-lacan-berlin.de for the picture.) Whereas in 1933
Freud’s books were burned, the Jewish Museum of Berlin held an exhibition (April
7–September 22, 2006) celebrating Sigmund Freud’s 150th birthday. (See www.
juedisches-museum-berlin.de). Edmundson’s (2007) study of Freud’s last years details
Freud’s life in Vienna during the Nazi takeover and his reception in London during
his last year of life. The study is noteworthy in so many ways; perhaps the main one
concerns Freud’s relentless interest in the problem of thinking as a means to respond
to instinct and fundamentalism in politics and in religion.
4. Entartete Musik or degenerate, unnatural music consists of works by composers
suppressed or displaced during 1930–1940 in the Third Reich. Decca Record Com-
pany Limited, London, has released a series of recordings under this name, which
spans opera, operetta, symphonic and chamber music, as well as cabaret and music
influenced by African American jazz and South American dance. Most, but not all, of
152 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

the music was made by Jewish composers. In 1938, the Nazis staged an exhibition of
this forbidden music in Dusseldorf. They also held an exhibition in Munich of Entart-
ete Kunst (Degenerate Art) (see Dümling, 1993).
5. Walter did conduct in Vienna during 1933 and H.D. may have seen him in
performance as she often went to both the symphony and the opera during her stay
there. Walter was considered one of the foremost interpreters of German music. He
was based in Vienna from 1933 to 1936, where his programming at the Vienna Phil-
harmonic during those years ranged from Kurt Weil’s symphonies to Beethoven and
Mahler. In 1935, Walter published a pamphlet, “On the Moral Forces of Music” in
which he argued that music’s toleration of dissonance has the potential to bring out
the best in humanity (see Ryding and Pechefsky 2001, 240–248). In 1936, Nazis
disturbed his performance with the Viennese Philharmonic in Vienna and Walter
received a death threat for a concert there with Marian Anderson. He left with his
family that year, eventually to settle in the United States.
6. I am grateful to Sharon Sliwinski for pointing out this published interview and
to Alice Pitt for her German translations. As we walked in the Jewish Museum of Ber-
lin in October 2006, Pitt pointed out the Arendt televised interview and translated
from German to English what Arendt said (see Arendt 2005).
7. Foucault’s (2001) lecture on Ion presents this play from the vantage of the
Greek Parrhesias or the capacity to speak the truth freely or to speak freely to care for
the self. Ion was a breakthrough play in that it is not the Greek gods who tell mortals
the truth but rather that there is now a human struggle for the truth. Foucault puts it
this way: “human beings must manage, by themselves to discover and tell the truth”
(44). While not citing H.D.’s translation at all, like H.D., Foucault uses this play as a
portal to our contemporary problems with telling the truth, free speech, and living
an artistic life, which for Foucault concerned care of the self. He leaves us with the
question of education: “What is the importance of telling the truth, knowing who is
able to tell the truth, and knowing why we should tell the truth?” (170).
 References

Adorno, Theodor W. 1991. The artist as deputy. In Notes to literature. Vol. 1. Trans.
Sherry Weber Nicholsen and ed. Rolf Tiedemann. 98–108. New York: Colum-
bia University Press.
. 1992. Mahler: A musical physiognomy. Trans. Edmund Jephcott. Chicago: Uni-
versity of Chicago Press.
. 1998. Education after Auschwitz. In Critical models: interventions and catchwords.
Trans. Henry W. Pickford. 191–204. New York: Columbia University Press.
. 2001. Kant’s critique of pure reason. Trans. Rodney Livingstone and ed. Rolf
Tiedemann. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
. 2006. History and freedom: lectures 1964–1965. Trans. Rodney Livingstone and
ed. Rolf Tiedemann. Malden, MA: Polity Press.
. 2007. Dream notes. Trans. Rodney Livingstone and ed. Christoph Gödde and
Henri Lonitz. Malden, MA: Polity Press.
Agamben, Giorgio. 2007. Infancy and history: on the destruction of experience. Trans. Liz
Heron. London: Verso.
Aichhorn, August. 1983. Wayward youth. New York: Northwestern University Press.
Arendt, Hannah. 1958. The human condition. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
. 1993a. Between past and future: eight exercises in political thought. New York:
Penguin Books.
. 1993b. The crisis of education. In Between past and future: eight exercises in politi-
cal thought. 173–196. New York: Penguin Books.
. 2005. What remains? The language remains: A conversation with Gunter
Gaus. In Essays in understanding, 1930–1954: formation, exile, and totalitarianism.
Ed. Jerome Kohn. 1–23. New York: Schocken Books.
Aulagnier, Piera. 2001. The violence of interpretation: from pictogram to statement. Trans.
Alan Sheridan. London: Brunner-Routledge.
Badiou, Alain. 2005. Handbook of inaesthetics. Trans. Alberto Toscano. Stanford: Stan-
ford University Press.
Bass, Alan. 1998. Sigmund Freud: the question of a weltanschauung and of defence.
In Psychoanalytic versions of the human condition: philosophies of life and their impact on
practice. Ed. Paul Marcus and Alan Rosenberg. 412–446. New York: New York
University Press.

153
154 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

. 2000. Difference and disavowal: The trauma of Eros. Stanford: Stanford Univer-
sity Press.
Bick, Ester. 1987. Teacher, counsellor, therapist: toward a defi nition of the roles. 1972.
In The collected papers of Martha Harris and Ester Bick. Ed. Meg Harris Williams.
311–321. Pershire: Rolland Harris Educational Trust.
. 1996. Child analysis today. 1962. In Melanie Klein today: developments in theory
and practice. Vol. 2, Mainly Practice. Ed. Elizabeth Bott Spillius. 168–176. London:
Routledge.
Bion, Wilfred. 1993a. A theory of thinking. In Second thoughts: selected papers on psycho-
analysis. 110–119. London: Karnac Books.
. 1993b. Second thoughts: selected papers on psychoanalysis. London: Karnac Books.
. 1994a. Experiences in groups, and other papers. London: Routledge.
. 1994b. Learning from experience. Northvale, NJ: Jason Aronson.
. 1997. Taming wild thoughts. Ed. Francesca Bion. London: Karnac Books.
. 2000. Making the best of a bad job. 1979. In Clinical seminars and other works.
321-331. London: Karnac Books.
Bird, Brian. 1990. Notes on transference. In Essential papers on transference. Ed. Aaron
H. Esman. 331–361. New York: New York University Press.
Bolognini, Stefano. 2001. The‘kind-hearted’ versus the good analyst: empathy and
hatred in the countertransference. In Squiggles and spaces. Vol 2, Revisiting the
work of D. W. Winnicott. Trans. Don Var Green and Anthony Molino, ed. Mario
Bertolini, Andreas Giannakoulas, and Max Hernandez. 120–129. London:
Whurr.
Britzman, Deborah P. 1998. Lost subjects, contested objects: toward a psychoanalytic inquiry
of learning. Albany: State University of New York Press.
. 2003a. After-education: Anna Freud, Melanie Klein and psychoanalytic histories of
learning. Albany: State University of New York Press.
. 2003b. Practice makes practice: A critical study of learning to teach. Rev. ed. Albany:
State University of New York Press.
. 2006. Novel education: psychoanalytic studies of learning and not learning. New
York: Peter Lang.
Butler, Judith. 1997. The psychic life of power: theories of subjection. Stanford: Stanford
University Press.
. 2005. Giving an account of oneself. New York: Fordham University Press.
Copjec, Joan. 1994. Introduction. In Supposing the subject. Ed. J. Copjec. vii–xiii. Lon-
don: Verso.
Derrida, Jacques. 1994. Specters of Marx: the state of the debt, the work of mourning, and the
new international. Trans. Peggy Kamuf. New York: Routledge.
. 1998. Resistances of psychoanalysis. Trans. Peggy Kamuf, Pascale-Anne Brault
and Michael Nass. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
. 2002. Who’s afraid of philosophy? Right to philosophy. Trans. Jan Plug. Stanford:
Stanford University Press.
 REFERENCES 155

Doidge, Norman. 2007. The brain that changes itself: stories of personal triumph from the
frontiers of brain science. New York: Viking.
Dümling, Albrecht. 1993. The significance of “Entartete Musik” for the past and
the present. In Korngold’s Das Wunder der Heliane. Trans. Phillip Weller. Decca
recording. B Schott’s Sohne, Mainz, Germany.
Edmundson, Mark. 2007. The death of Sigmund Freud: the legacy of his last days. New
York: Bloomsbury USA.
Feder, Stuart. 2004. Gustav Mahler: A life in crisis. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Felman, Shoshana. 1987. Jacques Lacan and the adventure of insight: psychoanalysis in con-
temporary culture. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
. 2003. Writing and madness: literature/philosophy/psychoanalysis. Trans. Martha
Noel Evans. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Fink, Bruce. 2002. Knowledge and jouissance. In Reading Seminar XX: Lacan’s major
work on love, knowledge, and feminine sexuality. Ed. Suzanne Bernard and Bruce
Fink. 21–46. New York: State University of New York Press.
Fodor, Jerry. 2007. Headaches have themselves: A review of “Consciousness and its
Place in Nature,” by Galen Strawson. In London Review of Books. 29(10): May
24, 9–10.
Forman, Maurice Buxton, ed. 1960. The letters of John Keats. 4th ed. London: Oxford
Univ. Press.
Foucault, Michel. 2001. Fearless speech. Ed. Joseph Pearson. Los Angeles: Semiotext(e).
. 2005. The hermeneutics of the subject: lectures at the Collège de France, 1981–
1982. Trans. Graham Burchell and ed. Frederic Gros. New York: Palgrave-
Macmillan.
. 2006. History of madness. Trans. Jonathan Murphy and Jean Khalfa and ed.
Jean Khalfa. New York: Routledge.
Freud, Anna. 1974. Four lectures on psychoanalysis for teachers and parents. 1930. In
The Writings of Anna Freud. Vol. 1, Introduction to psychoanalysis and lectures for child
analysts and teachers. 1922–1935. 73–133. New York: International Universities
Press.
. 1995. The ego and the mechanisms of defence. 1936. In The writings of Anna
Freud. Vol. 2, The ego and the mechanisms of defense, rev. ed. Trans. and revised
Cecil Baines. Madison: International Universities Press.
. 1969. Doctoral Award Address. 1967[1964]. In The writings of Anna Freud.
Vol. 5, Research at the Hampstead Child-Therapy Clinic and Other Papers, 1956–1965.
507–516. New York: International Universities Press.
Freud, Sigmund. 1968. The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund
Freud. Trans. and ed. James Strachey, in collaboration with Anna Freud, assisted
by Alix Strachey and Alan Tyson. 24 vols. London: Hogarth Press and Institute
for Psychoanalysis.
. The interpretation of dreams (Second Part). 1900. Vol. 5. 339–632.
. The psychopathology of everyday life. 1901. Vol. 6. 1–310.
. Creative writers and day-dreaming. 1908. Vol. 9. 141–153.
156 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

. The future prospects of psycho-analytic therapy. 1910. Vol. 11. 139–151.

. The dynamics of transference. 1912. Vol. 12. 97–108.
. Remembering, repeating and working through (Further recommendations on the tech-
nique of psycho-analysis. II). 1914a. Vol. 12. 145–156.
. Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. 1911. Vol. 12. 215–226.
. Some refl ections of schoolboy psychology. 1914b. Vol. 13. 241–244.
. On transience. 1916. Vol. 14. 303–308.
. On the teaching of psycho-analysis in universities. 1919. Vol. 17. 171–173.
. The ego and the id. 1923. Vol. 19. 3–66.
. The resistance to psycho-analysis. 1925a. Vol. 19. 212–222.
. Negation. 1925b. Vol. 19. 235–239.
. Preface to Aichhorn’s “Wayward Youth.” 1925c. Vol. 19. 273–275.
. Civilization and its discontents. 1930 [1929]. Vol. 21. 64–145.
. New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. 1933 [1932]. Vol. 22. 5–182.
. Analysis terminable and interminable. 1937. Vol. 23. 209–254.
Freud, Sigmund, and C. G. Jung. 1974. The Freud/Jung letters: the correspondence between
Sigmund Freud and C. G. Jung. Trans. Ralph Manheim and R. F. C. Hull and ed.
W. McGuire. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Frie, Roger, ed. 2003. Understanding experience: psychotherapy and postmodernism. New
York: Routledge.
Friedman, Susan Stanford, ed. 2002. Analyzing Freud: letters of H.D., Bryher, and their
circle. New York: New Directions Books.
Goleman, Daniel. 2000. Working with emotional intelligence. New York: Bantan.
Green, André. 1999. The fabric of affect in the psychoanalytic discourse. Trans. Alan Sheri-
dan. London: Routledge.
. 2000. Experience and thinking in analytic practice. In André Green at the
Squiggle Foundation. Ed. Jan Abram. 1–15. London: Karnac Books.
Greene, Maxine. 1973. Teacher as stranger: educational philosophy for the modern age. Bel-
mont, Calif: Wadsworth.
H. D. 1974. Tribute to Freud: writing on the wall and advent. New York: New Directions.
. 2003. Ion. In Hippolytus temporizes and Ion: adaptations of two plays by Euripides.
145–261. New York: New Directions.
Hullot-Kentor, Robert. 2006. Things beyond resemblance: collected essays on Theodor W.
Adorno. New York: Columbia University Press.
Infante, Jose A. 1995. Some reflections on phantasy and creativity. In On Freud’s
“Creative writers and day-dreaming.” Ed. Ethel Spector, Peter Fonagy, and Servulo
Augusto Figueira. 53–64. New Haven: Yale University.
Ishiguro, Kazuo. 2005. Never let me go. Toronto: Knopf.
Jacobus, Mary. 1999. Psychoanalysis and the scene of reading. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
. 2005. The poetics of psychoanalysis: in the wake of Klein. Oxford: Oxford Uni-
versity Press.
 REFERENCES 157

James, William. 1950. The principles of psychology. 1890. Vol. 1 and 2. New York: Dover.
. 1983. Talks to teachers on psychology and to students on some of life’s ideals. 1899.
Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Jersild, Arthur Thomas. 1955. When teachers face themselves. New York: Teachers Col-
lege Press.
Joseph, Betty. 1997. On understanding and not understanding: some technical issues.
1983. In Psychic equilibrium and psychic change selected papers of Betty Joseph. Ed.
Michael Feldman, and Elizabeth Bott Spillius. London: Routledge Press.
Kant, Immanuel. 1965. The critique of pure reason. Trans. Norman Kemp Smith.
Unabridged ed. New York: St. Martin’s Press.
Klein, Melanie. 1975. The importance of symbol-formation in the development of
the ego. 1930. In Love, guilt, and reparation & other works, 1921–1945. Vol. 1.
219–232. New York: Delacorte/Seymour Lawrence.
. 1975. A contribution to the theory of intellectual inhibition. 1931. In Love,
guilt, and reparation & other works, 1921–1945. 236–248. New York: Delacorte/
Seymour Lawrence.
. 1975. The significance of early anxiety-situations in the development of the
ego. 1932. In The psychoanalysis of children. Vol. 2. Trans. Alix Strachey. 176–195.
London: Hogarth Press.
. 1975. A contribution to the psychogenesis of manic-depressive states. 1935.
In Love, guilt, and reparation & other works, 1921–1945. Vol. 1. 262–289. New York:
Delacorte/Seymour Lawrence.
. 1964. Love, guilt and reparation. 1937. In Love, hate and reparation. By Mela-
nie Klein and Joan Rivere. 57–119. New York: Norton.
. 1975. Mourning and its relation to manic-depressive states. 1940. In Love,
guilt, and reparation & other works, 1921–1945. Vol. 1. 344–369. New York: Dela-
corte/Seymour Lawrence.
. 1975. Notes on some schizoid mechanisms. 1946. In Envy and gratitude and
other works, 1946–1963. Vol. 3. 1–24. New York: Delcorte/Seymour Lawrence.
. 1975. Some theoretical conclusions regarding the emotional life of the infant.
1952. In Envy and gratitude and other works, 1946–1963. Vol. 3. 61–93. New York:
Delcorte/Seymour Lawrence.
. 1975. Envy and gratitude. 1957. In Envy and gratitude, and other works, 1946–
1963. Vol. 3. 176–235. London: Delacorte/Seymour Lawrence.
Kofman, Sarah. 2007a. The impossible profession. In Selected writings of Sarah Kofman.
Trans. Patience Moll and ed. Thomas Albecht, Georgia Albert, and Elizabeth
Rottenberg. 56–70. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
. 2007b. “My life” and psychoanalysis. In Selected writings of Sarah Kofman.
Trans. Patience Moll and ed. Thomas Albecht, Georgia Albert, and Elizabeth
Rottenberg. 250–251. Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Kohon, Gregorio. 1986a. Notes on the history of the psychoanalytic movement
in Great Britain. In The British School of psychoanalysis: the Independent tradition.
24–50. Ed. Gregorio Kohon. London: Free Association Books.
158 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

. 1986b. Countertransference: An Independent view. In The British School of

psychoanalysis: the Independent tradition. 51–73. Ed. Gregorio Kohon. London: Free
Association Books.
. 2005. Love in a time of madness. In Love and its vicissitudes. Ed. André Green
and Gregorio Kohon. 43–100. London: Routledge.
. 2007. Borderline traces and the question of diagnosis. In Resonance of suffering:
countertransference in non-neurotic structures. Ed. André Green. 203–215. London:
International Psychoanalytic Association.
Kristeva, Julia. 1982. Powers of horror: An essay on abjection. Trans. Leon S. Roudiez.
New York: Columbia University Press.
. 1989. Black sun: depression and melancholia. Trans. Leon S. Roudiez. New
York: Columbia University Press.
. 1991. Strangers to ourselves. Trans. Leon S. Roudiz. New York: Columbia
University Press.
. 1998. Psychoanalysis and freedom. Trans. Charles Levin. Canadian Journal of
Psychoanalysis 7(1):1–21.
. 2001. Melanie Klein. Trans. Ross Guberman. New York: Columbia Univer-
sity Press.
. 2007. Adolescence, a syndrome of ideality. Trans. Michael Marder and Patri-
cia I. Vieira. Psychoanalytic Review, 94(5):715–725.
Lacan, Jacques. 1998a. Encore. On feminine sexuality: the limits of love and knowledge.
1972–1973. Bk. 20. The seminar of Jacques Lacan. Trans. Bruce Fink and ed.
Jacques-Alain Miller. New York: Norton.
. 1998b. The four fundamental concepts of psycho-analysis. Bk. 11. The seminar of
Jacques Lacan. Trans. Alan Sheridan and ed. Jacques-Alain Miller. New York:
Norton.
. 2006a. The direction of the treatment and the principles of power. In Ecrits:
the first complete edition in English. Trans. Bruce Fink in collaboration with Heloise
Fink and Russell Grigg. 489–542. New York: Norton.
. 2006b. The situation of psychoanalysis and the training of psychoanalysis in
1956. In Ecrits. Trans. Bruce Fink in collaboration with Heloise Fink and Russell
Grigg. 384–407. New York: Norton.
Laplanche, Jean. 1999. The drive and its source-object: its fate in the transference. In
Essays on otherness. Ed. John Fletcher. 117–132. London: Routledge.
Lear, Jonathan. 2003. Therapeutic action: An earnest plea for irony. New York: Other Press.
. 2006. Radical hope: ethics in the face of cultural devastation. Cambridge: Harvard
University Press.
Loewald, Hans. 2000a. Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion.
In The essential Loewald: collected papers and monographs. 87–101. Hagerstown, MD:
University Pub. Group.
. 2000b. On the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. 1960. The essential Loe-
wald: collected papers and monographs. 221–256. Hagerstown, MD: University Pub.
Group.
 REFERENCES 159

Lyotard, Jean François. 1987. The postmodern condition: A report on knowledge. Trans.
Geoff Bennington and Brian Massumi. Manchester: Manchester University
Press.
Mann, Thomas. 2005. The magic mountain. 1924. Trans. John E. Woods. New York:
Knopf.
McDougall, Joyce. 1995. The many faces of Eros: A psychoanalytic exploration of human
sexuality. New York: Norton.
Meltzer, Donald. 1992. The claustrum: An investigation of claustrophobic phenomena. Lon-
don: Roland Harris Education Trust.
Meltzer, Donald, and Meg Harris Williams. 1988. The apprehension of beauty: the role of
aesthetic conflict in development, violence and art. Worcester: Clunie Press.
. 2004. Aesthetic confl ict: its place in the developmental process. In Psycho-
analysis and art: Kleinian perspectives. Ed. Sandra Gosso. 178–200. London: Karnac
Books.
Molino, Anthony, ed. 1997. Freely associated encounters in psychoanalysis. London: Free
Association Books.
Newcombe, Rachel. 2007. Beyond redemption. Psychoanalytic Review, 94(3):447–461.
Paskauskas, R. Andrew, ed. 1995. The complete correspondence of Sigmund Freud and
Ernest Jones, 1908–1939. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Phillips, Adam. 2006. Introduction. In Sigmund Freud: the Penguin Freud reader. vii–xv.
New York: Penguin.
Pitt, Alice J., and Chloe Brushwood-Rose. 2007. The significance of emotions in
teaching and learning: on making emotional significance. International Journal of
Leadership in Education, 10:1–11.
Polk, Richard. 2006. The emergency of being: on Heidegger’s contributions to philosophy.
Ithaca: Cornell University Press.
Powers, Richard. 2006. The echo maker. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux.
Racker, Heinrich. 2002. Transference and counter-transference. London: Karnac Press.
Readings, Bill. 1996. The university in ruins. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Richardson, Robert D. 2006. William James: in the maelstrom of American modernism.
Boston: Houghton Miffl in.
Ricœur, Paul. 2004. Memory, history, forgetting. Trans. Kathleen Blamey and David
Pellauer. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
. 2005. The course of recognition. Trans. David Pellauer. Cambridge: Harvard
University Press.
Riviere, Joan. 1964. Hate, greed and aggression. 1937. In Love, hate and reparation. By
Melanie Klein and Joan Riviere. 3–56. New York: Norton.
Rose, Jacqueline. 1986. Sexuality in the field of vision. London: Verso.
. 1993. Why war? Psychoanalysis, politics, and the return to Melanie Klein. Oxford:
Blackwell.
Roth, Joseph. 2003. What I saw: reports from Berlin, 1920–1933. Trans. Michael Hof-
mann. German selection by Michael Bienert. New York: Norton.
160 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

Rottenberg, Elizabeth. 2005. Inheriting the future: legacies of Kant, Freud, and Flaubert.
Stanford: Stanford University Press.
Ruti, Mari. 2006. Reinventing the soul: posthumanist theory and psychic life. New York:
Other Press.
Ryding, Erik, and Rebecca Pechefsky. 2001. Bruno Walter: A world elsewhere. New
Haven: Yale University Press.
Santer, Eric L. 2001. On the psychotheology of everyday life: refl ections on Freud and Rosen-
zweig. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Sedgwick, Eve Kosofsky. 1997. Paranoid reading and reparative reading; or you’re
so paranoid, you probably think this introduction is about you. In Novel gazing:
queer readings in fi ction. Ed. Eve Kosofsky Sedwick. 1–37. Durham: Duke Univer-
sity Press.
Slavitt, David R. 2007. Translator’s preface. In The Theban plays of Sophocles. Trans.
David Slavitt. ix–xi. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Steiner, George. 1980. On difficulty. In On diffi culty, and other essays. 18–47. Oxford:
Oxford University Press.
Strachey, James. 1990. The nature of the therapeutic action of psycho-analysis. 1934.
In Essential papers on transference. Ed. Aaron Esman. 49–79. New York: New York
University Press.
Turkle, Sherry. Diary. In London Review of Books. 28:8 (April 20, 2006), 36–37.
Urribarri, Fernando. 2007. The analyst’s psychic work: And the three concepts of
countertransference. In Resonance of suffering: countertransference in non-neurotic
structures. Ed. André Green. 165–186. London: International Psychoanalytic
Association.
von Unwerth, Matthew. 2005. Freud’s requiem: mourning, memory, and the invisible his-
tory of a summer walk. New York: Riverhead Books.
Walter, Bruno. 1961. Of music and music-making. Trans. Paul Hamburger. New York:
Norton.
. 1966. Theme and variations, an autobiography. Trans. James Galston. New York:
Knopf.
Winnicott, D. W. 1986a. The theory of parent-infant relationship. 1960. In The matu-
rational processes and the facilitating environment: studies in the theory of emotional devel-
opment. 37–55. Madison, CT: International Universities Press.
. 1986b. The aims of psycho-analytical treatment. 1962. In The maturational
processes and the facilitating environment studies in the theory of emotional development.
166–170. Madison, CT: International Universities Press.
. 1987. Dependence in child care. 1970. In Babies and their mothers. Ed. Clare
Winnicott, Ray Shepherd, and Madeleine Davis. 83–88. Reading, MA: Addison-
Wesley.
. 1988. Counter-transference. 1960. In Essential papers on countertransference. Ed.
Benjamin Wolstein. 262–269. New York: New York University Press.
. 1992. Hate in the countertransference. 1947. In Through paediatrics to psycho-
analysis: collected papers. 194–203. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
 REFERENCES 161

. 1996. Yes, but how do we know it’s true? 1950. In Thinking about children.
Ed. Jennifer Johns, Ray Shepherd, and Helen Taylor Robinson. 13–21. Reading,
MA: Addison-Wesley.
. 2001. Tailpiece. In Playing and reality. 151. Philadelphia, PA: Brunner-
Routledge.
Wolstein, Benjamin. 1988. Introduction. In Essential papers on countertransference. 1–15.
New York: New York University Press.
This page intentionally left blank.
 Index

action, 54–55, 71–72, 123 and hatred of development, 27, 38–41

adolescence, 58. See also wayward youth and hatred of learning, 22, 31
Adorno, Theodor, 11–12 on learning, 40
on art, 72, 73, 86, 116, 119, 145–146 and thinking, 2, 10–11, 38–41, 86,
and critical theory, 77, 132 149n.1
and a dream, 70–71 Bollas, Christopher, 137
on education, 11–12 Bolognini, Stefano, 150n.6
and Max Horkheimer, 77
on music, 116 childhood, 1–2, 28–29, 32, 36, 52, 58
on psychology, 70–72, 132 clinical experience, 6, 19, 133–134
on regression, 11–12, 27 consciousness, 15, 33–34, 61, 63–64, 67,
aesthetic confl ict, 48, 105–106, 115, 119 78–79
affect, 8–9, 10–11, 13–15, 72–73, 82, Copjec, Joan, 134
86–87, 95, 136–137, 139 copycats, 19, 52–54
Agamben, Giorgio, 130 countertransference, 3–6, 24–25, 82, 90,
Aichhorn, August, 128, 138 93–100
anxiety, 12–14, 48–49, 52, 61, 66, 72, 77, creative writers, 112–113, 124
87–88, 89–90, 130 critical theory, 77, 131–133
Arendt, Hannah, 52, 108, 121–122 culture, 78–79, 137
on crisis of education, 31, 35–38, 42
on existence, 44 dependency, 29, 37, 89–90
on human action, 54–55 depressive position, 13, 24, 65, 73, 77,
on natality, 2, 27, 54 78–79. See also Melanie Klein
art, 9, 15–16, 72, 104–105, 107, 119, Derrida, Jacques, 37, 41, 136
145–146 desire, 18, 20–21, 47, 54–55, 62, 64, 95,
attention, 4, 33–34 106, 144
Aulagnier, Piera, 61–62, 64, 77, 84, 150n.4 despair, 77
authority, 4, 35, 36–37 development, 22, 27–28, 38, 50, 64
avoidance, 34 dreams, vii-x, xi, 52, 70–72, 75, 79, 94, 110
and the dream-work, vii-viii
Badiou, Alain, 8–9, 42 drives, 79, 87, 89
Bass, Alan, 137
Bick, Ester, 87–88, 89–90 Edmundson, Mark, 151n.3
Bion, Wilfred education. See also psychoanalytic education
on bad jobs, 26, 146–48 and art, 9, 15–16, 125
on emotional storms, 131, 147 and crisis, 24, 31, 35–38, 42–44, 64, 105

163
164 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

and love, 16–17, 21, 37 gratitude, 56

and memories of, 1–2, 28 Green, André, 72–73, 136–137
and neurosis, 5 Greene, Maxine, 30, 36
and reality principle, 16–17 group psychology, 39–41
and regression, 5
and resistance, 2, 85–86, 120–121, 135, H.D. (Hilda Doolittle), 25, 103–104, 108,
140 111–112, 113–114, 150–151n.1
ego, 14, 63–64, 105, 120–121 and Freud, 103–104, 108–114
and ego defenses, 7, 15, 71–72, 128–129 and Ion, 103, 124–215, 152n.7
Entartete Musik (unnatural music), 107, Hamlet, 36, 37
151–152n.4 happiness, 77
Eros, 8, 79, 89, 95, 137 hate
essentialism, 29 and countertransference, 96–99, 140,
existence, 5, 9, 13, 21, 30, 36, 38, 44, 54 144
experience, xii, 6–7, 22, 28–30, 33, and hatred of development, 22, 38
39–40, 41, 43–44, 87 and hatred of education, 38–39
Horkheimer, Max, 77
Feder, Stuart, 115–116 Hullot-Kentor, Robert, 77
feelings, 83, 85, 92–93
Felman, Shoshana, 49, 66–67 idealization, 41, 97–98
Fodor, Jerry, 63 identification with the aggressor, 71–72,
Foucault, Michael, 62, 131, 152n.7 142
freedom, 30, 105, 106–107, 116, 119 ignorance, 146–148
Freud, Anna, 5–6, 7, 19, 24–25, 66, 71, and passion for, 8, 86, 133
92 imagination, 15, 68, 104–06, 112–13, 120,
Freud, Sigmund, 12, 151n.3 123, 124–125
and anti-Semitism, 113–114 impartiality, 104, 106–107
and artists, 112–113 impossible professions, 3, 20, 128–130,
on bodily ego, 63–64 135, 143
on countertransference, 94 impossibility, 20–21, 146–147
on dreams, vii-viii infancy, 11, 12–13, 29, 150n.5
on education, 4, 16, 81–82, 128 Infante, Jose, 124
and H.D., 103–104, 108–114 inhibitions, 49–50, 113
on impossible professions, 3–5, 127–130, integration, 73
135–136 interest, 35
and Mahler, 115–116 interpretation, 95–96, 137, 139–140
on negation, 128 intolerance, 120–121
on psychoanalytic process, 123 irony, 18, 46, 134
on resistance to psychoanalysis, 68–70, Ishiguro, Kazuo
128–129, 131, 135–136 and Never let me go, 22–23, 45–48
and Rilke, 114–115
on students, 81–82 Jacobus, Mary, 49, 50, 51
on thinking, 14–16, 123 James, William, 27, 31–35
on transference, 4, 21, 49, 94 Jersild, Arthur, 88–89
on transience, 115 Jewish Museum of Berlin, 108, 119,
and Walter, 116–118 121–122, 151n.3
as writer, 111–113
frustration, 11, 12, 39. See also experience Kant, Immanuel, 149n.2
 INDEX 165

Keats, John, 118 mothers

Klein, Melanie and infants, 12–14, 17, 49–50, 72,
on depressive position, 13, 73, 78–79 98–99, 106, 124, 150n.4
and emotions of love and hate, 12–14 See also Melanie Klein, natality, and
and infant/mother relations, 12–13, Winnicott
49–51, 72 music, 70, 107, 115–117, 119, 151–152n.4,
on learning, 65, 66, 73, 127 152n.5
on reading inhibitions, 50
on school life, 127 narcissism, 85, 129–130, 142–144
on symbolic equation, 72 natality, 2, 7, 27, 36–37, 54–55, 106
and ‘unreal reality’, 48, 59 negation, 10, 46, 128
knowledge, 41, 42, 49, 50, 62–63, 64, negative capability, 118–119
66–67, 69, 77, 144, 149n.2 neurons, 63
Kofman, Sarah, vii-viii, 134, 135 neuroscience, 65
Kohon, Gregorio, 82 neurosis, 7, 115
Kristeva, Julia, 30, 58, 105–106, 115, 123, nostalgia, 43
124, 143
object, 149–150n.3
Lacan, Jacques object relations, 50–51, 82–83, 106
on impossibility, 20–21 Oedipus complex, 7–8, 55, 62, 124, 132, 138
and the passion for ignorance, 64, 86, ontological difficulties, 45, 47, 50
133, 138
and the subject presumed to know, 26, paranoid schizoid position, 49, 50, 148. See
144 also Melanie Klein
and teaching, 64 pedagogy, xi-xii, 8–9, 34–35, 42–44, 121,
and transference, 139, 140 144–145
language, x, 19, 47–48, 51, 55–56, 84–85 phantasy, 12–14, 50–51
Laplanche, Jean, 133 Phillips, Adam, 112
Lear, Jonathan, 24, 26, 46, 67, 78–79 Pitt, Alice, 149n.1
learning, ix, 24–25, 39–41, 65, 69, 73, pleasure principle, 14–16, 120
77–78, 93, 123, 143 Polk, Richard, 141
lectures, 33–34, 66, 68–73 Powers, Richard
literature, 10, 23–24, 66–67 and The Echo Maker, 67, 75–77
Loewald, Hans, 27, 123–124 professional work, 99–100
love, 12–13, 21, 37, 49–50. See also projective identification, 51
transference psychic survival, 137–138, 141, 148
and hate, 3–4, 17, 96–97, 127–128, psychoanalysis
144 and the arts, 16, 104–105, 112–113. See
Lyotard, Jean, 42 also aesthetic confl ict
and education, ix-x, 5–6, 9–10,
Mann, Thomas 135–136, 137–138
and The Magic Mountain, 61, 67, 73–75 and goals of, x
McDougall, Joyce, 137, 141, 148 and objections and obstacles, 18–19,
Meltzer, Donald, 70 111–112, 134–136
and Meg Harris Williams, 48, and practice, 92–93, 134–136
105–106, 119, 151n.2 psychoanalytic education, ix-x, xi, 5–6,
memory, 120–22 9–10, 90–93, 100–101, 133–137
misunderstanding, 54, 56, 94–95 psychoanalytic reading, 48–52, 58–59
166 THE VERY THOUGHT OF EDUCATION

psychology, 23–24, 33–34, 61–64, 69 teacher education, 3, 22, 28–30, 38–41,

41–44, 91–93
Racker, Heinrich, 94–95 teachers, xi-xii, 28–30, 31, 33–38, 82–83,
radical hope, 24, 26, 67, 75, 77–79. See also 85–87, 88–89, 97, 142–144
Jonathan Lear testimony, 119–120, 121, 125
reading, 22–23, 45, 48–49, 50–51, 59 theory, 56–57, 128–129, 133
Readings, Bill, 42–43 and practice, 19–20, 39, 68,
reality, 13–16, 33, 40, 47, 120, 137, 145 133–134
and reality principle, 14–16, 120 therapeutic action, 95–96, 137
recognition, 55–56 thinking, 9, 11, 12, 14–15, 39–40,
regression, 11–12, 27, 90 145–146
relational artifacts, 46 and emotional pain, 10–11
remembering, 123 and empty thoughts, 86, 149n.2
repetition, 15–16 transference, x, xi, 2, 3–5, 8, 17, 21, 49,
repression, 28–29, 128 81–82, 134–135, 136, 138–141, 143,
resistance, 18–19, 68–69, 111–112, 123, 144, 151n.2
128–130, 130–138 transience, 115
responsibility, 18, 22, 29, 31, 32, 36–37, truth, 8–9, 106–107, 150n.6, 152n.7
44, 105, 117–118, 124–125 Turkle, Sherry, 46
Ricoeur, Paul, 56, 120
Riviere, Joan, 13 Ullman, Micha
Rose, Jacqueline, 118, 150–51n.1 and The Empty library, 107, 121
Roth, Joseph, 107 uncertainty, ix, 30–31, 39, 43–44, 61, 101,
Rottenberg, Elizabeth, 120 131, 144
Ruti, Mari, 131 the unconscious, 4, 16, 38, 48, 64, 66,
68–69, 81, 82, 92, 110, 133, 148
Santer, Eric, 120–121 the university, 7–8, 41–44
secret thinking, 20, 150n.4 Urribarri, Fernando, 92, 96
Sedgwick, Eve, 49
singularity, 137 von Unwerth, Matthew, 115
Slavitt, David, 7–8
slow readers, 48–50 Walter, Bruno, 107, 117, 119, 152n.5
soul, 32, 43, 56–57, 58, 108 wayward youth, 138
Steiner, George, 45 Winnicott, D.W.
Strachey, James, 50, 95–96 and countertransference, 96–100, 140,
students, xi-xii, 56–57, 69–70, 76, 81–82, 144
97 on the infant, 29
subject supposed to know, 26, 141, on interpretation, 139–140
144–146. See also Lacan on learning psychology, 69–70
subjectivity, 66, 131–133, 138 on paradox, 101, 150n.5
symbolic equation, 72, 75. See also Klein, Wolstein, Benjamin, 94
Melanie working through, 104, 120, 123
symbolization, 13–14, 72–73, 78, 106,
116, 121 Zeitroman, 23–24, 67, 73–75
EDUCATION / PSYCHOLOGY

SUNY
P R E S S
NEW YORK PRESS